log when initializing mutex and rwlock

Remove Debian 8 ("jessie") from the GitLab CI

See merge request isc-projects/bind9!3281

.clang-format

@@ -11,7 +11,6 @@ BraceWrapping:
   AfterFunction:   false # should also be MultiLine, but not yet supported
   AfterExternBlock: false
   BeforeElse:      false
-  BeforeWhile:     false
   IndentBraces:    false
   SplitEmptyFunction: true
 AllowShortIfStatementsOnASingleLine: false
@@ -20,7 +19,6 @@ AlwaysBreakAfterReturnType: All
 Cpp11BracedListStyle: false
 ColumnLimit: 80
 AlignAfterOpenBracket: Align
-AlignConsecutiveBitFields: true
 AlignConsecutiveDeclarations: false
 AlignConsecutiveMacros: true
 AlignTrailingComments: true
@@ -64,7 +62,6 @@ IncludeCategories:
     Priority:        1
   - Regex:           '.*'
     Priority:        0
-IndentExternBlock: NoIndent
 KeepEmptyLinesAtTheStartOfBlocks: false
 MaxEmptyLinesToKeep: 1
 PenaltyBreakAssignment: 30

.clang-format.headers

@@ -11,7 +11,6 @@ BraceWrapping:
   AfterFunction:   false # should also be MultiLine, but not yet supported
   AfterExternBlock: false
   BeforeElse:      false
-  BeforeWhile:     false
   IndentBraces:    false
   SplitEmptyFunction: true
 AllowShortIfStatementsOnASingleLine: false
@@ -20,7 +19,6 @@ AlwaysBreakAfterReturnType: All
 Cpp11BracedListStyle: false
 ColumnLimit: 80
 AlignAfterOpenBracket: Align
-AlignConsecutiveBitFields: true
 AlignConsecutiveDeclarations: true
 AlignConsecutiveMacros: true
 AlignTrailingComments: true
@@ -52,7 +50,6 @@ IncludeCategories:
     Priority:        1
   - Regex:           '".*"'
     Priority:        9
-IndentExternBlock: NoIndent
 KeepEmptyLinesAtTheStartOfBlocks: false
 MaxEmptyLinesToKeep: 1
 PenaltyBreakAssignment: 30

.dir-locals.el

@@ -77,9 +77,6 @@
 	       (expand-file-name
 		(concat directory-of-current-dir-locals-file "bin/rndc/include"))
 
-	       (expand-file-name "/usr/include/libxml2")
-	       (expand-file-name "/usr/include/json-c")
-	       
 	       (expand-file-name "/usr/local/opt/openssl@1.1/include")
 	       (expand-file-name "/usr/local/opt/libxml2/include/libxml2")
 	       (expand-file-name "/usr/local/opt/json-c/include/json-c/")
@@ -109,9 +106,6 @@
 	 (list
 	  "--enable=all"
 	  "--suppress=missingIncludeSystem"
-	  "--suppress=nullPointerRedundantCheck"
-	  (concat "--suppressions-list=" (expand-file-name
-			       (concat directory-of-current-dir-locals-file "util/suppressions.txt")))
 	  (concat "-include=" (expand-file-name
 			       (concat directory-of-current-dir-locals-file "config.h")))
 	  )

.gitattributes

@@ -1,8 +1,6 @@
 *.sln.in eol=crlf
 *.vcxproj.* eol=crlf
 
-/fuzz/dns_rdata_fromwire_text.in/input-* -text
-
 .gitignore			 export-ignore
 /conftools			 export-ignore
 /doc/design			 export-ignore

.gitignore

@@ -12,7 +12,6 @@
 *_test
 *.ipch # vscode/intellisense precompiled header
 *~
-__pycache__/
 .ccache/
 .cproject
 .deps/
@@ -52,7 +51,6 @@ __pycache__/
 /stamp-h1
 /test-driver
 Makefile
-Makefile.user
 ans.run
 gen.dSYM/
 kyua.log
@@ -60,8 +58,7 @@ named.memstats
 named.run
 timestamp
 /compile_commands.json
+/cppcheck_html/
+/cppcheck.results
 /tsan
 /util/check-make-install
-# clangd index directory
-/\.cache/
-/\.*_clangd/

.gitlab/issue_templates/Release.md

@@ -59,6 +59,7 @@
  - [ ] ***(QA)*** Ensure all new tags are annotated and signed.
  - [ ] ***(SwEng)*** Push tags for the published releases to the public repository.
  - [ ] ***(SwEng)*** Merge the automatically prepared `prep 9.X.Y` commit which updates `version` and documentation on the release branch into the relevant maintenance branch (`v9_X`).
+ - [ ] ***(QA)*** For each maintained branch, update the `BIND_BASELINE_VERSION` variable for the `abi-check:sid:amd64` job in `.gitlab-ci.yml` to the latest published BIND version tag for a given branch.
 
 [^1]: If not, use the time remaining until the tagging deadline to ensure all outstanding issues are either resolved or moved to a different milestone.
 

.pylintrc

@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-[MASTER]
-disable=
-    C0103, # invalid-name
-    C0114, # missing-module-docstring
-    C0115, # missing-class-docstring
-    C0116, # missing-function-docstring
-    C0209, # consider-using-f-string
-    C0415, # import-outside-toplevel
-    R0801, # duplicate-code

.reuse/dep5

@@ -1,231 +0,0 @@
-Format: https://www.debian.org/doc/packaging-manuals/copyright-format/1.0/
-Upstream-Name: BIND 9
-Upstream-Contact: Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC") <info@isc.org>
-Source: https://gitlab.isc.org/isc-projects/bind9/
-
-#
-# Build system, data files from tests, and misc cruft
-#
-Files: **/README
-       **/*.after*
-       **/*.bad
-       **/*.batch
-       **/*.before*
-       **/*.ccache
-       **/*.good
-       **/*.key
-       **/*.pem
-       **/*.private
-       **/*.raw
-       **/*.saved
-       **/*.zonelist
-       **/*dig.out*
-       **/Makefile
-       **/Makefile.*
-       **/expect
-       **/testdata/*
-       .github/*
-       .gitlab/*
-       AUTHORS
-       CHANGES
-       COPYRIGHT
-       CODE_OF_CONDUCT
-       CONTRIBUTING
-       HISTORY
-       Kyuafile
-       Makefile
-       Makefile.*
-       OPTIONS
-       README
-       bin/named/bind9.xsl
-       bin/named/bind9.xsl.h
-       bin/tests/bigtest/zones
-       bin/tests/optional/rbt_test.out
-       bin/tests/system/checkdstool/dig.bat
-       bin/tests/system/checkdstool/*.db
-       bin/tests/system/checkzone/zones/bad-caa-rr.db
-       bin/tests/system/checkzone/zones/bad1.db
-       bin/tests/system/checkzone/zones/crashzone.db
-       bin/tests/system/dnstap/large-answer.fstrm
-       bin/tests/system/formerr/nametoolong
-       bin/tests/system/formerr/noquestions
-       bin/tests/system/formerr/twoquestions
-       bin/tests/system/journal/ns1/managed-keys.bind.in
-       bin/tests/system/journal/ns1/managed-keys.bind.jnl.in
-       bin/tests/system/journal/ns2/managed-keys.bind.in
-       bin/tests/system/journal/ns2/managed-keys.bind.jnl.in
-       bin/tests/system/keepalive/expected
-       bin/tests/system/legacy/ns6/edns512.db.signed
-       bin/tests/system/legacy/ns7/edns512-notcp.db.signed
-       bin/tests/system/notify/ns4/named.port.in
-       bin/tests/system/nsupdate/commandlist
-       bin/tests/system/nsupdate/verylarge.in
-       bin/tests/system/org.isc.bind.system.plist
-       bin/tests/system/pipelined/input
-       bin/tests/system/pipelined/inputb
-       bin/tests/system/pipelined/ref
-       bin/tests/system/pipelined/refb
-       bin/tests/system/pkcs11/2037-pk11_numbits-crash-test.pkt
-       bin/tests/system/pkcs11/usepkcs11
-       bin/tests/system/rsabigexponent/ns2/dsset-example.in
-       bin/tests/system/run.gdb
-       bin/tests/system/runtime/ctrl-chars
-       bin/tests/system/runtime/long-cmd-line
-       bin/tests/system/statschannel/traffic.expect.1
-       bin/tests/system/statschannel/traffic.expect.2
-       bin/tests/system/statschannel/traffic.expect.4
-       bin/tests/system/statschannel/traffic.expect.5
-       bin/tests/system/statschannel/traffic.expect.6
-       bin/tests/system/tcp/1996-alloc_dnsbuf-crash-test.pkt
-       bin/tests/system/tsig/badlocation
-       bin/tests/system/tsig/badtime
-       bin/tests/system/unknown/large.out
-       bin/tests/system/xfer/ans5/badkeydata
-       bin/tests/system/xfer/ans5/badmessageid
-       bin/tests/system/xfer/ans5/goodaxfr
-       bin/tests/system/xfer/ans5/partial
-       bin/tests/system/xfer/ans5/soamismatch
-       bin/tests/system/xfer/ans5/unknownkey
-       bin/tests/system/xfer/ans5/unsigned
-       bin/tests/system/xfer/ans5/wrongkey
-       bin/tests/system/xfer/ans5/wrongname
-       bin/tests/system/xfer/knowngood.mapped
-       bind.keys
-       cocci/*.cocci
-       cocci/*.disabled
-       cocci/*.spatch
-       doc/arm/isc-logo.pdf
-       doc/arm/requirements.txt
-       doc/man/*.1in
-       doc/man/*.5in
-       doc/man/*.8in
-       fuzz/*.in/*
-Copyright: Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-License: MPL-2.0
-
-#
-# Libtool Files
-#
-Files: aclocal.m4
-       ltmain.sh
-       m4/libtool.m4
-       m4/ltoptions.m4
-       m4/ltsugar.m4
-       m4/ltversion.m4
-       m4/ltversion.m4
-       m4/lt~obsolete.m4
-Copyright: Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-License: GPL-3.0-or-later WITH Autoconf-exception-3.0
-
-#
-# DNSSEC Guide images
-#
-Files: doc/dnssec-guide/img/*.png
-Copyright: Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-License: MPL-2.0
-
-#
-# DLZ Modules
-#
-Files: contrib/dlz/modules/*/testing/*
-Copyright: Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-	   Stichting NLnet, Netherlands
-License: ISC and MPL-2.0
-
-#
-# Stuff that's basically uncopyrightable (configuration, generated files),
-# use CC0-1.0 for clarity that we don't care
-#
-Files: **/.clang-format
-       **/.clang-format.headers
-       **/.dir-locals.el
-       **/.gitattributes
-       **/.gitignore
-       **/named*.args
-       **/named.dropedns
-       **/named.ednsformerr
-       **/named.ednsnotimp
-       **/named.ednsrefused
-       **/named.maxudp1460
-       **/named.maxudp512
-       **/named.noaa
-       **/named.noedns
-       **/named.nosoa
-       **/named.notcp
-       **/startme
-       .clang-format
-       .clang-format.headers
-       .dir-locals.el
-       .gitattributes
-       .gitignore
-       .gitlab-ci.yml
-       .lgtm.yml
-       .pylintrc
-       .uncrustify.cfg
-       config.guess
-       config.h.in
-       config.h.win32
-       config.threads.in
-       config.sub
-       configure
-       bin/tests/system/dlz/ns1/dns-root/*
-       doc/misc/*.zoneopt
-       doc/misc/options
-       doc/misc/options.active
-       install-sh
-       lib/dns/mapapi
-       mkinstalldirs
-       tsan-suppressions.txt
-       util/suppressions.txt
-       version
-Copyright: Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-License: CC0-1.0
-
-#
-# geoip2 test files (mmdb is generated from json)
-#
-Files: bin/tests/system/geoip2/data/*.json
-       bin/tests/system/geoip2/data/*.mmdb
-Copyright: Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-License: CC0-1.0
-
-#
-# files that may be left over from other branches.
-#
-# in a newly cloned branch or after running "git clean", these
-# files don't exist, but they can be left lying around after
-# checking out an older branch. we explicitly ignore them so they
-# won't clutter up the output when running "reuse lint" by hand
-# in a working source tree.
-#
-Files: **/platform.h
-       bin/tests/system/*.log
-       bin/tests/system/*.trs
-       fuzz/*.log
-       fuzz/*.trs
-       lib/*/tests/*.log
-       lib/*/tests/*.trs
-Copyright: Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-License: CC0-1.0
-
-#
-# Windows build system
-#
-Files: **/*.def
-       **/*.def.in
-       **/*.sln
-       **/*.sln.in
-       **/*.vcxproj.filters
-       **/*.vcxproj.filters.in
-       **/*.vcxproj
-       **/*.vcxproj.in
-       **/*.vcxproj.user
-       bin/win32/BINDInstall/BINDInstall.rc
-       bin/win32/BINDInstall/res/BINDInstall.ico
-       bin/win32/BINDInstall/res/BINDInstall.rc2
-       contrib/dlz/example/win32/dxdriver.dsp
-       contrib/dlz/example/win32/dxdriver.dsw
-       contrib/dlz/example/win32/dxdriver.mak
-       win32utils/GeoIP.diff
-Copyright: Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-License: CC0-1.0

.reuse/templates/isc.jinja2

@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-{% for copyright_line in copyright_lines %}
-{{ copyright_line }}
-{% endfor %}
-
-{% for expression in spdx_expressions %}
-SPDX-License-Identifier: {{ expression }}
-{% endfor %}
-
-{% if "MPL-2.0" in spdx_expressions %}
-This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
-License, v. 2.0.  If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
-file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
-
-See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
-information regarding copyright ownership.
-{% endif %}

CODE_OF_CONDUCT.md

@@ -1,16 +1,3 @@
-<!--
-Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-
-SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
-
-This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
-License, v. 2.0.  If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
-file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
-
-See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
-information regarding copyright ownership.
--->
-
 # BIND 9 Code of Conduct
 
 Like the technical community as a whole, the BIND 9 team and community is made
@@ -20,8 +7,8 @@ people.
 
 Diversity is one of our huge strengths, but it can also lead to communication
 issues and unhappiness. To that end, we have a few ground rules that we ask
-people to adhere to. This code applies equally to the core development team,
-open source contributors and those seeking help and guidance.
+people to adhere to. This code applies equally to the core development team, open source contributors and those
+seeking help and guidance.
 
 This isn't an exhaustive list of things that you can't do. Rather, take it in
 the spirit in which it's intended - a guide to make it easier to enrich all of

CONTRIBUTING

@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
 CONTRIBUTING
 
-BIND 9 Source Access and Contributor Guidelines
+BIND Source Access and Contributor Guidelines
 
-May 28, 2020
+Feb 22, 2018
 
 Contents
 
@@ -12,43 +12,47 @@ Contents
 
 Introduction
 
-Thank you for using BIND 9!
+Thank you for using BIND!
 
 BIND is open source software that implements the Domain Name System (DNS)
 protocols for the Internet. It is a reference implementation of those
 protocols, but it is also production-grade software, suitable for use in
-high-volume and high-reliability applications. It is very widely used DNS
-software, providing a robust and stable platform on top of which
-organizations can build distributed computing systems with the knowledge
-that those systems are fully compliant with published DNS standards.
+high-volume and high-reliability applications. It is by far the most
+widely used DNS software, providing a robust and stable platform on top of
+which organizations can build distributed computing systems with the
+knowledge that those systems are fully compliant with published DNS
+standards.
 
 BIND is and will always remain free and openly available. It can be used
 and modified in any way by anyone.
 
-BIND is maintained by Internet Systems Consortium, a public-benefit 501(c)
-(3) nonprofit, using a "managed open source" approach: anyone can see the
-source, but only ISC employees have commit access. In the past, the source
-could only be seen once ISC had published a release; read access to the
-source repository was restricted just as commit access was. That has
-changed, as ISC now provides a public git repository of the BIND source
-tree (see below).
+BIND is maintained by the Internet Systems Consortium, a public-benefit
+501(c)(3) nonprofit, using a "managed open source" approach: anyone can
+see the source, but only ISC employees have commit access. Until recently,
+the source could only be seen once ISC had published a release: read
+access to the source repository was restricted just as commit access was.
+That's now changing, with the opening of a public git mirror to the BIND
+source tree (see below).
 
-At ISC, we're committed to building communities that are welcoming and
-inclusive: environments where people are encouraged to share ideas, treat
-each other with respect, and collaborate towards the best solutions. To
-reinforce our commitment, ISC has adopted a slightly modified version of
-the Django Code of Conduct for the BIND 9 project, as well as for the
-conduct of our developers throughout the industry.
+At Internet Systems Consortium, we're committed to building communities
+that are welcoming and inclusive; environments where people are encouraged
+to share ideas, treat each other with respect, and collaborate towards the
+best solutions. To reinforce our commitment, the Internet Systems
+Consortium has adopted the Contributor Covenant version 1.4 as our Code of
+Conduct for BIND 9 project, as well as for the conduct of our developers
+throughout the industry.
 
 Access to source code
 
 Public BIND releases are always available from the ISC FTP site.
 
-A public-access git repository is also available at https://gitlab.isc.org
-. This repository contains all public release branches. Upcoming releases
-can be viewed in their current state at any time. Short-lived development
-branches contain unreviewed work in progress. Commits which address
-security vulnerablilities are withheld until after public disclosure.
+A public-access GIT repository is also available at https://gitlab.isc.org
+. This repository is a mirror, updated several times per day, of the
+source repository maintained by ISC. It contains all the public release
+branches; upcoming releases can be viewed in their current state at any
+time. It does not contain development branches or unreviewed work in
+progress. Commits which address security vulnerablilities are withheld
+until after public disclosure.
 
 You can browse the source online via https://gitlab.isc.org/isc-projects/
 bind9
@@ -63,26 +67,26 @@ branch, use:
 
       $ git checkout v9_12
 
-Whenever a branch is ready for publication, a tag is placed of the form
-v9_X_Y. The 9.12.0 release, for instance, is tagged as v9_12_0.
+Whenever a branch is ready for publication, a tag will be placed of the
+form v9_X_Y. The 9.12.0 release, for instance, is tagged as v9_12_0.
 
 The branch in which the next major release is being developed is called
-main.
+master.
 
 Reporting bugs
 
 Reports of flaws in the BIND package, including software bugs, errors in
 the documentation, missing files in the tarball, suggested changes or
-requests for new features, etc., can be filed using https://gitlab.isc.org
-/isc-projects/bind9/issues.
+requests for new features, etc, can be filed using https://gitlab.isc.org/
+isc-projects/bind9/issues.
 
 Due to a large ticket backlog, we are sometimes slow to respond,
 especially if a bug is cosmetic or if a feature request is vague or low in
-priority, but we try at least to acknowledge legitimate bug reports within
-a week.
+priority, but we will try at least to acknowledge legitimate bug reports
+within a week.
 
-ISC's GitLab system is publicly readable; however, you must have an
-account to create a new issue. You can either register locally or use
+ISC's ticketing system is publicly readable; however, you must have an
+account to file a new issue. You can either register locally or use
 credentials from an existing account at GitHub, GitLab, Google, Twitter,
 or Facebook.
 
@@ -100,19 +104,19 @@ list. ISC has a long history of handling reported vulnerabilities promptly
 and effectively and we respect and acknowledge responsible reporters.
 
 ISC's Security Vulnerability Disclosure Policy is documented at https://
-kb.isc.org/docs/aa-00861.
+kb.isc.org/article/AA-00861/0.
 
-If you have a crash, you may want to consult "What to do if your BIND or
-DHCP server has crashed."
+If you have a crash, you may want to consult ?What to do if your BIND or
+DHCP server has crashed.?
 
 Contributing code
 
-BIND is licensed under the Mozilla Public License 2.0. Earlier versions
+BIND is licensed under the Mozilla Public License 2.0. Earier versions
 (BIND 9.10 and earlier) were licensed under the ISC License
 
 ISC does not require an explicit copyright assignment for patch
 contributions. However, by submitting a patch to ISC, you implicitly
-certify that you are the author of the code, that you intend to relinquish
+certify that you are the author of the code, that you intend to reliquish
 exclusive copyright, and that you grant permission to publish your work
 under the open source license used for the BIND version(s) to which your
 patch will be applied.
@@ -120,18 +124,18 @@ patch will be applied.
 BIND code
 
 Patches for BIND may be submitted directly via merge requests in ISC's
-GitLab source repository for BIND.
+Gitlab source repository for BIND.
 
 Patches can also be submitted as diffs against a specific version of BIND
--- preferably the current top of the main branch. Diffs may be generated
+-- preferably the current top of the master branch. Diffs may be generated
 using either git format-patch or git diff.
 
 Those wanting to write code for BIND may be interested in the developer
 information page, which includes information about BIND design and coding
 practices, including discussion of internal APIs and overall system
-architecture.
+architecture. (This is a work in progress, and still quite preliminary.)
 
-Every patch submitted is reviewed by ISC engineers following our code
+Every patch submitted will be reviewed by ISC engineers following our code
 review process before it is merged.
 
 It may take considerable time to review patch submissions, especially if
@@ -166,24 +170,27 @@ All functional changes should be documented. There are three types of
 documentation in the BIND source tree:
 
   * Man pages are kept alongside the source code for the commands they
-    document, in files ending in .rst: for example, the named man page is
-    bin/named/named.rst.
-  * The BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual is in the .rst files in doc/
-    arm/; the PDF and HTML versions are automatically generated from the
-    .rst files.
+    document, in files ending in .docbook; for example, the named man page
+    is bin/named/named.docbook.
+  * The BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual is mostly in doc/arm/
+    Bv9ARM-book.xml, plus a few other XML files that are included in it.
   * API documentation is in the header file describing the API, in
     Doxygen-formatted comments.
 
+It is not necessary to edit any documentation files other than these; all
+PDF, HTML, and nroff-format man page files will be updated automatically
+from the docbook and XML files after merging.
+
 Patches to improve existing documentation are also very welcome!
 
 Tests
 
 BIND is a large and complex project. We rely heavily on continuous
 automated testing and cannot merge new code without adequate test
-coverage. Please see the "Testing" section of doc/dev/dev.md for more
+coverage. Please see the 'Testing' section of doc/dev/dev.md for more
 information.
 
 Thanks
 
 Thank you for your interest in contributing to the ongoing development of
-BIND 9.
+BIND.

CONTRIBUTING.md

@@ -1,17 +1,15 @@
 <!--
-Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-
-SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
-
-This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
-License, v. 2.0.  If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
-file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
-
-See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
-information regarding copyright ownership.
+ - Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ -
+ - This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
+ - License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+ - file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+ -
+ - See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
+ - information regarding copyright ownership.
 -->
-## BIND 9 Source Access and Contributor Guidelines
-*May 28, 2020*
+## BIND Source Access and Contributor Guidelines
+*Feb 22, 2018*
 
 ### Contents
 
@@ -21,12 +19,12 @@ information regarding copyright ownership.
 
 ### Introduction
 
-Thank you for using BIND 9!
+Thank you for using BIND!
 
 BIND is open source software that implements the Domain Name System (DNS)
 protocols for the Internet. It is a reference implementation of those
 protocols, but it is also production-grade software, suitable for use in
-high-volume and high-reliability applications.  It is very
+high-volume and high-reliability applications.  It is by far the most
 widely used DNS software, providing a robust and stable platform on top of
 which organizations can build distributed computing systems with the
 knowledge that those systems are fully compliant with published DNS
@@ -35,34 +33,35 @@ standards.
 BIND is and will always remain free and openly available.  It can be
 used and modified in any way by anyone.
 
-BIND is maintained by [Internet Systems Consortium](https://www.isc.org),
+BIND is maintained by the [Internet Systems Consortium](https://www.isc.org),
 a public-benefit 501(c)(3) nonprofit, using a "managed open source" approach:
 anyone can see the source, but only ISC employees have commit access.
-In the past, the source could only be seen once ISC had published
-a release; read access to the source repository was restricted just
-as commit access was.  That has changed, as ISC now provides a
-public git repository of the BIND source tree (see below).
+Until recently, the source could only be seen once ISC had published
+a release: read access to the source repository was restricted just
+as commit access was.  That's now changing, with the opening of a
+public git mirror to the BIND source tree (see below).
 
-At ISC, we're committed to
-building communities that are welcoming and inclusive: environments where people
+At [Internet Systems Consortium](https://www.isc.org), we're committed to
+building communities that are welcoming and inclusive; environments where people
 are encouraged to share ideas, treat each other with respect, and collaborate
-towards the best solutions. To reinforce our commitment, ISC
-has adopted a slightly modified version of the Django
-[Code of Conduct](https://gitlab.isc.org/isc-projects/bind9/-/blob/main/CODE_OF_CONDUCT.md)
-for the BIND 9 project, as well as for the conduct of our developers throughout
-the industry.
+towards the best solutions. To reinforce our commitment, the [Internet Systems
+Consortium](https://www.isc.org) has adopted the Contributor Covenant version
+1.4 as our Code of Conduct for BIND 9 project, as well as for the conduct of our
+developers throughout the industry.
 
 ### <a name="access"></a>Access to source code
 
 Public BIND releases are always available from the
 [ISC FTP site](ftp://ftp.isc.org/isc/bind9).
 
-A public-access git repository is also available at
-[https://gitlab.isc.org](https://gitlab.isc.org).  This repository
-contains all public release branches. Upcoming releases can be viewed in
-their current state at any time.  Short-lived development branches
-contain unreviewed work in progress.  Commits which address security
-vulnerablilities are withheld until after public disclosure.
+A public-access GIT repository is also available at
+[https://gitlab.isc.org](https://gitlab.isc.org).
+This repository is a mirror, updated several times per day, of the
+source repository maintained by ISC.  It contains all the public release
+branches; upcoming releases can be viewed in their current state at any
+time.  It does *not* contain development branches or unreviewed work in
+progress.  Commits which address security vulnerablilities are withheld
+until after public disclosure.
 
 You can browse the source online via
 [https://gitlab.isc.org/isc-projects/bind9](https://gitlab.isc.org/isc-projects/bind9)
@@ -77,58 +76,55 @@ branch, use:
 
 >       $ git checkout v9_12
 
-Whenever a branch is ready for publication, a tag is placed of the
+Whenever a branch is ready for publication, a tag will be placed of the
 form `v9_X_Y`.  The 9.12.0 release, for instance, is tagged as `v9_12_0`.
 
 The branch in which the next major release is being developed is called
-`main`.
+`master`.
 
 ### <a name="bugs"></a>Reporting bugs
 
 Reports of flaws in the BIND package, including software bugs, errors
 in the documentation, missing files in the tarball, suggested changes
-or requests for new features, etc., can be filed using
+or requests for new features, etc, can be filed using
 [https://gitlab.isc.org/isc-projects/bind9/issues](https://gitlab.isc.org/isc-projects/bind9/issues).
 
 Due to a large ticket backlog, we are sometimes slow to respond,
 especially if a bug is cosmetic or if a feature request is vague or
-low in priority, but we try at least to acknowledge legitimate
+low in priority, but we will try at least to acknowledge legitimate
 bug reports within a week.
 
-ISC's GitLab system is publicly readable; however, you must have
-an account to create a new issue. You can either register locally or
+ISC's ticketing system is publicly readable; however, you must have
+an account to file a new issue. You can either register locally or
 use credentials from an existing account at GitHub, GitLab, Google,
 Twitter, or Facebook.
 
 ### Reporting possible security issues
-
 If you think you may be seeing a potential security vulnerability in BIND
 (for example, a crash with REQUIRE, INSIST, or ASSERT failure), please
 report it immediately by emailing to security-officer@isc.org. Plain-text
 e-mail is not a secure choice for communications concerning undisclosed
 security issues so please encrypt your communications to us if possible,
-using the [ISC Security Officer public key](https://www.isc.org/pgpkey/).
+using the [ISC Security Officer public key](https://www.isc.org/downloads/software-support-policy/openpgp-key/).
 
 Do not discuss undisclosed security vulnerabilities on any public mailing list.
 ISC has a long history of handling reported vulnerabilities promptly and
 effectively and we respect and acknowledge responsible reporters.
 
-ISC's Security Vulnerability Disclosure Policy is documented at
-[https://kb.isc.org/docs/aa-00861](https://kb.isc.org/docs/aa-00861).
+ISC's Security Vulnerability Disclosure Policy is documented at [https://kb.isc.org/article/AA-00861/0](https://kb.isc.org/article/AA-00861/0).
 
 If you have a crash, you may want to consult
-["What to do if your BIND or DHCP server has crashed."](https://kb.isc.org/docs/aa-00340)
+[‘What to do if your BIND or DHCP server has crashed.’](https://kb.isc.org/article/AA-00340/89/What-to-do-if-your-BIND-or-DHCP-server-has-crashed.html)
 
 ### <a name="contrib"></a>Contributing code
 
 BIND is licensed under the
-[Mozilla Public License 2.0](https://www.mozilla.org/en-US/MPL/2.0/).
-Earlier versions (BIND 9.10 and earlier) were licensed under the
-[ISC License](https://www.isc.org/licenses/)
+[Mozilla Public License 2.0](http://www.isc.org/downloads/software-support-policy/isc-license/).
+Earier versions (BIND 9.10 and earlier) were licensed under the [ISC License](http://www.isc.org/downloads/software-support-policy/isc-license/)
 
 ISC does not require an explicit copyright assignment for patch
 contributions.  However, by submitting a patch to ISC, you implicitly
-certify that you are the author of the code, that you intend to relinquish
+certify that you are the author of the code, that you intend to reliquish
 exclusive copyright, and that you grant permission to publish your work
 under the open source license used for the BIND version(s) to which your
 patch will be applied.
@@ -136,19 +132,20 @@ patch will be applied.
 #### <a name="bind"></a>BIND code
 
 Patches for BIND may be submitted directly via merge requests in
-[ISC's GitLab](https://gitlab.isc.org/isc-projects/bind9/) source
+[ISC's Gitlab](https://gitlab.isc.org/isc-projects/bind9/) source
 repository for BIND.
 
 Patches can also be submitted as diffs against a specific version of
-BIND -- preferably the current top of the `main` branch.  Diffs may
+BIND -- preferably the current top of the `master` branch.  Diffs may
 be generated using either `git format-patch` or `git diff`.
 
 Those wanting to write code for BIND may be interested in the
 [developer information](doc/dev/dev.md) page, which includes information
 about BIND design and coding practices, including discussion of internal
-APIs and overall system architecture.
+APIs and overall system architecture.  (This is a work in progress, and
+still quite preliminary.)
 
-Every patch submitted is reviewed by ISC engineers following our
+Every patch submitted will be reviewed by ISC engineers following our
 [code review process](doc/dev/dev.md#reviews) before it is merged.
 
 It may take considerable time to review patch submissions, especially if
@@ -159,7 +156,7 @@ we're busy with other work, it may take us a long time to get to it.
 To ensure your patch is acted on as promptly as possible, please:
 
 * Try to adhere to the [BIND 9 coding style](doc/dev/style.md).
-* Run `make check` to ensure your change hasn't caused any
+* Run `make` `check` to ensure your change hasn't caused any
   functional regressions.
 * Document your work, both in the patch itself and in the
   accompanying email.
@@ -185,24 +182,28 @@ All functional changes should be documented. There are three types
 of documentation in the BIND source tree:
 
 * Man pages are kept alongside the source code for the commands
-  they document, in files ending in `.rst`: for example, the
-  `named` man page is `bin/named/named.rst`.
-* The *BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual* is in the .rst files in
-  `doc/arm/`; the PDF and HTML versions are automatically generated from
-  the `.rst` files.
+  they document, in files ending in `.docbook`; for example, the
+  `named` man page is `bin/named/named.docbook`.
+* The *BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual* is mostly in
+  `doc/arm/Bv9ARM-book.xml`, plus a few other XML files that are included
+  in it.
 * API documentation is in the header file describing the API, in
   Doxygen-formatted comments.
 
+It is not necessary to edit any documentation files other than these;
+all PDF, HTML, and `nroff`-format man page files will be updated
+automatically from the `docbook` and `XML` files after merging.
+
 Patches to improve existing documentation are also very welcome!
 
 ##### Tests
 
 BIND is a large and complex project. We rely heavily on continuous
 automated testing and cannot merge new code without adequate test coverage.
-Please see [the "Testing" section of doc/dev/dev.md](doc/dev/dev.md#testing)
+Please see [the 'Testing' section of doc/dev/dev.md](doc/dev/dev.md#testing)
 for more information.
 
 #### Thanks
 
 Thank you for your interest in contributing to the ongoing development
-of BIND 9.
+of BIND.

COPYRIGHT

@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-Copyright (C) 1996-2022  Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+Copyright (C) 1996-2020  Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
 
 This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
 License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
-file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
 
  -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 

HISTORY

@@ -2,6 +2,21 @@ HISTORY
 
 Functional enhancements from prior major releases of BIND 9
 
+BIND 9.16
+
+BIND 9.16 (a stable branch based on the 9.15 development branch) includes
+a number of changes from BIND 9.14 and earlier releases. New features
+include:
+
+  * New dnssec-policy statement to configure a key and signing policy for
+    zones, enabling automatic key regeneration and rollover.
+  * New network manager based on libuv.
+  * Added support for the new GeoIP2 geolocation API, libmaxminddb.
+  * Improved DNSSEC trust anchor configuration using the trust-anchors
+    statement, permitting configuration of trust anchors in DS as well as
+    DNSKEY format.
+  * YAML output for dig, mdig, and delv.
+
 BIND 9.14
 
 BIND 9.14 (a stable branch based on the 9.13 development branch) includes
@@ -39,9 +54,9 @@ built. Very old versions of OpenSSL are no longer supported. Cryptography
 is now mandatory: building BIND without DNSSEC is no longer supported.
 
 Special code to support certain legacy operating systems has also been
-removed; see the doc/arm/platforms.rst file for details of supported
-platforms. In addition to OpenSSL, BIND now requires support for IPv6,
-threads, and standard atomic operations provided by the C compiler.
+removed; see the file PLATFORMS.md for details of supported platforms. In
+addition to OpenSSL, BIND now requires support for IPv6, threads, and
+standard atomic operations provided by the C compiler.
 
 BIND 9.12
 

HISTORY.md

@@ -10,6 +10,21 @@
 -->
 ### Functional enhancements from prior major releases of BIND 9
 
+#### BIND 9.16
+
+BIND 9.16 (a stable branch based on the 9.15 development branch)
+includes a number of changes from BIND 9.14 and earlier releases.
+New features include:
+
+* New `dnssec-policy` statement to configure a key and signing policy
+  for zones, enabling automatic key regeneration and rollover.
+* New network manager based on `libuv`.
+* Added support for the new GeoIP2 geolocation API, `libmaxminddb`.
+* Improved DNSSEC trust anchor configuration using the `trust-anchors`
+  statement, permitting configuration of trust anchors in DS as well as
+  DNSKEY format.
+* YAML output for `dig`, `mdig`, and `delv`.
+
 #### BIND 9.14
 
 BIND 9.14 (a stable branch based on the 9.13 development branch)
@@ -47,7 +62,7 @@ Cryptography is now mandatory: building BIND without DNSSEC is no
 longer supported.
 
 Special code to support certain legacy operating systems has also
-been removed; see the [doc/arm/platforms.rst](platforms) file for details
+been removed; see the file [PLATFORMS.md](PLATFORMS.md) for details
 of supported platforms. In addition to OpenSSL, BIND now requires
 support for IPv6, threads, and standard atomic operations provided
 by the C compiler.

Kyuafile

@@ -1,14 +1,3 @@
--- Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
---
--- SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
---
--- This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
--- License, v. 2.0.  If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
--- file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
---
--- See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
--- information regarding copyright ownership.
-
 syntax(2)
 test_suite('bind9')
 

LICENSE

@@ -346,7 +346,7 @@ Exhibit A - Source Code Form License Notice
       2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not
       distributed with this file, You can
       obtain one at
-      https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+      http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
 
 If it is not possible or desirable to put the notice in a particular file,
 then You may include the notice in a location (such as a LICENSE file in a

LICENSES/Apache-2.0.txt

@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
-Apache License
-Version 2.0, January 2004
-http://www.apache.org/licenses/
-
-TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
-
-1. Definitions.
-
-"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
-
-"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.
-
-"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
-
-"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.
-
-"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files.
-
-"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.
-
-"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix below).
-
-"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
-
-"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."
-
-"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.
-
-2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
-
-3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed.
-
-4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:
-
-     (a) You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
-
-     (b) You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and
-
-     (c) You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and
-
-     (d) If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License.
-
-     You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License.
-
-5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
-
-6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
-
-7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.
-
-8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
-
-9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.
-
-END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
-
-APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work.
-
-To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include the brackets!)  The text should be enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class name and description of purpose be included on the same "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier identification within third-party archives.
-
-Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
-
-Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License");
-you may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
-You may obtain a copy of the License at
-
-http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
-
-Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
-distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
-WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
-See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
-limitations under the License.

LICENSES/Autoconf-exception-3.0.txt

@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-AUTOCONF CONFIGURE SCRIPT EXCEPTION
-
-Version 3.0, 18 August 2009
-Copyright © 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/>
-
-Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
-
-This Exception is an additional permission under section 7 of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3"). It applies to a given file that bears a notice placed by the copyright holder of the file stating that the file is governed by GPLv3 along with this Exception.
-
-The purpose of this Exception is to allow distribution of Autoconf's typical output under terms of the recipient's choice (including proprietary).
-
-0. Definitions.
-
-"Covered Code" is the source or object code of a version of Autoconf that is a covered work under this License.
-
-"Normally Copied Code" for a version of Autoconf means all parts of its Covered Code which that version can copy from its code (i.e., not from its input file) into its minimally verbose, non-debugging and non-tracing output.
-
-"Ineligible Code" is Covered Code that is not Normally Copied Code.
-
-1. Grant of Additional Permission.
-
-You have permission to propagate output of Autoconf, even if such propagation would otherwise violate the terms of GPLv3. However, if by modifying Autoconf you cause any Ineligible Code of the version you received to become Normally Copied Code of your modified version, then you void this Exception for the resulting covered work. If you convey that resulting covered work, you must remove this Exception in accordance with the second paragraph of Section 7 of GPLv3.
-
-2. No Weakening of Autoconf Copyleft.
-
-The availability of this Exception does not imply any general presumption that third-party software is unaffected by the copyleft requirements of the license of Autoconf.

LICENSES/BSD-2-Clause.txt

@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-Copyright (c) <year> <owner> All rights reserved.
-
-Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
-
-1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-
-2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-
-THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

LICENSES/BSD-3-Clause.txt

@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-Copyright (c) <year> <owner>. All rights reserved.
-
-Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
-
-1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-
-2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-
-3. Neither the name of the copyright holder nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
-
-THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

LICENSES/CC0-1.0.txt

@@ -1,121 +0,0 @@
-Creative Commons Legal Code
-
-CC0 1.0 Universal
-
-    CREATIVE COMMONS CORPORATION IS NOT A LAW FIRM AND DOES NOT PROVIDE
-    LEGAL SERVICES. DISTRIBUTION OF THIS DOCUMENT DOES NOT CREATE AN
-    ATTORNEY-CLIENT RELATIONSHIP. CREATIVE COMMONS PROVIDES THIS
-    INFORMATION ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. CREATIVE COMMONS MAKES NO WARRANTIES
-    REGARDING THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR THE INFORMATION OR WORKS
-    PROVIDED HEREUNDER, AND DISCLAIMS LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES RESULTING FROM
-    THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR THE INFORMATION OR WORKS PROVIDED
-    HEREUNDER.
-
-Statement of Purpose
-
-The laws of most jurisdictions throughout the world automatically confer
-exclusive Copyright and Related Rights (defined below) upon the creator
-and subsequent owner(s) (each and all, an "owner") of an original work of
-authorship and/or a database (each, a "Work").
-
-Certain owners wish to permanently relinquish those rights to a Work for
-the purpose of contributing to a commons of creative, cultural and
-scientific works ("Commons") that the public can reliably and without fear
-of later claims of infringement build upon, modify, incorporate in other
-works, reuse and redistribute as freely as possible in any form whatsoever
-and for any purposes, including without limitation commercial purposes.
-These owners may contribute to the Commons to promote the ideal of a free
-culture and the further production of creative, cultural and scientific
-works, or to gain reputation or greater distribution for their Work in
-part through the use and efforts of others.
-
-For these and/or other purposes and motivations, and without any
-expectation of additional consideration or compensation, the person
-associating CC0 with a Work (the "Affirmer"), to the extent that he or she
-is an owner of Copyright and Related Rights in the Work, voluntarily
-elects to apply CC0 to the Work and publicly distribute the Work under its
-terms, with knowledge of his or her Copyright and Related Rights in the
-Work and the meaning and intended legal effect of CC0 on those rights.
-
-1. Copyright and Related Rights. A Work made available under CC0 may be
-protected by copyright and related or neighboring rights ("Copyright and
-Related Rights"). Copyright and Related Rights include, but are not
-limited to, the following:
-
-  i. the right to reproduce, adapt, distribute, perform, display,
-     communicate, and translate a Work;
- ii. moral rights retained by the original author(s) and/or performer(s);
-iii. publicity and privacy rights pertaining to a person's image or
-     likeness depicted in a Work;
- iv. rights protecting against unfair competition in regards to a Work,
-     subject to the limitations in paragraph 4(a), below;
-  v. rights protecting the extraction, dissemination, use and reuse of data
-     in a Work;
- vi. database rights (such as those arising under Directive 96/9/EC of the
-     European Parliament and of the Council of 11 March 1996 on the legal
-     protection of databases, and under any national implementation
-     thereof, including any amended or successor version of such
-     directive); and
-vii. other similar, equivalent or corresponding rights throughout the
-     world based on applicable law or treaty, and any national
-     implementations thereof.
-
-2. Waiver. To the greatest extent permitted by, but not in contravention
-of, applicable law, Affirmer hereby overtly, fully, permanently,
-irrevocably and unconditionally waives, abandons, and surrenders all of
-Affirmer's Copyright and Related Rights and associated claims and causes
-of action, whether now known or unknown (including existing as well as
-future claims and causes of action), in the Work (i) in all territories
-worldwide, (ii) for the maximum duration provided by applicable law or
-treaty (including future time extensions), (iii) in any current or future
-medium and for any number of copies, and (iv) for any purpose whatsoever,
-including without limitation commercial, advertising or promotional
-purposes (the "Waiver"). Affirmer makes the Waiver for the benefit of each
-member of the public at large and to the detriment of Affirmer's heirs and
-successors, fully intending that such Waiver shall not be subject to
-revocation, rescission, cancellation, termination, or any other legal or
-equitable action to disrupt the quiet enjoyment of the Work by the public
-as contemplated by Affirmer's express Statement of Purpose.
-
-3. Public License Fallback. Should any part of the Waiver for any reason
-be judged legally invalid or ineffective under applicable law, then the
-Waiver shall be preserved to the maximum extent permitted taking into
-account Affirmer's express Statement of Purpose. In addition, to the
-extent the Waiver is so judged Affirmer hereby grants to each affected
-person a royalty-free, non transferable, non sublicensable, non exclusive,
-irrevocable and unconditional license to exercise Affirmer's Copyright and
-Related Rights in the Work (i) in all territories worldwide, (ii) for the
-maximum duration provided by applicable law or treaty (including future
-time extensions), (iii) in any current or future medium and for any number
-of copies, and (iv) for any purpose whatsoever, including without
-limitation commercial, advertising or promotional purposes (the
-"License"). The License shall be deemed effective as of the date CC0 was
-applied by Affirmer to the Work. Should any part of the License for any
-reason be judged legally invalid or ineffective under applicable law, such
-partial invalidity or ineffectiveness shall not invalidate the remainder
-of the License, and in such case Affirmer hereby affirms that he or she
-will not (i) exercise any of his or her remaining Copyright and Related
-Rights in the Work or (ii) assert any associated claims and causes of
-action with respect to the Work, in either case contrary to Affirmer's
-express Statement of Purpose.
-
-4. Limitations and Disclaimers.
-
- a. No trademark or patent rights held by Affirmer are waived, abandoned,
-    surrendered, licensed or otherwise affected by this document.
- b. Affirmer offers the Work as-is and makes no representations or
-    warranties of any kind concerning the Work, express, implied,
-    statutory or otherwise, including without limitation warranties of
-    title, merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, non
-    infringement, or the absence of latent or other defects, accuracy, or
-    the present or absence of errors, whether or not discoverable, all to
-    the greatest extent permissible under applicable law.
- c. Affirmer disclaims responsibility for clearing rights of other persons
-    that may apply to the Work or any use thereof, including without
-    limitation any person's Copyright and Related Rights in the Work.
-    Further, Affirmer disclaims responsibility for obtaining any necessary
-    consents, permissions or other rights required for any use of the
-    Work.
- d. Affirmer understands and acknowledges that Creative Commons is not a
-    party to this document and has no duty or obligation with respect to
-    this CC0 or use of the Work.

LICENSES/FSFAP.txt

@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-Copying and distribution of this file, with or without modification, are permitted in any medium without royalty provided the copyright notice and this notice are preserved.  This file is offered as-is, without any warranty.

LICENSES/GPL-3.0-or-later.txt

@@ -1,232 +0,0 @@
-GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
-Version 3, 29 June 2007
-
-Copyright © 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/>
-
-Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
-
-Preamble
-
-The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds of works.
-
-The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too.
-
-When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things.
-
-To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others.
-
-For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
-
-Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: (1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it.
-
-For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users' and authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions.
-
-Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users' freedom to change the software. The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users.
-
-Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non-free.
-
-The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
-
-TERMS AND CONDITIONS
-
-0. Definitions.
-
-“This License” refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License.
-
-“Copyright” also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks.
-
-“The Program” refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as “you”. “Licensees” and “recipients” may be individuals or organizations.
-
-To “modify” a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called a “modified version” of the earlier work or a work “based on” the earlier work.
-
-A “covered work” means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program.
-
-To “propagate” a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, distribution (with or without modification), making available to the public, and in some countries other activities as well.
-
-To “convey” a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying.
-
-An interactive user interface displays “Appropriate Legal Notices” to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion.
-
-1. Source Code.
-The “source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. “Object code” means any non-source form of a work.
-
-A “Standard Interface” means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language.
-
-The “System Libraries” of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form. A “Major Component”, in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it.
-
-The “Corresponding Source” for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not include the work's System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work.
-
-The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source.
-
-The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work.
-
-2. Basic Permissions.
-All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law.
-
-You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you.
-
-Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it unnecessary.
-
-3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law.
-No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures.
-
-When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's users, your or third parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures.
-
-4. Conveying Verbatim Copies.
-You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program.
-
-You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee.
-
-5. Conveying Modified Source Versions.
-You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
-
-     a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant date.
-
-     b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to “keep intact all notices”.
-
-     c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it.
-
-     d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so.
-
-A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate.
-
-6. Conveying Non-Source Forms.
-You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways:
-
-     a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange.
-
-     b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge.
-
-     c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord with subsection 6b.
-
-     d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements.
-
-     e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d.
-
-A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be included in conveying the object code work.
-
-A “User Product” is either (1) a “consumer product”, which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product received by a particular user, “normally used” refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product.
-
-“Installation Information” for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made.
-
-If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM).
-
-The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network.
-
-Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying.
-
-7. Additional Terms.
-“Additional permissions” are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions.
-
-When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission.
-
-Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms:
-
-     a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or
-
-     b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or
-
-     c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or
-
-     d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or
-
-     e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or
-
-     f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors.
-
-All other non-permissive additional terms are considered “further restrictions” within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying.
-
-If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms.
-
-Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above requirements apply either way.
-
-8. Termination.
-You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11).
-
-However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.
-
-Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice.
-
-Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10.
-
-9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies.
-You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so.
-
-10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.
-Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
-
-An “entity transaction” is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts.
-
-You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it.
-
-11. Patents.
-A “contributor” is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor's “contributor version”.
-
-A contributor's “essential patent claims” are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For purposes of this definition, “control” includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License.
-
-Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version.
-
-In the following three paragraphs, a “patent license” is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To “grant” such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party.
-
-If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. “Knowingly relying” means you have actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid.
-
-If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it.
-
-A patent license is “discriminatory” if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007.
-
-Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law.
-
-12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom.
-If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program.
-
-13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License.
-Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such.
-
-14. Revised Versions of this License.
-The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
-
-Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
-
-If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program.
-
-Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version.
-
-15. Disclaimer of Warranty.
-THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
-
-16. Limitation of Liability.
-IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
-
-17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16.
-If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee.
-
-END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
-
-How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
-
-If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
-
-To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
-
-     <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
-     Copyright (C) <year>  <name of author>
-
-     This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-
-     This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public License for more details.
-
-     You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program.  If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
-
-Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
-
-If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
-
-     <program>  Copyright (C) <year>  <name of author>
-     This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
-     This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
-
-The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program's commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an “about box”.
-
-You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
-
-The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. But first, please read <http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html>.

LICENSES/ISC.txt

@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-ISC License:
-
-Copyright (c) 2004-2010 by Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-Copyright (c) 1995-2003 by Internet Software Consortium
-
-Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
-
-THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ISC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.

LICENSES/LLVM-exception.txt

@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
----- LLVM Exceptions to the Apache 2.0 License ----
-
-   As an exception, if, as a result of your compiling your source code, portions
-   of this Software are embedded into an Object form of such source code, you
-   may redistribute such embedded portions in such Object form without complying
-   with the conditions of Sections 4(a), 4(b) and 4(d) of the License.
-
-   In addition, if you combine or link compiled forms of this Software with
-   software that is licensed under the GPLv2 ("Combined Software") and if a
-   court of competent jurisdiction determines that the patent provision (Section
-   3), the indemnity provision (Section 9) or other Section of the License
-   conflicts with the conditions of the GPLv2, you may retroactively and
-   prospectively choose to deem waived or otherwise exclude such Section(s) of
-   the License, but only in their entirety and only with respect to the Combined
-   Software.

LICENSES/MIT.txt

@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-MIT License
-
-Copyright (c) <year> <copyright holders>
-
-Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
-
-The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
-
-THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

LICENSES/MPL-2.0.txt

@@ -1,144 +0,0 @@
-Mozilla Public License Version 2.0
-
-1. Definitions
-
-     1.1. "Contributor" means each individual or legal entity that creates, contributes to the creation of, or owns Covered Software.
-
-     1.2. "Contributor Version" means the combination of the Contributions of others (if any) used by a Contributor and that particular Contributor's Contribution.
-
-     1.3. "Contribution" means Covered Software of a particular Contributor.
-
-     1.4. "Covered Software" means Source Code Form to which the initial Contributor has attached the notice in Exhibit A, the Executable Form of such Source Code Form, and Modifications of such Source Code Form, in each case including portions thereof.
-
-     1.5. "Incompatible With Secondary Licenses" means
-
-          (a) that the initial Contributor has attached the notice described in Exhibit B to the Covered Software; or
-
-          (b) that the Covered Software was made available under the terms of version 1.1 or earlier of the License, but not also under the terms of a Secondary License.
-
-     1.6. "Executable Form" means any form of the work other than Source Code Form.
-
-     1.7. "Larger Work" means a work that combines Covered Software with other material, in a separate file or files, that is not Covered Software.
-
-     1.8. "License" means this document.
-
-     1.9. "Licensable" means having the right to grant, to the maximum extent possible, whether at the time of the initial grant or subsequently, any and all of the rights conveyed by this License.
-
-     1.10. "Modifications" means any of the following:
-
-          (a) any file in Source Code Form that results from an addition to, deletion from, or modification of the contents of Covered Software; or
-
-          (b) any new file in Source Code Form that contains any Covered Software.
-
-     1.11. "Patent Claims" of a Contributor means any patent claim(s), including without limitation, method, process, and apparatus claims, in any patent Licensable by such Contributor that would be infringed, but for the grant of the License, by the making, using, selling, offering for sale, having made, import, or transfer of either its Contributions or its Contributor Version.
-
-     1.12. "Secondary License" means either the GNU General Public License, Version 2.0, the GNU Lesser General Public License, Version 2.1, the GNU Affero General Public License, Version 3.0, or any later versions of those licenses.
-
-     1.13. "Source Code Form" means the form of the work preferred for making modifications.
-
-     1.14. "You" (or "Your") means an individual or a legal entity exercising rights under this License. For legal entities, "You" includes any entity that controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with You. For purposes of this definition, "control" means (a) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (b) ownership of more than fifty percent (50%) of the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such entity.
-
-2. License Grants and Conditions
-
-     2.1. Grants
-     Each Contributor hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license:
-
-          (a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by such Contributor to use, reproduce, make available, modify, display, perform, distribute, and otherwise exploit its Contributions, either on an unmodified basis, with Modifications, or as part of a Larger Work; and
-
-          (b) under Patent Claims of such Contributor to make, use, sell, offer for sale, have made, import, and otherwise transfer either its Contributions or its Contributor Version.
-
-     2.2. Effective Date
-     The licenses granted in Section 2.1 with respect to any Contribution become effective for each Contribution on the date the Contributor first distributes such Contribution.
-
-     2.3. Limitations on Grant Scope
-     The licenses granted in this Section 2 are the only rights granted under this License. No additional rights or licenses will be implied from the distribution or licensing of Covered Software under this License. Notwithstanding Section 2.1(b) above, no patent license is granted by a Contributor:
-
-          (a) for any code that a Contributor has removed from Covered Software; or
-
-          (b) for infringements caused by: (i) Your and any other third party's modifications of Covered Software, or (ii) the combination of its Contributions with other software (except as part of its Contributor Version); or
-
-          (c) under Patent Claims infringed by Covered Software in the absence of its Contributions.
-
-     This License does not grant any rights in the trademarks, service marks, or logos of any Contributor (except as may be necessary to comply with the notice requirements in Section 3.4).
-
-     2.4. Subsequent Licenses
-     No Contributor makes additional grants as a result of Your choice to distribute the Covered Software under a subsequent version of this License (see Section 10.2) or under the terms of a Secondary License (if permitted under the terms of Section 3.3).
-
-     2.5. Representation
-     Each Contributor represents that the Contributor believes its Contributions are its original creation(s) or it has sufficient rights to grant the rights to its Contributions conveyed by this License.
-
-     2.6. Fair Use
-     This License is not intended to limit any rights You have under applicable copyright doctrines of fair use, fair dealing, or other equivalents.
-
-     2.7. Conditions
-     Sections 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, and 3.4 are conditions of the licenses granted in Section 2.1.
-
-3. Responsibilities
-
-     3.1. Distribution of Source Form
-     All distribution of Covered Software in Source Code Form, including any Modifications that You create or to which You contribute, must be under the terms of this License. You must inform recipients that the Source Code Form of the Covered Software is governed by the terms of this License, and how they can obtain a copy of this License. You may not attempt to alter or restrict the recipients' rights in the Source Code Form.
-
-     3.2. Distribution of Executable Form
-     If You distribute Covered Software in Executable Form then:
-
-          (a) such Covered Software must also be made available in Source Code Form, as described in Section 3.1, and You must inform recipients of the Executable Form how they can obtain a copy of such Source Code Form by reasonable means in a timely manner, at a charge no more than the cost of distribution to the recipient; and
-
-          (b) You may distribute such Executable Form under the terms of this License, or sublicense it under different terms, provided that the license for the Executable Form does not attempt to limit or alter the recipients' rights in the Source Code Form under this License.
-
-     3.3. Distribution of a Larger Work
-     You may create and distribute a Larger Work under terms of Your choice, provided that You also comply with the requirements of this License for the Covered Software. If the Larger Work is a combination of Covered Software with a work governed by one or more Secondary Licenses, and the Covered Software is not Incompatible With Secondary Licenses, this License permits You to additionally distribute such Covered Software under the terms of such Secondary License(s), so that the recipient of the Larger Work may, at their option, further distribute the Covered Software under the terms of either this License or such Secondary License(s).
-
-     3.4. Notices
-     You may not remove or alter the substance of any license notices (including copyright notices, patent notices, disclaimers of warranty, or limitations of liability) contained within the Source Code Form of the Covered Software, except that You may alter any license notices to the extent required to remedy known factual inaccuracies.
-
-     3.5. Application of Additional Terms
-     You may choose to offer, and to charge a fee for, warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligations to one or more recipients of Covered Software. However, You may do so only on Your own behalf, and not on behalf of any Contributor. You must make it absolutely clear that any such warranty, support, indemnity, or liability obligation is offered by You alone, and You hereby agree to indemnify every Contributor for any liability incurred by such Contributor as a result of warranty, support, indemnity or liability terms You offer. You may include additional disclaimers of warranty and limitations of liability specific to any jurisdiction.
-
-4. Inability to Comply Due to Statute or Regulation
-If it is impossible for You to comply with any of the terms of this License with respect to some or all of the Covered Software due to statute, judicial order, or regulation then You must: (a) comply with the terms of this License to the maximum extent possible; and (b) describe the limitations and the code they affect. Such description must be placed in a text file included with all distributions of the Covered Software under this License. Except to the extent prohibited by statute or regulation, such description must be sufficiently detailed for a recipient of ordinary skill to be able to understand it.
-
-5. Termination
-
-     5.1. The rights granted under this License will terminate automatically if You fail to comply with any of its terms. However, if You become compliant, then the rights granted under this License from a particular Contributor are reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until such Contributor explicitly and finally terminates Your grants, and (b) on an ongoing basis, if such Contributor fails to notify You of the non-compliance by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after You have come back into compliance. Moreover, Your grants from a particular Contributor are reinstated on an ongoing basis if such Contributor notifies You of the non-compliance by some reasonable means, this is the first time You have received notice of non-compliance with this License from such Contributor, and You become compliant prior to 30 days after Your receipt of the notice.
-
-     5.2. If You initiate litigation against any entity by asserting a patent infringement claim (excluding declaratory judgment actions, counter-claims, and cross-claims) alleging that a Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then the rights granted to You by any and all Contributors for the Covered Software under Section 2.1 of this License shall terminate.
-
-     5.3. In the event of termination under Sections 5.1 or 5.2 above, all end user license agreements (excluding distributors and resellers) which have been validly granted by You or Your distributors under this License prior to termination shall survive termination.
-
-6. Disclaimer of Warranty
-Covered Software is provided under this License on an "as is" basis, without warranty of any kind, either expressed, implied, or statutory, including, without limitation, warranties that the Covered Software is free of defects, merchantable, fit for a particular purpose or non-infringing. The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the Covered Software is with You. Should any Covered Software prove defective in any respect, You (not any Contributor) assume the cost of any necessary servicing, repair, or correction. This disclaimer of warranty constitutes an essential part of this License. No use of any Covered Software is authorized under this License except under this disclaimer.
-
-7. Limitation of Liability
-Under no circumstances and under no legal theory, whether tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, shall any Contributor, or anyone who distributes Covered Software as permitted above, be liable to You for any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character including, without limitation, damages for lost profits, loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses, even if such party shall have been informed of the possibility of such damages. This limitation of liability shall not apply to liability for death or personal injury resulting from such party's negligence to the extent applicable law prohibits such limitation. Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so this exclusion and limitation may not apply to You.
-
-8. Litigation
-Any litigation relating to this License may be brought only in the courts of a jurisdiction where the defendant maintains its principal place of business and such litigation shall be governed by laws of that jurisdiction, without reference to its conflict-of-law provisions. Nothing in this Section shall prevent a party's ability to bring cross-claims or counter-claims.
-
-9. Miscellaneous
-This License represents the complete agreement concerning the subject matter hereof. If any provision of this License is held to be unenforceable, such provision shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable. Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract shall be construed against the drafter shall not be used to construe this License against a Contributor.
-
-10. Versions of the License
-
-     10.1. New Versions
-     Mozilla Foundation is the license steward. Except as provided in Section 10.3, no one other than the license steward has the right to modify or publish new versions of this License. Each version will be given a distinguishing version number.
-
-     10.2. Effect of New Versions
-     You may distribute the Covered Software under the terms of the version of the License under which You originally received the Covered Software, or under the terms of any subsequent version published by the license steward.
-
-     10.3. Modified Versions
-     If you create software not governed by this License, and you want to create a new license for such software, you may create and use a modified version of this License if you rename the license and remove any references to the name of the license steward (except to note that such modified license differs from this License).
-
-     10.4. Distributing Source Code Form that is Incompatible With Secondary Licenses
-     If You choose to distribute Source Code Form that is Incompatible With Secondary Licenses under the terms of this version of the License, the notice described in Exhibit B of this License must be attached.
-
-Exhibit A - Source Code Form License Notice
-
-     This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
-
-If it is not possible or desirable to put the notice in a particular file, then You may include the notice in a location (such as a LICENSE file in a relevant directory) where a recipient would be likely to look for such a notice.
-
-You may add additional accurate notices of copyright ownership.
-
-Exhibit B - "Incompatible With Secondary Licenses" Notice
-
-     This Source Code Form is "Incompatible With Secondary Licenses", as defined by the Mozilla Public License, v. 2.0.

Makefile.in

@@ -1,10 +1,8 @@
 # Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
 #
-# SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
-#
 # This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
-# License, v. 2.0.  If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
-# file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+# License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+# file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
 #
 # See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
 # information regarding copyright ownership.
@@ -14,16 +12,14 @@ VPATH =		@srcdir@
 top_srcdir =	@top_srcdir@
 top_builddir =  @top_builddir@
 
-PANDOC = @PANDOC@
-W3M = @W3M@
-
 VERSION=@BIND9_VERSION@
 
 SUBDIRS =	make lib fuzz bin doc
 TARGETS =
 PREREQS =	bind.keys.h
 
-MANOBJS =	README HISTORY OPTIONS CONTRIBUTING CODE_OF_CONDUCT
+MANOBJS =	README HISTORY OPTIONS CONTRIBUTING PLATFORMS CODE_OF_CONDUCT \
+		${MANPAGES} ${HTMLPAGES}
 
 @BIND9_MAKE_RULES@
 
@@ -50,7 +46,9 @@ docclean manclean maintainer-clean::
 doc man:: ${MANOBJS}
 
 installdirs:
-	$(SHELL) ${top_srcdir}/mkinstalldirs ${DESTDIR}${sysconfdir}
+	$(SHELL) ${top_srcdir}/mkinstalldirs ${DESTDIR}${bindir} \
+	${DESTDIR}${localstatedir}/run ${DESTDIR}${sysconfdir}
+	$(SHELL) ${top_srcdir}/mkinstalldirs ${DESTDIR}${mandir}/man1
 
 install:: installdirs
 	${INSTALL_DATA} ${top_srcdir}/bind.keys ${DESTDIR}${sysconfdir}
@@ -100,6 +98,11 @@ CONTRIBUTING: CONTRIBUTING.md
 		${W3M} -dump -cols 75 -O ascii -T text/html | \
 		sed -e '$${/^$$/d;}' > $@
 
+PLATFORMS: PLATFORMS.md
+	${PANDOC} --email-obfuscation=none -s --metadata title="PLATFORMS" -f markdown-smart -t html PLATFORMS.md | \
+		${W3M} -dump -cols 75 -O ascii -T text/html | \
+		sed -e '$${/^$$/d;}' > $@
+
 CODE_OF_CONDUCT: CODE_OF_CONDUCT.md
 	${PANDOC} --email-obfuscation=none -s --metadata title="CODE OF CONDUCT" -f markdown-smart -t html CODE_OF_CONDUCT.md | \
 		${W3M} -dump -cols 75 -O ascii -T text/html | \

OPTIONS.md

@@ -1,14 +1,12 @@
 <!--
-Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-
-SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
-
-This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
-License, v. 2.0.  If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
-file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
-
-See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
-information regarding copyright ownership.
+ - Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ -
+ - This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
+ - License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+ - file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+ -
+ - See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
+ - information regarding copyright ownership.
 -->
 Setting the `STD_CDEFINES` environment variable before running `configure`
 can be used to enable certain compile-time options that are not explicitly

PLATFORMS

@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+PLATFORMS
+
+Supported platforms
+
+In general, this version of BIND will build and run on any POSIX-compliant
+system with a C11-compliant C compiler, BSD-style sockets with
+RFC-compliant IPv6 support, POSIX-compliant threads, the libuv
+asynchronous I/O library, and the OpenSSL cryptography library.
+
+The following C11 features are used in BIND 9:
+
+  * Atomic operations support from the compiler is needed, either in the
+    form of builtin operations, C11 atomics, or the Interlocked family of
+    functions on Windows.
+
+  * Thread Local Storage support from the compiler is needed, either in
+    the form of C11 _Thread_local/thread_local, the __thread GCC
+    extension, or the __declspec(thread) MSVC extension on Windows.
+
+BIND 9.17 requires a fairly recent version of libuv (at least 1.x). For
+some of the older systems listed below, you will have to install an
+updated libuv package from sources such as EPEL, PPA, or other native
+sources for updated packages. The other option is to build and install
+libuv from source.
+
+Certain optional BIND features have additional library dependencies. These
+include libxml2 and libjson-c for statistics, libmaxminddb for
+geolocation, libfstrm and libprotobuf-c for DNSTAP, and libidn2 for
+internationalized domain name conversion.
+
+ISC regularly tests BIND on many operating systems and architectures, but
+lacks the resources to test all of them. Consequently, ISC is only able to
+offer support on a "best effort" basis for some.
+
+Regularly tested platforms
+
+As of Mar 2020, BIND 9.17 is fully supported and regularly tested on the
+following systems:
+
+  * Debian 9, 10
+  * Ubuntu LTS 16.04, 18.04
+  * Fedora 31
+  * Red Hat Enterprise Linux / CentOS 7, 8
+  * FreeBSD 11.3, 12.1
+  * OpenBSD 6.6
+  * Alpine Linux
+
+The amd64, i386, armhf and arm64 CPU architectures are all fully
+supported.
+
+Best effort
+
+The following are platforms on which BIND is known to build and run. ISC
+makes every effort to fix bugs on these platforms, but may be unable to do
+so quickly due to lack of hardware, less familiarity on the part of
+engineering staff, and other constraints. With the exception of Windows
+Server 2012 R2, none of these are tested regularly by ISC.
+
+  * Windows Server 2012 R2, 2016 / x64
+  * Windows 10 / x64
+  * macOS 10.12+
+  * Solaris 11
+  * NetBSD
+  * Other Linux distributions still supported by their vendors, such as:
+      + Ubuntu 19.04+
+      + Gentoo
+      + Arch Linux
+  * OpenWRT/LEDE 17.01+
+  * Other CPU architectures (mips, mipsel, sparc, ...)
+
+Community maintained
+
+These systems may not all have the required dependencies for building BIND
+easily available, although it will be possible in many cases to compile
+those directly from source. The community and interested parties may wish
+to help with maintenance, and we welcome patch contributions, although we
+cannot guarantee that we will accept them. All contributions will be
+assessed against the risk of adverse effect on officially supported
+platforms.
+
+  * Platforms past or close to their respective EOL dates, such as:
+      + Ubuntu 14.04, 18.10
+      + CentOS 6
+      + Debian Jessie
+      + FreeBSD 10.x
+
+Unsupported platforms
+
+These are platforms on which BIND 9.17 is known not to build or run:
+
+  * Platforms without at least OpenSSL 1.0.2
+  * Windows 10 / x86
+  * Windows Server 2012 and older
+  * Solaris 10 and older
+  * Platforms that don't support IPv6 Advanced Socket API (RFC 3542)
+  * Platforms that don't support atomic operations (via compiler or
+    library)
+  * Linux without NPTL (Native POSIX Thread Library)
+  * Platforms on which libuv cannot be compiled

PLATFORMS.md

@@ -0,0 +1,105 @@
+<!--
+ - Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ -
+ - This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
+ - License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+ - file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+ -
+ - See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
+ - information regarding copyright ownership.
+-->
+## Supported platforms
+
+In general, this version of BIND will build and run on any POSIX-compliant
+system with a C11-compliant C compiler, BSD-style sockets with RFC-compliant
+IPv6 support, POSIX-compliant threads, the `libuv` asynchronous I/O library,
+and the OpenSSL cryptography library.
+
+The following C11 features are used in BIND 9:
+
+* Atomic operations support from the compiler is needed, either in the form of
+  builtin operations, C11 atomics, or the `Interlocked` family of functions on
+  Windows.
+
+* Thread Local Storage support from the compiler is needed, either in the form
+  of C11 `_Thread_local`/`thread_local`, the `__thread` GCC extension, or
+  the `__declspec(thread)` MSVC extension on Windows.
+
+BIND 9.17 requires a fairly recent version of `libuv` (at least 1.x).  For
+some of the older systems listed below, you will have to install an updated
+`libuv` package from sources such as EPEL, PPA, or other native sources for
+updated packages. The other option is to build and install `libuv` from
+source.
+
+Certain optional BIND features have additional library dependencies.
+These include `libxml2` and `libjson-c` for statistics, `libmaxminddb` for
+geolocation, `libfstrm` and `libprotobuf-c` for DNSTAP, and `libidn2` for
+internationalized domain name conversion.
+
+ISC regularly tests BIND on many operating systems and architectures, but
+lacks the resources to test all of them. Consequently, ISC is only able to
+offer support on a "best effort" basis for some.
+
+### Regularly tested platforms
+
+As of Mar 2020, BIND 9.17 is fully supported and regularly tested on the
+following systems:
+
+* Debian 9, 10
+* Ubuntu LTS 16.04, 18.04
+* Fedora 31
+* Red Hat Enterprise Linux / CentOS 7, 8
+* FreeBSD 11.3, 12.1
+* OpenBSD 6.6
+* Alpine Linux
+
+The amd64, i386, armhf and arm64 CPU architectures are all fully supported.
+
+### Best effort
+
+The following are platforms on which BIND is known to build and run.
+ISC makes every effort to fix bugs on these platforms, but may be unable to
+do so quickly due to lack of hardware, less familiarity on the part of
+engineering staff, and other constraints. With the exception of Windows
+Server 2012 R2, none of these are tested regularly by ISC.
+
+* Windows Server 2012 R2, 2016 / x64
+* Windows 10 / x64
+* macOS 10.12+
+* Solaris 11
+* NetBSD
+* Other Linux distributions still supported by their vendors, such as:
+    * Ubuntu 19.04+
+    * Gentoo
+    * Arch Linux
+* OpenWRT/LEDE 17.01+
+* Other CPU architectures (mips, mipsel, sparc, ...)
+
+### Community maintained
+
+These systems may not all have the required dependencies for building BIND
+easily available, although it will be possible in many cases to compile
+those directly from source. The community and interested parties may wish
+to help with maintenance, and we welcome patch contributions, although we
+cannot guarantee that we will accept them.  All contributions will be
+assessed against the risk of adverse effect on officially supported
+platforms.
+
+* Platforms past or close to their respective EOL dates, such as:
+    * Ubuntu 14.04, 18.10
+    * CentOS 6
+    * Debian Jessie
+    * FreeBSD 10.x
+
+## Unsupported platforms
+
+These are platforms on which BIND 9.17 is known *not* to build or run:
+
+* Platforms without at least OpenSSL 1.0.2
+* Windows 10 / x86
+* Windows Server 2012 and older
+* Solaris 10 and older
+* Platforms that don't support IPv6 Advanced Socket API (RFC 3542)
+* Platforms that don't support atomic operations (via compiler or library)
+* Linux without NPTL (Native POSIX Thread Library)
+* Platforms on which `libuv` cannot be compiled

README

@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ Contents
  1. Introduction
  2. Reporting bugs and getting help
  3. Contributing to BIND
- 4. BIND 9.16 features
+ 4. BIND 9.17 features
  5. Building BIND
  6. macOS
  7. Dependencies
@@ -51,8 +51,7 @@ the file CHANGES. See below for details on the CHANGES file format.
 For up-to-date versions and release notes, see https://www.isc.org/
 download/.
 
-For information about supported platforms, see the "Supported Platforms"
-section in the BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual.
+For information about supported platforms, see PLATFORMS.
 
 Reporting bugs and getting help
 
@@ -110,25 +109,160 @@ If you prefer, you may also submit code by opening a GitLab Issue and
 including your patch as an attachment, preferably generated by git
 format-patch.
 
-BIND 9.16 features
+BIND 9.17 features
 
-BIND 9.16 is the current stable branch of BIND 9. It includes all changes
-from the 9.15 development branch, updating the previous stable branch,
-9.14. New features include:
+BIND 9.17 is the newest development branch of BIND 9. It includes a number
+of changes from BIND 9.16 and earlier releases. New features include:
 
-  * New dnssec-policy statement to configure a key and signing policy for
-    zones, enabling automatic key regeneration and rollover.
-  * New network manager based on libuv.
-  * Added support for the new GeoIP2 geolocation API, libmaxminddb.
-  * Improved DNSSEC trust anchor configuration using the trust-anchors
-    statement, permitting configuration of trust anchors in DS as well as
-    DNSKEY format.
-  * YAML output for dig, mdig, and delv.
+  * New option "max-ixfr-ratio" to limit the size of outgoing IXFR
+    responses before falling back to full zone transfers.
+  * "rndc nta -d" and "rndc secroots" now include "validate-except"
+    entries when listing negative trust anchors.
 
 Building BIND
 
-For information about building BIND 9, see the "Building BIND 9" section
-in the BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual.
+Minimally, BIND requires a UNIX or Linux system with an ANSI C compiler,
+basic POSIX support, and a 64-bit integer type. BIND also requires the
+libuv asynchronous I/O library, and a cryptography provider library such
+as OpenSSL or a hardware service module supporting PKCS#11. On Linux, BIND
+requires the libcap library to set process privileges, though this
+requirement can be overridden by disabling capability support at compile
+time. See Compile-time options below for details on other libraries that
+may be required to support optional features.
+
+Successful builds have been observed on many versions of Linux and UNIX,
+including RHEL/CentOS, Fedora, Debian, Ubuntu, SLES, openSUSE, Slackware,
+Alpine, FreeBSD, NetBSD, OpenBSD, macOS, Solaris, OpenIndiana, OmniOS CE,
+HP-UX, and OpenWRT.
+
+BIND is also available for Windows Server 2012 R2 and higher. See
+win32utils/build.txt for details on building for Windows systems.
+
+To build on a UNIX or Linux system, use:
+
+    $ ./configure
+    $ make
+
+If you're planning on making changes to the BIND 9 source, you should run
+make depend. If you're using Emacs, you might find make tags helpful.
+
+Several environment variables that can be set before running configure
+will affect compilation. Significant ones are:
+
+   Variable                            Description
+CC             The C compiler to use. configure tries to figure out the
+               right one for supported systems.
+               C compiler flags. Defaults to include -g and/or -O2 as
+CFLAGS         supported by the compiler. Please include '-g' if you need
+               to set CFLAGS.
+               System header file directories. Can be used to specify
+STD_CINCLUDES  where add-on thread or IPv6 support is, for example.
+               Defaults to empty string.
+               Any additional preprocessor symbols you want defined.
+STD_CDEFINES   Defaults to empty string. For a list of possible settings,
+               see the file OPTIONS.
+LDFLAGS        Linker flags. Defaults to empty string.
+BUILD_CC       Needed when cross-compiling: the native C compiler to use
+               when building for the target system.
+BUILD_CFLAGS   CFLAGS for the target system during cross-compiling.
+BUILD_CPPFLAGS CPPFLAGS for the target system during cross-compiling.
+BUILD_LDFLAGS  LDFLAGS for the target system during cross-compiling.
+BUILD_LIBS     LIBS for the target system during cross-compiling.
+
+Additional environment variables affecting the build are listed at the end
+of the configure help text, which can be obtained by running the command:
+
+$ ./configure --help
+
+macOS
+
+Building on macOS assumes that the "Command Tools for Xcode" is installed.
+This can be downloaded from https://developer.apple.com/download/more/ or,
+if you have Xcode already installed, you can run xcode-select --install.
+(Note that an Apple ID may be required to access the download page.)
+
+Dependencies
+
+Portions of BIND that are written in Python, including dnssec-keymgr,
+dnssec-coverage, dnssec-checkds, and some of the system tests, require the
+argparse, ply and distutils.core modules to be available. argparse is a
+standard module as of Python 2.7 and Python 3.2. ply is available from
+https://pypi.python.org/pypi/ply. distutils.core is required for
+installation.
+
+Compile-time options
+
+To see a full list of configuration options, run configure --help.
+
+To build shared libraries, specify --with-libtool on the configure command
+line.
+
+For the server to support DNSSEC, you need to build it with crypto
+support. To use OpenSSL, you should have OpenSSL 1.0.2e or newer
+installed. If the OpenSSL library is installed in a nonstandard location,
+specify the prefix using --with-openssl=<PREFIX> on the configure command
+line. To use a PKCS#11 hardware service module for cryptographic
+operations, specify the path to the PKCS#11 provider library using
+--with-pkcs11=<PREFIX>, and configure BIND with --enable-native-pkcs11.
+
+To support the HTTP statistics channel, the server must be linked with at
+least one of the following libraries: libxml2 http://xmlsoft.org or json-c
+https://github.com/json-c/json-c. If these are installed at a nonstandard
+location, then:
+
+  * for libxml2, specify the prefix using --with-libxml2=/prefix,
+  * for json-c, adjust PKG_CONFIG_PATH.
+
+To support compression on the HTTP statistics channel, the server must be
+linked against libzlib. If this is installed in a nonstandard location,
+specify the prefix using --with-zlib=/prefix.
+
+To support storing configuration data for runtime-added zones in an LMDB
+database, the server must be linked with liblmdb. If this is installed in
+a nonstandard location, specify the prefix using with-lmdb=/prefix.
+
+To support MaxMind GeoIP2 location-based ACLs, the server must be linked
+with libmaxminddb. This is turned on by default if the library is found;
+if the library is installed in a nonstandard location, specify the prefix
+using --with-maxminddb=/prefix. GeoIP2 support can be switched off with
+--disable-geoip.
+
+For DNSTAP packet logging, you must have installed libfstrm https://
+github.com/farsightsec/fstrm and libprotobuf-c https://
+developers.google.com/protocol-buffers, and BIND must be configured with
+--enable-dnstap.
+
+Certain compiled-in constants and default settings can be decreased to
+values better suited to small machines, e.g. OpenWRT boxes, by specifying
+--with-tuning=small on the configure command line. This will decrease
+memory usage by using smaller structures, but will degrade performance.
+
+On Linux, process capabilities are managed in user space using the libcap
+library, which can be installed on most Linux systems via the libcap-dev
+or libcap-devel package. Process capability support can also be disabled
+by configuring with --disable-linux-caps.
+
+On some platforms it is necessary to explicitly request large file support
+to handle files bigger than 2GB. This can be done by using
+--enable-largefile on the configure command line.
+
+Support for the "fixed" rrset-order option can be enabled or disabled by
+specifying --enable-fixed-rrset or --disable-fixed-rrset on the configure
+command line. By default, fixed rrset-order is disabled to reduce memory
+footprint.
+
+The --enable-querytrace option causes named to log every step of
+processing every query. This should only be enabled when debugging,
+because it has a significant negative impact on query performance.
+
+make install will install named and the various BIND 9 libraries. By
+default, installation is into /usr/local, but this can be changed with the
+--prefix option when running configure.
+
+You may specify the option --sysconfdir to set the directory where
+configuration files like named.conf go by default, and --localstatedir to
+set the default parent directory of run/named.pid. --sysconfdir defaults
+to $prefix/etc and --localstatedir defaults to $prefix/var.
 
 Automated testing
 
@@ -190,8 +324,8 @@ the change that was made; these categories are:
 [doc]          Documentation
 [contrib]      Changes to the contributed tools and libraries in the
                'contrib' subdirectory
-               Used in the main development branch to reserve change
-[placeholder]  numbers for use in other branches, e.g., when fixing a bug
+               Used in the master development branch to reserve change
+[placeholder]  numbers for use in other branches, e.g. when fixing a bug
                that only exists in older releases
 
 In general, [func] and [experimental] tags will only appear in new-feature

README.md

@@ -1,14 +1,12 @@
 <!--
-Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-
-SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
-
-This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
-License, v. 2.0.  If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
-file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
-
-See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
-information regarding copyright ownership.
+ - Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ -
+ - This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
+ - License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+ - file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+ -
+ - See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
+ - information regarding copyright ownership.
 -->
 # BIND 9
 
@@ -17,7 +15,7 @@ information regarding copyright ownership.
 1. [Introduction](#intro)
 1. [Reporting bugs and getting help](#help)
 1. [Contributing to BIND](#contrib)
-1. [BIND 9.16 features](#features)
+1. [BIND 9.17 features](#features)
 1. [Building BIND](#build)
 1. [macOS](#macos)
 1. [Dependencies](#dependencies)
@@ -62,9 +60,7 @@ CHANGES file format.
 For up-to-date versions and release notes, see
 [https://www.isc.org/download/](https://www.isc.org/download/).
 
-For information about supported platforms, see the
-["Supported Platforms"](doc/arm/platforms.rst) section in the BIND 9
-Administrator Reference Manual.
+For information about supported platforms, see [PLATFORMS](PLATFORMS.md).
 
 ### <a name="help"/> Reporting bugs and getting help
 
@@ -129,26 +125,161 @@ If you prefer, you may also submit code by opening a
 including your patch as an attachment, preferably generated by
 `git format-patch`.
 
-### <a name="features"/> BIND 9.16 features
+### <a name="features"/> BIND 9.17 features
 
-BIND 9.16 is the current stable branch of BIND 9. It includes all
-changes from the 9.15 development branch, updating the previous stable
-branch, 9.14. New features include:
+BIND 9.17 is the newest development branch of BIND 9. It includes a
+number of changes from BIND 9.16 and earlier releases. New features include:
 
-* New `dnssec-policy` statement to configure a key and signing policy
-  for zones, enabling automatic key regeneration and rollover.
-* New network manager based on `libuv`.
-* Added support for the new GeoIP2 geolocation API, `libmaxminddb`.
-* Improved DNSSEC trust anchor configuration using the `trust-anchors`
-  statement, permitting configuration of trust anchors in DS as well as
-  DNSKEY format.
-* YAML output for `dig`, `mdig`, and `delv`.
+* New option "max-ixfr-ratio" to limit the size of outgoing IXFR responses
+  before falling back to full zone transfers.
+* "rndc nta -d" and "rndc secroots" now include "validate-except" entries
+  when listing negative trust anchors.
 
 ### <a name="build"/> Building BIND
 
-For information about building BIND 9, see the
-["Building BIND 9"](doc/arm/build.rst) section in the BIND 9
-Administrator Reference Manual.
+Minimally, BIND requires a UNIX or Linux system with an ANSI C compiler,
+basic POSIX support, and a 64-bit integer type.  BIND also requires the
+`libuv` asynchronous I/O library, and a cryptography provider library
+such as OpenSSL or a hardware service module supporting PKCS#11. On
+Linux, BIND requires the `libcap` library to set process privileges,
+though this requirement can be overridden by disabling capability
+support at compile time. See [Compile-time options](#opts) below
+for details on other libraries that may be required to support
+optional features.
+
+Successful builds have been observed on many versions of Linux and
+UNIX, including RHEL/CentOS, Fedora, Debian, Ubuntu, SLES, openSUSE,
+Slackware, Alpine, FreeBSD, NetBSD, OpenBSD, macOS, Solaris,
+OpenIndiana, OmniOS CE, HP-UX, and OpenWRT.
+
+BIND is also available for Windows Server 2012 R2 and higher.  See
+`win32utils/build.txt` for details on building for Windows
+systems.
+
+To build on a UNIX or Linux system, use:
+
+		$ ./configure
+		$ make
+
+If you're planning on making changes to the BIND 9 source, you should run
+`make depend`.  If you're using Emacs, you might find `make tags` helpful.
+
+Several environment variables that can be set before running `configure` will
+affect compilation.  Significant ones are:
+
+|Variable|Description |
+|--------------------|-----------------------------------------------|
+|`CC`|The C compiler to use.  `configure` tries to figure out the right one for supported systems.|
+|`CFLAGS`|C compiler flags.  Defaults to include -g and/or -O2 as supported by the compiler.  Please include '-g' if you need to set `CFLAGS`. |
+|`STD_CINCLUDES`|System header file directories.  Can be used to specify where add-on thread or IPv6 support is, for example.  Defaults to empty string.|
+|`STD_CDEFINES`|Any additional preprocessor symbols you want defined.  Defaults to empty string. For a list of possible settings, see the file [OPTIONS](OPTIONS.md).|
+|`LDFLAGS`|Linker flags. Defaults to empty string.|
+|`BUILD_CC`|Needed when cross-compiling: the native C compiler to use when building for the target system.|
+|`BUILD_CFLAGS`|`CFLAGS` for the target system during cross-compiling.|
+|`BUILD_CPPFLAGS`|`CPPFLAGS` for the target system during cross-compiling.|
+|`BUILD_LDFLAGS`|`LDFLAGS` for the target system during cross-compiling.|
+|`BUILD_LIBS`|`LIBS` for the target system during cross-compiling.|
+
+Additional environment variables affecting the build are listed at the
+end of the `configure` help text, which can be obtained by running the
+command:
+
+    $ ./configure --help
+
+#### <a name="macos"> macOS
+
+Building on macOS assumes that the "Command Tools for Xcode" is installed.
+This can be downloaded from
+[https://developer.apple.com/download/more/](https://developer.apple.com/download/more/)
+or, if you have Xcode already installed, you can run `xcode-select
+--install`.  (Note that an Apple ID may be required to access the download
+page.)
+
+### <a name="dependencies"/> Dependencies
+
+Portions of BIND that are written in Python, including
+`dnssec-keymgr`, `dnssec-coverage`, `dnssec-checkds`, and some of the
+system tests, require the `argparse`, `ply` and `distutils.core` modules
+to be available.
+`argparse` is a standard module as of Python 2.7 and Python 3.2.
+`ply` is available from [https://pypi.python.org/pypi/ply](https://pypi.python.org/pypi/ply).
+`distutils.core` is required for installation.
+
+#### <a name="opts"/> Compile-time options
+
+To see a full list of configuration options, run `configure --help`.
+
+To build shared libraries, specify `--with-libtool` on the `configure`
+command line.
+
+For the server to support DNSSEC, you need to build it with crypto support.
+To use OpenSSL, you should have OpenSSL 1.0.2e or newer installed.  If the
+OpenSSL library is installed in a nonstandard location, specify the prefix
+using `--with-openssl=<PREFIX>` on the configure command line. To use a
+PKCS#11 hardware service module for cryptographic operations, specify the
+path to the PKCS#11 provider library using `--with-pkcs11=<PREFIX>`, and
+configure BIND with `--enable-native-pkcs11`.
+
+To support the HTTP statistics channel, the server must be linked with at
+least one of the following libraries: `libxml2`
+[http://xmlsoft.org](http://xmlsoft.org) or `json-c`
+[https://github.com/json-c/json-c](https://github.com/json-c/json-c).
+If these are installed at a nonstandard location, then:
+
+* for `libxml2`, specify the prefix using `--with-libxml2=/prefix`,
+* for `json-c`, adjust `PKG_CONFIG_PATH`.
+
+To support compression on the HTTP statistics channel, the server must be
+linked against `libzlib`.  If this is installed in a nonstandard location,
+specify the prefix using `--with-zlib=/prefix`.
+
+To support storing configuration data for runtime-added zones in an LMDB
+database, the server must be linked with liblmdb. If this is installed in a
+nonstandard location, specify the prefix using `with-lmdb=/prefix`.
+
+To support MaxMind GeoIP2 location-based ACLs, the server must be linked
+with `libmaxminddb`. This is turned on by default if the library is
+found; if the library is installed in a nonstandard location,
+specify the prefix using `--with-maxminddb=/prefix`. GeoIP2 support
+can be switched off with `--disable-geoip`.
+
+For DNSTAP packet logging, you must have installed `libfstrm`
+[https://github.com/farsightsec/fstrm](https://github.com/farsightsec/fstrm)
+and `libprotobuf-c`
+[https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers),
+and BIND must be configured with `--enable-dnstap`.
+
+Certain compiled-in constants and default settings can be decreased to
+values better suited to small machines, e.g. OpenWRT boxes, by specifying
+`--with-tuning=small` on the `configure` command line. This will decrease
+memory usage by using smaller structures, but will degrade performance.
+
+On Linux, process capabilities are managed in user space using
+the `libcap` library, which can be installed on most Linux systems via
+the `libcap-dev` or `libcap-devel` package. Process capability support can
+also be disabled by configuring with `--disable-linux-caps`.
+
+On some platforms it is necessary to explicitly request large file support
+to handle files bigger than 2GB.  This can be done by using
+`--enable-largefile` on the `configure` command line.
+
+Support for the "fixed" rrset-order option can be enabled or disabled by
+specifying `--enable-fixed-rrset` or `--disable-fixed-rrset` on the
+configure command line.  By default, fixed rrset-order is disabled to
+reduce memory footprint.
+
+The `--enable-querytrace` option causes `named` to log every step of
+processing every query. This should only be enabled when debugging, because
+it has a significant negative impact on query performance.
+
+`make install` will install `named` and the various BIND 9 libraries.  By
+default, installation is into /usr/local, but this can be changed with the
+`--prefix` option when running `configure`.
+
+You may specify the option `--sysconfdir` to set the directory where
+configuration files like `named.conf` go by default, and `--localstatedir`
+to set the default parent directory of `run/named.pid`.   `--sysconfdir`
+defaults to `$prefix/etc` and `--localstatedir` defaults to `$prefix/var`.
 
 ### <a name="testing"/> Automated testing
 
@@ -208,7 +339,7 @@ the change that was made; these categories are:
 | [cleanup] | Minor corrections and refactoring |
 | [doc] | Documentation |
 | [contrib] | Changes to the contributed tools and libraries in the 'contrib' subdirectory |
-| [placeholder] | Used in the main development branch to reserve change numbers for use in other branches, e.g., when fixing a bug that only exists in older releases |
+| [placeholder] | Used in the master development branch to reserve change numbers for use in other branches, e.g. when fixing a bug that only exists in older releases |
 
 In general, [func] and [experimental] tags will only appear in new-feature
 releases (i.e., those with version numbers ending in zero).  Some new

aclocal.m4

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-# generated automatically by aclocal 1.16.3 -*- Autoconf -*-
+# generated automatically by aclocal 1.16.1 -*- Autoconf -*-
 
-# Copyright (C) 1996-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+# Copyright (C) 1996-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 
 # This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation
 # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it,
@@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ AS_VAR_IF([$1], [""], [$5], [$4])dnl
 
 # AM_CONDITIONAL                                            -*- Autoconf -*-
 
-# Copyright (C) 1997-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+# Copyright (C) 1997-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 #
 # This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation
 # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it,
@@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ fi])])
 # Add --enable-maintainer-mode option to configure.         -*- Autoconf -*-
 # From Jim Meyering
 
-# Copyright (C) 1996-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+# Copyright (C) 1996-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 #
 # This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation
 # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it,
@@ -357,7 +357,7 @@ AC_MSG_CHECKING([whether to enable maintainer-specific portions of Makefiles])
 ]
 )
 
-# Copyright (C) 2006-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+# Copyright (C) 2006-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 #
 # This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation
 # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it,
@@ -376,7 +376,7 @@ AC_DEFUN([AM_SUBST_NOTMAKE], [_AM_SUBST_NOTMAKE($@)])
 
 m4_include([m4/ax_check_compile_flag.m4])
 m4_include([m4/ax_check_openssl.m4])
-m4_include([m4/ax_gcc_func_attribute.m4])
+m4_include([m4/ax_lib_lmdb.m4])
 m4_include([m4/ax_posix_shell.m4])
 m4_include([m4/ax_pthread.m4])
 m4_include([m4/ax_restore_flags.m4])

autogen.sh

@@ -1,12 +1,10 @@
 #!/bin/sh
-
+#
 # Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
 #
-# SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
-#
 # This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
-# License, v. 2.0.  If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
-# file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+# License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+# file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
 #
 # See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
 # information regarding copyright ownership.

bin/Makefile.in

@@ -1,10 +1,8 @@
 # Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
 #
-# SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
-#
 # This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
-# License, v. 2.0.  If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
-# file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+# License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+# file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
 #
 # See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
 # information regarding copyright ownership.

bin/check/Makefile.in

@@ -1,10 +1,8 @@
 # Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
 #
-# SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
-#
 # This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
-# License, v. 2.0.  If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
-# file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+# License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+# file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
 #
 # See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
 # information regarding copyright ownership.
@@ -17,16 +15,16 @@ VERSION=@BIND9_VERSION@
 
 @BIND9_MAKE_INCLUDES@
 
-CINCLUDES =	${NS_INCLUDES} ${BIND9_INCLUDES} ${DNS_INCLUDES} \
-		${ISCCFG_INCLUDES} ${ISC_INCLUDES} ${OPENSSL_CFLAGS}
+CINCLUDES =	${NS_INCLUDES} ${BIND9_INCLUDES} ${DNS_INCLUDES} ${ISCCFG_INCLUDES} \
+		${ISC_INCLUDES} \
+		${OPENSSL_CFLAGS}
 
 CDEFINES = 	-DNAMED_CONFFILE=\"${sysconfdir}/named.conf\"
 CWARNINGS =
 
-DNSLIBS =	../../lib/dns/libdns.@A@ @NO_LIBTOOL_DNSLIBS@
+DNSLIBS =	../../lib/dns/libdns.@A@ ${MAXMINDDB_LIBS} @DNS_CRYPTO_LIBS@
 ISCCFGLIBS =	../../lib/isccfg/libisccfg.@A@
-ISCLIBS =	../../lib/isc/libisc.@A@ @NO_LIBTOOL_ISCLIBS@
-ISCNOSYMLIBS =	../../lib/isc/libisc-nosymtbl.@A@ @NO_LIBTOOL_ISCLIBS@
+ISCLIBS =	../../lib/isc/libisc.@A@ ${OPENSSL_LIBS} ${JSON_C_LIBS} ${LIBXML2_LIBS} ${ZLIB_LIBS}
 BIND9LIBS =	../../lib/bind9/libbind9.@A@
 NSLIBS =	../../lib/ns/libns.@A@
 
@@ -37,7 +35,6 @@ BIND9DEPLIBS =	../../lib/bind9/libbind9.@A@
 NSDEPENDLIBS =	../../lib/ns/libns.@A@
 
 LIBS =		${ISCLIBS} @LIBS@
-NOSYMLIBS =	${ISCNOSYMLIBS} @LIBS@
 
 SUBDIRS =
 
@@ -47,6 +44,12 @@ TARGETS =	named-checkconf@EXEEXT@ named-checkzone@EXEEXT@
 # Alphabetically
 SRCS =		named-checkconf.c named-checkzone.c check-tool.c
 
+MANPAGES =	named-checkconf.8 named-checkzone.8
+
+HTMLPAGES =	named-checkconf.html named-checkzone.html
+
+MANOBJS =	${MANPAGES} ${HTMLPAGES}
+
 @BIND9_MAKE_RULES@
 
 named-checkconf.@O@: named-checkconf.c
@@ -71,15 +74,25 @@ named-checkzone@EXEEXT@: named-checkzone.@O@ check-tool.@O@ ${ISCDEPLIBS} \
 	export LIBS0="${NSLIBS} ${ISCCFGLIBS} ${DNSLIBS}"; \
 	${FINALBUILDCMD}
 
+doc man:: ${MANOBJS}
+
+docclean manclean maintainer-clean::
+	rm -f ${MANOBJS}
+
 installdirs:
 	$(SHELL) ${top_srcdir}/mkinstalldirs ${DESTDIR}${sbindir}
+	$(SHELL) ${top_srcdir}/mkinstalldirs ${DESTDIR}${mandir}/man8
 
 install:: named-checkconf@EXEEXT@ named-checkzone@EXEEXT@ installdirs
 	${LIBTOOL_MODE_INSTALL} ${INSTALL_PROGRAM} named-checkconf@EXEEXT@ ${DESTDIR}${sbindir}
 	${LIBTOOL_MODE_INSTALL} ${INSTALL_PROGRAM} named-checkzone@EXEEXT@ ${DESTDIR}${sbindir}
 	(cd ${DESTDIR}${sbindir}; rm -f named-compilezone@EXEEXT@; ${LINK_PROGRAM} named-checkzone@EXEEXT@ named-compilezone@EXEEXT@)
+	for m in ${MANPAGES}; do ${INSTALL_DATA} ${srcdir}/$$m ${DESTDIR}${mandir}/man8 || exit 1; done
+	(cd ${DESTDIR}${mandir}/man8; rm -f named-compilezone.8; ${LINK_PROGRAM} named-checkzone.8 named-compilezone.8)
 
 uninstall::
+	rm -f ${DESTDIR}${mandir}/man8/named-compilezone.8
+	for m in ${MANPAGES}; do rm -f ${DESTDIR}${mandir}/man8/$$m || exit 1; done
 	rm -f ${DESTDIR}${sbindir}/named-compilezone@EXEEXT@
 	${LIBTOOL_MODE_UNINSTALL} rm -f ${DESTDIR}${sbindir}/named-checkconf@EXEEXT@
 	${LIBTOOL_MODE_UNINSTALL} rm -f ${DESTDIR}${sbindir}/named-checkzone@EXEEXT@

bin/check/check-tool.c

@@ -1,11 +1,9 @@
 /*
  * Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
  *
- * SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
- *
  * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
  * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
- * file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+ * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
  *
  * See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
  * information regarding copyright ownership.
@@ -689,7 +687,7 @@ load_zone(isc_mem_t *mctx, const char *zonename, const char *filename,
 
 	CHECK(dns_zone_create(&zone, mctx));
 
-	dns_zone_settype(zone, dns_zone_primary);
+	dns_zone_settype(zone, dns_zone_master);
 
 	isc_buffer_constinit(&buffer, zonename, strlen(zonename));
 	isc_buffer_add(&buffer, strlen(zonename));
@@ -697,8 +695,13 @@ load_zone(isc_mem_t *mctx, const char *zonename, const char *filename,
 	CHECK(dns_name_fromtext(origin, &buffer, dns_rootname, 0, NULL));
 	CHECK(dns_zone_setorigin(zone, origin));
 	dns_zone_setdbtype(zone, 1, (const char *const *)dbtype);
-	CHECK(dns_zone_setfile(zone, filename, fileformat,
-			       &dns_master_style_default));
+	if (strcmp(filename, "-") == 0) {
+		CHECK(dns_zone_setstream(zone, stdin, fileformat,
+					 &dns_master_style_default));
+	} else {
+		CHECK(dns_zone_setfile(zone, filename, fileformat,
+				       &dns_master_style_default));
+	}
 	if (journal != NULL) {
 		CHECK(dns_zone_setjournal(zone, journal));
 	}

bin/check/check-tool.h

@@ -1,11 +1,9 @@
 /*
  * Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
  *
- * SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
- *
  * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
  * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
- * file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+ * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
  *
  * See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
  * information regarding copyright ownership.

bin/check/named-checkconf.8

@@ -0,0 +1,152 @@
+.\" Copyright (C) 2000-2002, 2004, 2005, 2007, 2009, 2014-2016, 2018-2020 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.\" 
+.\" This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
+.\" License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+.\" file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+.\"
+.hy 0
+.ad l
+'\" t
+.\"     Title: named-checkconf
+.\"    Author: 
+.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.78.1 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
+.\"      Date: 2014-01-10
+.\"    Manual: BIND9
+.\"    Source: ISC
+.\"  Language: English
+.\"
+.TH "NAMED\-CHECKCONF" "8" "2014\-01\-10" "ISC" "BIND9"
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" * Define some portability stuff
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+.\" http://bugs.debian.org/507673
+.\" http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/groff/2009-02/msg00013.html
+.\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq
+.el       .ds Aq '
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" * set default formatting
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" disable hyphenation
+.nh
+.\" disable justification (adjust text to left margin only)
+.ad l
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.SH "NAME"
+named-checkconf \- named configuration file syntax checking tool
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.HP \w'\fBnamed\-checkconf\fR\ 'u
+\fBnamed\-checkconf\fR [\fB\-chjlvz\fR] [\fB\-p\fR\ [\fB\-x\fR\ ]] [\fB\-t\ \fR\fB\fIdirectory\fR\fR] {filename}
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBnamed\-checkconf\fR
+checks the syntax, but not the semantics, of a
+\fBnamed\fR
+configuration file\&. The file is parsed and checked for syntax errors, along with all files included by it\&. If no file is specified,
+/etc/named\&.conf
+is read by default\&.
+.PP
+Note: files that
+\fBnamed\fR
+reads in separate parser contexts, such as
+rndc\&.key
+and
+bind\&.keys, are not automatically read by
+\fBnamed\-checkconf\fR\&. Configuration errors in these files may cause
+\fBnamed\fR
+to fail to run, even if
+\fBnamed\-checkconf\fR
+was successful\&.
+\fBnamed\-checkconf\fR
+can be run on these files explicitly, however\&.
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.PP
+\-h
+.RS 4
+Print the usage summary and exit\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-j
+.RS 4
+When loading a zonefile read the journal if it exists\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-l
+.RS 4
+List all the configured zones\&. Each line of output contains the zone name, class (e\&.g\&. IN), view, and type (e\&.g\&. master or slave)\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-c
+.RS 4
+Check "core" configuration only\&. This suppresses the loading of plugin modules, and causes all parameters to
+\fBplugin\fR
+statements to be ignored\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-i
+.RS 4
+Ignore warnings on deprecated options\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-p
+.RS 4
+Print out the
+named\&.conf
+and included files in canonical form if no errors were detected\&. See also the
+\fB\-x\fR
+option\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-t \fIdirectory\fR
+.RS 4
+Chroot to
+directory
+so that include directives in the configuration file are processed as if run by a similarly chrooted
+\fBnamed\fR\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-v
+.RS 4
+Print the version of the
+\fBnamed\-checkconf\fR
+program and exit\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-x
+.RS 4
+When printing the configuration files in canonical form, obscure shared secrets by replacing them with strings of question marks (\*(Aq?\*(Aq)\&. This allows the contents of
+named\&.conf
+and related files to be shared \(em for example, when submitting bug reports \(em without compromising private data\&. This option cannot be used without
+\fB\-p\fR\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-z
+.RS 4
+Perform a test load of all master zones found in
+named\&.conf\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+filename
+.RS 4
+The name of the configuration file to be checked\&. If not specified, it defaults to
+/etc/named\&.conf\&.
+.RE
+.SH "RETURN VALUES"
+.PP
+\fBnamed\-checkconf\fR
+returns an exit status of 1 if errors were detected and 0 otherwise\&.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBnamed\fR(8),
+\fBnamed-checkzone\fR(8),
+BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual\&.
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+\fBInternet Systems Consortium, Inc\&.\fR
+.SH "COPYRIGHT"
+.br
+Copyright \(co 2000-2002, 2004, 2005, 2007, 2009, 2014-2016, 2018-2020 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.br

bin/check/named-checkconf.c

@@ -1,11 +1,9 @@
 /*
  * Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
  *
- * SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
- *
  * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
  * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
- * file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+ * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
  *
  * See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
  * information regarding copyright ownership.
@@ -186,7 +184,7 @@ configure_zone(const char *vclass, const char *view, const cfg_obj_t *zconfig,
 	const char *zname;
 	const char *zfile = NULL;
 	const cfg_obj_t *maps[4];
-	const cfg_obj_t *primariesobj = NULL;
+	const cfg_obj_t *mastersobj = NULL;
 	const cfg_obj_t *inviewobj = NULL;
 	const cfg_obj_t *zoptions = NULL;
 	const cfg_obj_t *classobj = NULL;
@@ -280,12 +278,8 @@ configure_zone(const char *vclass, const char *view, const cfg_obj_t *zconfig,
 	 * Is the redirect zone configured as a slave?
 	 */
 	if (strcasecmp(cfg_obj_asstring(typeobj), "redirect") == 0) {
-		cfg_map_get(zoptions, "primaries", &primariesobj);
-		if (primariesobj == NULL) {
-			cfg_map_get(zoptions, "masters", &primariesobj);
-		}
-
-		if (primariesobj != NULL) {
+		cfg_map_get(zoptions, "masters", &mastersobj);
+		if (mastersobj != NULL) {
 			return (ISC_R_SUCCESS);
 		}
 	}
@@ -306,7 +300,8 @@ configure_zone(const char *vclass, const char *view, const cfg_obj_t *zconfig,
 			zone_options &= ~DNS_ZONEOPT_CHECKDUPRR;
 			zone_options &= ~DNS_ZONEOPT_CHECKDUPRRFAIL;
 		} else {
-			UNREACHABLE();
+			INSIST(0);
+			ISC_UNREACHABLE();
 		}
 	} else {
 		zone_options |= DNS_ZONEOPT_CHECKDUPRR;
@@ -325,7 +320,8 @@ configure_zone(const char *vclass, const char *view, const cfg_obj_t *zconfig,
 			zone_options &= ~DNS_ZONEOPT_CHECKMX;
 			zone_options &= ~DNS_ZONEOPT_CHECKMXFAIL;
 		} else {
-			UNREACHABLE();
+			INSIST(0);
+			ISC_UNREACHABLE();
 		}
 	} else {
 		zone_options |= DNS_ZONEOPT_CHECKMX;
@@ -355,7 +351,8 @@ configure_zone(const char *vclass, const char *view, const cfg_obj_t *zconfig,
 			zone_options |= DNS_ZONEOPT_WARNMXCNAME;
 			zone_options |= DNS_ZONEOPT_IGNOREMXCNAME;
 		} else {
-			UNREACHABLE();
+			INSIST(0);
+			ISC_UNREACHABLE();
 		}
 	} else {
 		zone_options |= DNS_ZONEOPT_WARNMXCNAME;
@@ -374,7 +371,8 @@ configure_zone(const char *vclass, const char *view, const cfg_obj_t *zconfig,
 			zone_options |= DNS_ZONEOPT_WARNSRVCNAME;
 			zone_options |= DNS_ZONEOPT_IGNORESRVCNAME;
 		} else {
-			UNREACHABLE();
+			INSIST(0);
+			ISC_UNREACHABLE();
 		}
 	} else {
 		zone_options |= DNS_ZONEOPT_WARNSRVCNAME;
@@ -397,7 +395,8 @@ configure_zone(const char *vclass, const char *view, const cfg_obj_t *zconfig,
 		} else if (strcasecmp(cfg_obj_asstring(obj), "ignore") == 0) {
 			zone_options &= ~DNS_ZONEOPT_CHECKSPF;
 		} else {
-			UNREACHABLE();
+			INSIST(0);
+			ISC_UNREACHABLE();
 		}
 	} else {
 		zone_options |= DNS_ZONEOPT_CHECKSPF;
@@ -415,7 +414,8 @@ configure_zone(const char *vclass, const char *view, const cfg_obj_t *zconfig,
 			zone_options &= ~DNS_ZONEOPT_CHECKNAMES;
 			zone_options &= ~DNS_ZONEOPT_CHECKNAMESFAIL;
 		} else {
-			UNREACHABLE();
+			INSIST(0);
+			ISC_UNREACHABLE();
 		}
 	} else {
 		zone_options |= DNS_ZONEOPT_CHECKNAMES;
@@ -433,7 +433,8 @@ configure_zone(const char *vclass, const char *view, const cfg_obj_t *zconfig,
 		} else if (strcasecmp(masterformatstr, "map") == 0) {
 			masterformat = dns_masterformat_map;
 		} else {
-			UNREACHABLE();
+			INSIST(0);
+			ISC_UNREACHABLE();
 		}
 	}
 
@@ -528,12 +529,7 @@ load_zones_fromconfig(const cfg_obj_t *config, isc_mem_t *mctx,
 		}
 
 		classobj = cfg_tuple_get(vconfig, "class");
-		tresult = config_getclass(classobj, dns_rdataclass_in,
-					  &viewclass);
-		if (tresult != ISC_R_SUCCESS) {
-			CHECK(tresult);
-		}
-
+		CHECK(config_getclass(classobj, dns_rdataclass_in, &viewclass));
 		if (dns_rdataclass_ismeta(viewclass)) {
 			CHECK(ISC_R_FAILURE);
 		}
@@ -678,7 +674,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) {
 				fprintf(stderr, "%s: invalid argument -%c\n",
 					program, isc_commandline_option);
 			}
-			FALLTHROUGH;
+		/* FALLTHROUGH */
 		case 'h':
 			usage();
 

bin/check/named-checkconf.docbook

@@ -0,0 +1,229 @@
+<!DOCTYPE book [
+<!ENTITY mdash "&#8212;">]>
+<!--
+ - Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ -
+ - This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
+ - License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+ - file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+ -
+ - See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
+ - information regarding copyright ownership.
+-->
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<refentry xmlns:db="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="man.named-checkconf">
+  <info>
+    <date>2014-01-10</date>
+  </info>
+  <refentryinfo>
+    <corpname>ISC</corpname>
+    <corpauthor>Internet Systems Consortium, Inc.</corpauthor>
+  </refentryinfo>
+
+  <refmeta>
+    <refentrytitle><application>named-checkconf</application></refentrytitle>
+    <manvolnum>8</manvolnum>
+    <refmiscinfo>BIND9</refmiscinfo>
+  </refmeta>
+
+  <docinfo>
+    <copyright>
+      <year>2000</year>
+      <year>2001</year>
+      <year>2002</year>
+      <year>2004</year>
+      <year>2005</year>
+      <year>2007</year>
+      <year>2009</year>
+      <year>2014</year>
+      <year>2015</year>
+      <year>2016</year>
+      <year>2018</year>
+      <year>2019</year>
+      <year>2020</year>
+      <holder>Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")</holder>
+    </copyright>
+  </docinfo>
+
+  <refnamediv>
+    <refname><application>named-checkconf</application></refname>
+    <refpurpose>named configuration file syntax checking tool</refpurpose>
+  </refnamediv>
+
+  <refsynopsisdiv>
+    <cmdsynopsis sepchar=" ">
+      <command>named-checkconf</command>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-chjlvz</option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-p</option>
+	<arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-x</option>
+      </arg></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-t <replaceable class="parameter">directory</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="req" rep="norepeat">filename</arg>
+    </cmdsynopsis>
+  </refsynopsisdiv>
+
+  <refsection><info><title>DESCRIPTION</title></info>
+
+    <para><command>named-checkconf</command>
+      checks the syntax, but not the semantics, of a
+      <command>named</command> configuration file.  The file is parsed
+      and checked for syntax errors, along with all files included by it.
+      If no file is specified, <filename>/etc/named.conf</filename> is read
+      by default.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      Note: files that <command>named</command> reads in separate
+      parser contexts, such as <filename>rndc.key</filename> and
+      <filename>bind.keys</filename>, are not automatically read
+      by <command>named-checkconf</command>.  Configuration
+      errors in these files may cause <command>named</command> to
+      fail to run, even if <command>named-checkconf</command> was
+      successful.  <command>named-checkconf</command> can be run
+      on these files explicitly, however.
+    </para>
+  </refsection>
+
+  <refsection><info><title>OPTIONS</title></info>
+
+    <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-h</term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            Print the usage summary and exit.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-j</term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            When loading a zonefile read the journal if it exists.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-l</term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            List all the configured zones. Each line of output
+            contains the zone name, class (e.g. IN), view, and type
+            (e.g. master or slave).
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-c</term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+	    Check "core" configuration only. This suppresses the loading
+	    of plugin modules, and causes all parameters to
+	    <command>plugin</command> statements to be ignored.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-i</term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+	    Ignore warnings on deprecated options.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-p</term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+	    Print out the <filename>named.conf</filename> and included files
+	    in canonical form if no errors were detected.
+            See also the <option>-x</option> option.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-t <replaceable class="parameter">directory</replaceable></term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            Chroot to <filename>directory</filename> so that include
+            directives in the configuration file are processed as if
+            run by a similarly chrooted <command>named</command>.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-v</term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            Print the version of the <command>named-checkconf</command>
+            program and exit.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-x</term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+	    When printing the configuration files in canonical
+            form, obscure shared secrets by replacing them with
+            strings of question marks ('?'). This allows the
+            contents of <filename>named.conf</filename> and related
+            files to be shared &mdash; for example, when submitting
+            bug reports &mdash; without compromising private data.
+            This option cannot be used without <option>-p</option>.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-z</term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+	    Perform a test load of all master zones found in
+	    <filename>named.conf</filename>.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>filename</term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            The name of the configuration file to be checked.  If not
+            specified, it defaults to <filename>/etc/named.conf</filename>.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+    </variablelist>
+
+  </refsection>
+
+  <refsection><info><title>RETURN VALUES</title></info>
+
+    <para><command>named-checkconf</command>
+      returns an exit status of 1 if
+      errors were detected and 0 otherwise.
+    </para>
+  </refsection>
+
+  <refsection><info><title>SEE ALSO</title></info>
+
+    <para><citerefentry>
+        <refentrytitle>named</refentrytitle><manvolnum>8</manvolnum>
+      </citerefentry>,
+      <citerefentry>
+        <refentrytitle>named-checkzone</refentrytitle><manvolnum>8</manvolnum>
+      </citerefentry>,
+      <citetitle>BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual</citetitle>.
+    </para>
+  </refsection>
+</refentry>

bin/check/named-checkconf.html

@@ -0,0 +1,180 @@
+<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/loose.dtd">
+<!--
+ - Copyright (C) 2000-2002, 2004, 2005, 2007, 2009, 2014-2016, 2018-2020 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ - 
+ - This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
+ - License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+ - file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+-->
+<html lang="en">
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1">
+<title>named-checkconf</title>
+<meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.78.1">
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry">
+<a name="man.named-checkconf"></a><div class="titlepage"></div>
+  
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <div class="refnamediv">
+<h2>Name</h2>
+<p>
+    <span class="application">named-checkconf</span>
+     &#8212; named configuration file syntax checking tool
+  </p>
+</div>
+
+  <div class="refsynopsisdiv">
+<h2>Synopsis</h2>
+    <div class="cmdsynopsis"><p>
+      <code class="command">named-checkconf</code> 
+       [<code class="option">-chjlvz</code>]
+       [<code class="option">-p</code>
+	 [<code class="option">-x</code>
+      ]]
+       [<code class="option">-t <em class="replaceable"><code>directory</code></em></code>]
+       {filename}
+    </p></div>
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="refsection">
+<a name="id-1.7"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2>
+
+    <p><span class="command"><strong>named-checkconf</strong></span>
+      checks the syntax, but not the semantics, of a
+      <span class="command"><strong>named</strong></span> configuration file.  The file is parsed
+      and checked for syntax errors, along with all files included by it.
+      If no file is specified, <code class="filename">/etc/named.conf</code> is read
+      by default.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Note: files that <span class="command"><strong>named</strong></span> reads in separate
+      parser contexts, such as <code class="filename">rndc.key</code> and
+      <code class="filename">bind.keys</code>, are not automatically read
+      by <span class="command"><strong>named-checkconf</strong></span>.  Configuration
+      errors in these files may cause <span class="command"><strong>named</strong></span> to
+      fail to run, even if <span class="command"><strong>named-checkconf</strong></span> was
+      successful.  <span class="command"><strong>named-checkconf</strong></span> can be run
+      on these files explicitly, however.
+    </p>
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="refsection">
+<a name="id-1.8"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2>
+
+    <div class="variablelist"><dl class="variablelist">
+<dt><span class="term">-h</span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            Print the usage summary and exit.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-j</span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            When loading a zonefile read the journal if it exists.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-l</span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            List all the configured zones. Each line of output
+            contains the zone name, class (e.g. IN), view, and type
+            (e.g. master or slave).
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-c</span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+	    Check "core" configuration only. This suppresses the loading
+	    of plugin modules, and causes all parameters to
+	    <span class="command"><strong>plugin</strong></span> statements to be ignored.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-i</span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+	    Ignore warnings on deprecated options.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-p</span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+	    Print out the <code class="filename">named.conf</code> and included files
+	    in canonical form if no errors were detected.
+            See also the <code class="option">-x</code> option.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-t <em class="replaceable"><code>directory</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            Chroot to <code class="filename">directory</code> so that include
+            directives in the configuration file are processed as if
+            run by a similarly chrooted <span class="command"><strong>named</strong></span>.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-v</span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            Print the version of the <span class="command"><strong>named-checkconf</strong></span>
+            program and exit.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-x</span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+	    When printing the configuration files in canonical
+            form, obscure shared secrets by replacing them with
+            strings of question marks ('?'). This allows the
+            contents of <code class="filename">named.conf</code> and related
+            files to be shared &#8212; for example, when submitting
+            bug reports &#8212; without compromising private data.
+            This option cannot be used without <code class="option">-p</code>.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-z</span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+	    Perform a test load of all master zones found in
+	    <code class="filename">named.conf</code>.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">filename</span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            The name of the configuration file to be checked.  If not
+            specified, it defaults to <code class="filename">/etc/named.conf</code>.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+</dl></div>
+
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="refsection">
+<a name="id-1.9"></a><h2>RETURN VALUES</h2>
+
+    <p><span class="command"><strong>named-checkconf</strong></span>
+      returns an exit status of 1 if
+      errors were detected and 0 otherwise.
+    </p>
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="refsection">
+<a name="id-1.10"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2>
+
+    <p><span class="citerefentry">
+        <span class="refentrytitle">named</span>(8)
+      </span>,
+      <span class="citerefentry">
+        <span class="refentrytitle">named-checkzone</span>(8)
+      </span>,
+      <em class="citetitle">BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual</em>.
+    </p>
+  </div>
+</div></body>
+</html>

bin/check/named-checkconf.rst

@@ -1,95 +0,0 @@
-.. Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-..
-.. SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
-..
-.. This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
-.. License, v. 2.0.  If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
-.. file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
-..
-.. See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
-.. information regarding copyright ownership.
-
-.. highlight: console
-
-.. _man_named-checkconf:
-
-named-checkconf - named configuration file syntax checking tool
----------------------------------------------------------------
-
-Synopsis
-~~~~~~~~
-
-:program:`named-checkconf` [**-chjlvz**] [**-p** [**-x** ]] [**-t** directory] {filename}
-
-Description
-~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-``named-checkconf`` checks the syntax, but not the semantics, of a
-``named`` configuration file. The file, along with all files included by it, is parsed and checked for syntax
-errors. If no file is specified,
-``/etc/named.conf`` is read by default.
-
-Note: files that ``named`` reads in separate parser contexts, such as
-``rndc.key`` and ``bind.keys``, are not automatically read by
-``named-checkconf``. Configuration errors in these files may cause
-``named`` to fail to run, even if ``named-checkconf`` was successful.
-However, ``named-checkconf`` can be run on these files explicitly.
-
-Options
-~~~~~~~
-
-``-h``
-   This option prints the usage summary and exits.
-
-``-j``
-   When loading a zonefile, this option instructs ``named`` to read the journal if it exists.
-
-``-l``
-   This option lists all the configured zones. Each line of output contains the zone
-   name, class (e.g. IN), view, and type (e.g. primary or secondary).
-
-``-c``
-   This option specifies that only the "core" configuration should be checked. This suppresses the loading of
-   plugin modules, and causes all parameters to ``plugin`` statements to
-   be ignored.
-
-``-i``
-   This option ignores warnings on deprecated options.
-
-``-p``
-   This option prints out the ``named.conf`` and included files in canonical form if
-   no errors were detected. See also the ``-x`` option.
-
-``-t directory``
-   This option instructs ``named`` to chroot to ``directory``, so that ``include`` directives in the
-   configuration file are processed as if run by a similarly chrooted
-   ``named``.
-
-``-v``
-   This option prints the version of the ``named-checkconf`` program and exits.
-
-``-x``
-   When printing the configuration files in canonical form, this option obscures
-   shared secrets by replacing them with strings of question marks
-   (``?``). This allows the contents of ``named.conf`` and related files
-   to be shared - for example, when submitting bug reports -
-   without compromising private data. This option cannot be used without
-   ``-p``.
-
-``-z``
-   This option performs a test load of all zones of type ``primary`` found in ``named.conf``.
-
-``filename``
-   This indicates the name of the configuration file to be checked. If not specified,
-   it defaults to ``/etc/named.conf``.
-
-Return Values
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-``named-checkconf`` returns an exit status of 1 if errors were detected
-and 0 otherwise.
-
-See Also
-~~~~~~~~
-
-:manpage:`named(8)`, :manpage:`named-checkzone(8)`, BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual.

bin/check/named-checkzone.8

@@ -0,0 +1,329 @@
+.\" Copyright (C) 2000-2002, 2004-2007, 2009-2016, 2018-2020 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.\" 
+.\" This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
+.\" License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+.\" file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+.\"
+.hy 0
+.ad l
+'\" t
+.\"     Title: named-checkzone
+.\"    Author: 
+.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.78.1 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
+.\"      Date: 2014-02-19
+.\"    Manual: BIND9
+.\"    Source: ISC
+.\"  Language: English
+.\"
+.TH "NAMED\-CHECKZONE" "8" "2014\-02\-19" "ISC" "BIND9"
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" * Define some portability stuff
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+.\" http://bugs.debian.org/507673
+.\" http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/groff/2009-02/msg00013.html
+.\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq
+.el       .ds Aq '
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" * set default formatting
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" disable hyphenation
+.nh
+.\" disable justification (adjust text to left margin only)
+.ad l
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.SH "NAME"
+named-checkzone, named-compilezone \- zone file validity checking or converting tool
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.HP \w'\fBnamed\-checkzone\fR\ 'u
+\fBnamed\-checkzone\fR [\fB\-d\fR] [\fB\-h\fR] [\fB\-j\fR] [\fB\-q\fR] [\fB\-v\fR] [\fB\-c\ \fR\fB\fIclass\fR\fR] [\fB\-f\ \fR\fB\fIformat\fR\fR] [\fB\-F\ \fR\fB\fIformat\fR\fR] [\fB\-J\ \fR\fB\fIfilename\fR\fR] [\fB\-i\ \fR\fB\fImode\fR\fR] [\fB\-k\ \fR\fB\fImode\fR\fR] [\fB\-m\ \fR\fB\fImode\fR\fR] [\fB\-M\ \fR\fB\fImode\fR\fR] [\fB\-n\ \fR\fB\fImode\fR\fR] [\fB\-l\ \fR\fB\fIttl\fR\fR] [\fB\-L\ \fR\fB\fIserial\fR\fR] [\fB\-o\ \fR\fB\fIfilename\fR\fR] [\fB\-r\ \fR\fB\fImode\fR\fR] [\fB\-s\ \fR\fB\fIstyle\fR\fR] [\fB\-S\ \fR\fB\fImode\fR\fR] [\fB\-t\ \fR\fB\fIdirectory\fR\fR] [\fB\-T\ \fR\fB\fImode\fR\fR] [\fB\-w\ \fR\fB\fIdirectory\fR\fR] [\fB\-D\fR] [\fB\-W\ \fR\fB\fImode\fR\fR] {zonename} {filename}
+.HP \w'\fBnamed\-compilezone\fR\ 'u
+\fBnamed\-compilezone\fR [\fB\-d\fR] [\fB\-j\fR] [\fB\-q\fR] [\fB\-v\fR] [\fB\-c\ \fR\fB\fIclass\fR\fR] [\fB\-C\ \fR\fB\fImode\fR\fR] [\fB\-f\ \fR\fB\fIformat\fR\fR] [\fB\-F\ \fR\fB\fIformat\fR\fR] [\fB\-J\ \fR\fB\fIfilename\fR\fR] [\fB\-i\ \fR\fB\fImode\fR\fR] [\fB\-k\ \fR\fB\fImode\fR\fR] [\fB\-m\ \fR\fB\fImode\fR\fR] [\fB\-n\ \fR\fB\fImode\fR\fR] [\fB\-l\ \fR\fB\fIttl\fR\fR] [\fB\-L\ \fR\fB\fIserial\fR\fR] [\fB\-r\ \fR\fB\fImode\fR\fR] [\fB\-s\ \fR\fB\fIstyle\fR\fR] [\fB\-t\ \fR\fB\fIdirectory\fR\fR] [\fB\-T\ \fR\fB\fImode\fR\fR] [\fB\-w\ \fR\fB\fIdirectory\fR\fR] [\fB\-D\fR] [\fB\-W\ \fR\fB\fImode\fR\fR] {\fB\-o\ \fR\fB\fIfilename\fR\fR} {zonename} {filename}
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBnamed\-checkzone\fR
+checks the syntax and integrity of a zone file\&. It performs the same checks as
+\fBnamed\fR
+does when loading a zone\&. This makes
+\fBnamed\-checkzone\fR
+useful for checking zone files before configuring them into a name server\&.
+.PP
+\fBnamed\-compilezone\fR
+is similar to
+\fBnamed\-checkzone\fR, but it always dumps the zone contents to a specified file in a specified format\&. Additionally, it applies stricter check levels by default, since the dump output will be used as an actual zone file loaded by
+\fBnamed\fR\&. When manually specified otherwise, the check levels must at least be as strict as those specified in the
+\fBnamed\fR
+configuration file\&.
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.PP
+\-d
+.RS 4
+Enable debugging\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-h
+.RS 4
+Print the usage summary and exit\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-q
+.RS 4
+Quiet mode \- exit code only\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-v
+.RS 4
+Print the version of the
+\fBnamed\-checkzone\fR
+program and exit\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-j
+.RS 4
+When loading a zone file, read the journal if it exists\&. The journal file name is assumed to be the zone file name appended with the string
+\&.jnl\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-J \fIfilename\fR
+.RS 4
+When loading the zone file read the journal from the given file, if it exists\&. (Implies \-j\&.)
+.RE
+.PP
+\-c \fIclass\fR
+.RS 4
+Specify the class of the zone\&. If not specified, "IN" is assumed\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-i \fImode\fR
+.RS 4
+Perform post\-load zone integrity checks\&. Possible modes are
+\fB"full"\fR
+(default),
+\fB"full\-sibling"\fR,
+\fB"local"\fR,
+\fB"local\-sibling"\fR
+and
+\fB"none"\fR\&.
+.sp
+Mode
+\fB"full"\fR
+checks that MX records refer to A or AAAA record (both in\-zone and out\-of\-zone hostnames)\&. Mode
+\fB"local"\fR
+only checks MX records which refer to in\-zone hostnames\&.
+.sp
+Mode
+\fB"full"\fR
+checks that SRV records refer to A or AAAA record (both in\-zone and out\-of\-zone hostnames)\&. Mode
+\fB"local"\fR
+only checks SRV records which refer to in\-zone hostnames\&.
+.sp
+Mode
+\fB"full"\fR
+checks that delegation NS records refer to A or AAAA record (both in\-zone and out\-of\-zone hostnames)\&. It also checks that glue address records in the zone match those advertised by the child\&. Mode
+\fB"local"\fR
+only checks NS records which refer to in\-zone hostnames or that some required glue exists, that is when the nameserver is in a child zone\&.
+.sp
+Mode
+\fB"full\-sibling"\fR
+and
+\fB"local\-sibling"\fR
+disable sibling glue checks but are otherwise the same as
+\fB"full"\fR
+and
+\fB"local"\fR
+respectively\&.
+.sp
+Mode
+\fB"none"\fR
+disables the checks\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-f \fIformat\fR
+.RS 4
+Specify the format of the zone file\&. Possible formats are
+\fB"text"\fR
+(default),
+\fB"raw"\fR, and
+\fB"map"\fR\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-F \fIformat\fR
+.RS 4
+Specify the format of the output file specified\&. For
+\fBnamed\-checkzone\fR, this does not cause any effects unless it dumps the zone contents\&.
+.sp
+Possible formats are
+\fB"text"\fR
+(default), which is the standard textual representation of the zone, and
+\fB"map"\fR,
+\fB"raw"\fR, and
+\fB"raw=N"\fR, which store the zone in a binary format for rapid loading by
+\fBnamed\fR\&.
+\fB"raw=N"\fR
+specifies the format version of the raw zone file: if N is 0, the raw file can be read by any version of
+\fBnamed\fR; if N is 1, the file can be read by release 9\&.9\&.0 or higher; the default is 1\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-k \fImode\fR
+.RS 4
+Perform
+\fB"check\-names"\fR
+checks with the specified failure mode\&. Possible modes are
+\fB"fail"\fR
+(default for
+\fBnamed\-compilezone\fR),
+\fB"warn"\fR
+(default for
+\fBnamed\-checkzone\fR) and
+\fB"ignore"\fR\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-l \fIttl\fR
+.RS 4
+Sets a maximum permissible TTL for the input file\&. Any record with a TTL higher than this value will cause the zone to be rejected\&. This is similar to using the
+\fBmax\-zone\-ttl\fR
+option in
+named\&.conf\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-L \fIserial\fR
+.RS 4
+When compiling a zone to "raw" or "map" format, set the "source serial" value in the header to the specified serial number\&. (This is expected to be used primarily for testing purposes\&.)
+.RE
+.PP
+\-m \fImode\fR
+.RS 4
+Specify whether MX records should be checked to see if they are addresses\&. Possible modes are
+\fB"fail"\fR,
+\fB"warn"\fR
+(default) and
+\fB"ignore"\fR\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-M \fImode\fR
+.RS 4
+Check if a MX record refers to a CNAME\&. Possible modes are
+\fB"fail"\fR,
+\fB"warn"\fR
+(default) and
+\fB"ignore"\fR\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-n \fImode\fR
+.RS 4
+Specify whether NS records should be checked to see if they are addresses\&. Possible modes are
+\fB"fail"\fR
+(default for
+\fBnamed\-compilezone\fR),
+\fB"warn"\fR
+(default for
+\fBnamed\-checkzone\fR) and
+\fB"ignore"\fR\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-o \fIfilename\fR
+.RS 4
+Write zone output to
+filename\&. If
+filename
+is
+\-
+then write to standard out\&. This is mandatory for
+\fBnamed\-compilezone\fR\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-r \fImode\fR
+.RS 4
+Check for records that are treated as different by DNSSEC but are semantically equal in plain DNS\&. Possible modes are
+\fB"fail"\fR,
+\fB"warn"\fR
+(default) and
+\fB"ignore"\fR\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-s \fIstyle\fR
+.RS 4
+Specify the style of the dumped zone file\&. Possible styles are
+\fB"full"\fR
+(default) and
+\fB"relative"\fR\&. The full format is most suitable for processing automatically by a separate script\&. On the other hand, the relative format is more human\-readable and is thus suitable for editing by hand\&. For
+\fBnamed\-checkzone\fR
+this does not cause any effects unless it dumps the zone contents\&. It also does not have any meaning if the output format is not text\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-S \fImode\fR
+.RS 4
+Check if a SRV record refers to a CNAME\&. Possible modes are
+\fB"fail"\fR,
+\fB"warn"\fR
+(default) and
+\fB"ignore"\fR\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-t \fIdirectory\fR
+.RS 4
+Chroot to
+directory
+so that include directives in the configuration file are processed as if run by a similarly chrooted
+\fBnamed\fR\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-T \fImode\fR
+.RS 4
+Check if Sender Policy Framework (SPF) records exist and issues a warning if an SPF\-formatted TXT record is not also present\&. Possible modes are
+\fB"warn"\fR
+(default),
+\fB"ignore"\fR\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-w \fIdirectory\fR
+.RS 4
+chdir to
+directory
+so that relative filenames in master file $INCLUDE directives work\&. This is similar to the directory clause in
+named\&.conf\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-D
+.RS 4
+Dump zone file in canonical format\&. This is always enabled for
+\fBnamed\-compilezone\fR\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-W \fImode\fR
+.RS 4
+Specify whether to check for non\-terminal wildcards\&. Non\-terminal wildcards are almost always the result of a failure to understand the wildcard matching algorithm (RFC 1034)\&. Possible modes are
+\fB"warn"\fR
+(default) and
+\fB"ignore"\fR\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+zonename
+.RS 4
+The domain name of the zone being checked\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+filename
+.RS 4
+The name of the zone file\&.
+.RE
+.SH "RETURN VALUES"
+.PP
+\fBnamed\-checkzone\fR
+returns an exit status of 1 if errors were detected and 0 otherwise\&.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBnamed\fR(8),
+\fBnamed-checkconf\fR(8),
+RFC 1035,
+BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual\&.
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+\fBInternet Systems Consortium, Inc\&.\fR
+.SH "COPYRIGHT"
+.br
+Copyright \(co 2000-2002, 2004-2007, 2009-2016, 2018-2020 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.br

bin/check/named-checkzone.c

@@ -1,11 +1,9 @@
 /*
  * Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
  *
- * SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
- *
  * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
  * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
- * file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+ * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
  *
  * See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
  * information regarding copyright ownership.
@@ -20,6 +18,7 @@
 #include <isc/app.h>
 #include <isc/commandline.h>
 #include <isc/dir.h>
+#include <isc/file.h>
 #include <isc/hash.h>
 #include <isc/log.h>
 #include <isc/mem.h>
@@ -47,7 +46,7 @@
 static int quiet = 0;
 static isc_mem_t *mctx = NULL;
 dns_zone_t *zone = NULL;
-dns_zonetype_t zonetype = dns_zone_primary;
+dns_zonetype_t zonetype = dns_zone_master;
 static int dumpzone = 0;
 static const char *output_filename;
 static const char *prog_name = NULL;
@@ -72,13 +71,13 @@ usage(void) {
 	fprintf(stderr,
 		"usage: %s [-djqvD] [-c class] "
 		"[-f inputformat] [-F outputformat] [-J filename] "
-		"[-s (full|relative)] [-t directory] [-w directory] "
-		"[-k (ignore|warn|fail)] [-m (ignore|warn|fail)] "
-		"[-n (ignore|warn|fail)] [-r (ignore|warn|fail)] "
+		"[-t directory] [-w directory] [-k (ignore|warn|fail)] "
+		"[-n (ignore|warn|fail)] [-m (ignore|warn|fail)] "
+		"[-r (ignore|warn|fail)] "
 		"[-i (full|full-sibling|local|local-sibling|none)] "
 		"[-M (ignore|warn|fail)] [-S (ignore|warn|fail)] "
 		"[-W (ignore|warn)] "
-		"%s zonename filename\n",
+		"%s zonename [ (filename|-) ]\n",
 		prog_name,
 		progmode == progmode_check ? "[-o filename]" : "-o filename");
 	exit(1);
@@ -96,7 +95,7 @@ int
 main(int argc, char **argv) {
 	int c;
 	char *origin = NULL;
-	char *filename = NULL;
+	const char *filename = NULL;
 	isc_log_t *lctx = NULL;
 	isc_result_t result;
 	char classname_in[] = "IN";
@@ -146,7 +145,8 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) {
 	} else if (PROGCMP("named-compilezone")) {
 		progmode = progmode_compile;
 	} else {
-		UNREACHABLE();
+		INSIST(0);
+		ISC_UNREACHABLE();
 	}
 
 	/* Compilation specific defaults */
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) {
 				fprintf(stderr, "%s: invalid argument -%c\n",
 					prog_name, isc_commandline_option);
 			}
-			FALLTHROUGH;
+		/* FALLTHROUGH */
 		case 'h':
 			usage();
 
@@ -513,7 +513,8 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) {
 		logdump = false;
 	}
 
-	if (isc_commandline_index + 2 != argc) {
+	if (argc - isc_commandline_index < 1 ||
+	    argc - isc_commandline_index > 2) {
 		usage();
 	}
 
@@ -530,7 +531,16 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) {
 	dns_result_register();
 
 	origin = argv[isc_commandline_index++];
-	filename = argv[isc_commandline_index++];
+
+	if (isc_commandline_index == argc) {
+		/* "-" will be interpreted as stdin */
+		filename = "-";
+	} else {
+		filename = argv[isc_commandline_index];
+	}
+
+	isc_commandline_index++;
+
 	result = load_zone(mctx, origin, filename, inputformat, classname,
 			   maxttl, &zone);
 
@@ -564,5 +574,6 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) {
 #ifdef _WIN32
 	DestroySockets();
 #endif /* ifdef _WIN32 */
+
 	return ((result == ISC_R_SUCCESS) ? 0 : 1);
 }

bin/check/named-checkzone.docbook

@@ -0,0 +1,529 @@
+<!--
+ - Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ -
+ - This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
+ - License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+ - file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+ -
+ - See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
+ - information regarding copyright ownership.
+-->
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<refentry xmlns:db="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="man.named-checkzone">
+  <info>
+    <date>2014-02-19</date>
+  </info>
+  <refentryinfo>
+    <corpname>ISC</corpname>
+    <corpauthor>Internet Systems Consortium, Inc.</corpauthor>
+  </refentryinfo>
+
+  <refmeta>
+    <refentrytitle><application>named-checkzone</application></refentrytitle>
+    <manvolnum>8</manvolnum>
+    <refmiscinfo>BIND9</refmiscinfo>
+  </refmeta>
+
+  <docinfo>
+    <copyright>
+      <year>2000</year>
+      <year>2001</year>
+      <year>2002</year>
+      <year>2004</year>
+      <year>2005</year>
+      <year>2006</year>
+      <year>2007</year>
+      <year>2009</year>
+      <year>2010</year>
+      <year>2011</year>
+      <year>2012</year>
+      <year>2013</year>
+      <year>2014</year>
+      <year>2015</year>
+      <year>2016</year>
+      <year>2018</year>
+      <year>2019</year>
+      <year>2020</year>
+      <holder>Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")</holder>
+    </copyright>
+  </docinfo>
+
+  <refnamediv>
+    <refname><application>named-checkzone</application></refname>
+    <refname><application>named-compilezone</application></refname>
+    <refpurpose>zone file validity checking or converting tool</refpurpose>
+  </refnamediv>
+
+  <refsynopsisdiv>
+    <cmdsynopsis sepchar=" ">
+      <command>named-checkzone</command>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-d</option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-h</option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-j</option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-q</option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-v</option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-c <replaceable class="parameter">class</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-f <replaceable class="parameter">format</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-F <replaceable class="parameter">format</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-J <replaceable class="parameter">filename</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-i <replaceable class="parameter">mode</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-k <replaceable class="parameter">mode</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-m <replaceable class="parameter">mode</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-M <replaceable class="parameter">mode</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-n <replaceable class="parameter">mode</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-l <replaceable class="parameter">ttl</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-L <replaceable class="parameter">serial</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-o <replaceable class="parameter">filename</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-r <replaceable class="parameter">mode</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-s <replaceable class="parameter">style</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-S <replaceable class="parameter">mode</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-t <replaceable class="parameter">directory</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-T <replaceable class="parameter">mode</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-w <replaceable class="parameter">directory</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-D</option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-W <replaceable class="parameter">mode</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="req" rep="norepeat">zonename</arg>
+      <arg choice="req" rep="norepeat">filename</arg>
+    </cmdsynopsis>
+    <cmdsynopsis sepchar=" ">
+      <command>named-compilezone</command>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-d</option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-j</option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-q</option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-v</option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-c <replaceable class="parameter">class</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-C <replaceable class="parameter">mode</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-f <replaceable class="parameter">format</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-F <replaceable class="parameter">format</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-J <replaceable class="parameter">filename</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-i <replaceable class="parameter">mode</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-k <replaceable class="parameter">mode</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-m <replaceable class="parameter">mode</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-n <replaceable class="parameter">mode</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-l <replaceable class="parameter">ttl</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-L <replaceable class="parameter">serial</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-r <replaceable class="parameter">mode</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-s <replaceable class="parameter">style</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-t <replaceable class="parameter">directory</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-T <replaceable class="parameter">mode</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-w <replaceable class="parameter">directory</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-D</option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-W <replaceable class="parameter">mode</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="req" rep="norepeat"><option>-o <replaceable class="parameter">filename</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="req" rep="norepeat">zonename</arg>
+      <arg choice="req" rep="norepeat">filename</arg>
+    </cmdsynopsis>
+  </refsynopsisdiv>
+
+  <refsection><info><title>DESCRIPTION</title></info>
+
+    <para><command>named-checkzone</command>
+      checks the syntax and integrity of a zone file.  It performs the
+      same checks as <command>named</command> does when loading a
+      zone.  This makes <command>named-checkzone</command> useful for
+      checking zone files before configuring them into a name server.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+        <command>named-compilezone</command> is similar to
+	<command>named-checkzone</command>, but it always dumps the
+        zone contents to a specified file in a specified format.
+	Additionally, it applies stricter check levels by default,
+        since the dump output will be used as an actual zone file
+	loaded by <command>named</command>.
+	When manually specified otherwise, the check levels must at
+        least be as strict as those specified in the
+	<command>named</command> configuration file.
+     </para>
+  </refsection>
+
+  <refsection><info><title>OPTIONS</title></info>
+
+
+    <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-d</term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            Enable debugging.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-h</term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            Print the usage summary and exit.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-q</term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            Quiet mode - exit code only.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-v</term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            Print the version of the <command>named-checkzone</command>
+            program and exit.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-j</term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            When loading a zone file, read the journal if it exists.
+            The journal file name is assumed to be the zone file name
+	    appended with the string <filename>.jnl</filename>.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-J <replaceable class="parameter">filename</replaceable></term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            When loading the zone file read the journal from the given
+            file, if it exists. (Implies -j.)
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-c <replaceable class="parameter">class</replaceable></term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            Specify the class of the zone.  If not specified, "IN" is assumed.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-i <replaceable class="parameter">mode</replaceable></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	      Perform post-load zone integrity checks.  Possible modes are
+	      <command>"full"</command> (default),
+	      <command>"full-sibling"</command>,
+	      <command>"local"</command>,
+	      <command>"local-sibling"</command> and
+	      <command>"none"</command>.
+	  </para>
+	  <para>
+	      Mode <command>"full"</command> checks that MX records
+	      refer to A or AAAA record (both in-zone and out-of-zone
+	      hostnames).  Mode <command>"local"</command> only
+	      checks MX records which refer to in-zone hostnames.
+	  </para>
+	  <para>
+	      Mode <command>"full"</command> checks that SRV records
+	      refer to A or AAAA record (both in-zone and out-of-zone
+	      hostnames).  Mode <command>"local"</command> only
+	      checks SRV records which refer to in-zone hostnames.
+	  </para>
+	  <para>
+	      Mode <command>"full"</command> checks that delegation NS
+	      records refer to A or AAAA record (both in-zone and out-of-zone
+	      hostnames).  It also checks that glue address records
+	      in the zone match those advertised by the child.
+	      Mode <command>"local"</command> only checks NS records which
+	      refer to in-zone hostnames or that some required glue exists,
+	      that is when the nameserver is in a child zone.
+	  </para>
+	  <para>
+	      Mode <command>"full-sibling"</command> and
+	      <command>"local-sibling"</command> disable sibling glue
+	      checks but are otherwise the same as <command>"full"</command>
+	      and <command>"local"</command> respectively.
+	  </para>
+	  <para>
+	      Mode <command>"none"</command> disables the checks.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-f <replaceable class="parameter">format</replaceable></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Specify the format of the zone file.
+	    Possible formats are <command>"text"</command> (default),
+	    <command>"raw"</command>, and <command>"map"</command>.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-F <replaceable class="parameter">format</replaceable></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Specify the format of the output file specified.
+	    For <command>named-checkzone</command>,
+	    this does not cause any effects unless it dumps the zone
+	    contents.
+	  </para>
+	  <para>
+	    Possible formats are <command>"text"</command> (default),
+	    which is the standard textual representation of the zone,
+	    and <command>"map"</command>, <command>"raw"</command>,
+            and <command>"raw=N"</command>, which store the zone in a
+            binary format for rapid loading by <command>named</command>.
+            <command>"raw=N"</command> specifies the format version of
+            the raw zone file: if N is 0, the raw file can be read by
+            any version of <command>named</command>; if N is 1, the file
+            can be read by release 9.9.0 or higher; the default is 1.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-k <replaceable class="parameter">mode</replaceable></term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            Perform <command>"check-names"</command> checks with the
+	    specified failure mode.
+            Possible modes are <command>"fail"</command>
+	    (default for <command>named-compilezone</command>),
+            <command>"warn"</command>
+	    (default for <command>named-checkzone</command>) and
+            <command>"ignore"</command>.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-l <replaceable class="parameter">ttl</replaceable></term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            Sets a maximum permissible TTL for the input file.
+            Any record with a TTL higher than this value will cause
+            the zone to be rejected.  This is similar to using the
+            <command>max-zone-ttl</command> option in
+            <filename>named.conf</filename>.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-L <replaceable class="parameter">serial</replaceable></term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            When compiling a zone to "raw" or "map" format, set the
+            "source serial" value in the header to the specified serial
+            number.  (This is expected to be used primarily for testing
+            purposes.)
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-m <replaceable class="parameter">mode</replaceable></term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            Specify whether MX records should be checked to see if they
+            are addresses.  Possible modes are <command>"fail"</command>,
+            <command>"warn"</command> (default) and
+            <command>"ignore"</command>.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-M <replaceable class="parameter">mode</replaceable></term>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Check if a MX record refers to a CNAME.
+            Possible modes are <command>"fail"</command>,
+            <command>"warn"</command> (default) and
+            <command>"ignore"</command>.
+	  </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-n <replaceable class="parameter">mode</replaceable></term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            Specify whether NS records should be checked to see if they
+            are addresses.
+	    Possible modes are <command>"fail"</command>
+	    (default for <command>named-compilezone</command>),
+            <command>"warn"</command>
+	    (default for <command>named-checkzone</command>) and
+            <command>"ignore"</command>.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-o <replaceable class="parameter">filename</replaceable></term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            Write zone output to <filename>filename</filename>.
+	    If <filename>filename</filename> is <filename>-</filename> then
+	    write to standard out.
+	    This is mandatory for <command>named-compilezone</command>.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-r <replaceable class="parameter">mode</replaceable></term>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>
+            Check for records that are treated as different by DNSSEC but
+	    are semantically equal in plain DNS.
+            Possible modes are <command>"fail"</command>,
+            <command>"warn"</command> (default) and
+            <command>"ignore"</command>.
+	  </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-s <replaceable class="parameter">style</replaceable></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Specify the style of the dumped zone file.
+	    Possible styles are <command>"full"</command> (default)
+	    and <command>"relative"</command>.
+	    The full format is most suitable for processing
+	    automatically by a separate script.
+	    On the other hand, the relative format is more
+	    human-readable and is thus suitable for editing by hand.
+	    For <command>named-checkzone</command>
+	    this does not cause any effects unless it dumps the zone
+	    contents.
+	    It also does not have any meaning if the output format
+	    is not text.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-S <replaceable class="parameter">mode</replaceable></term>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Check if a SRV record refers to a CNAME.
+            Possible modes are <command>"fail"</command>,
+            <command>"warn"</command> (default) and
+            <command>"ignore"</command>.
+	  </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-t <replaceable class="parameter">directory</replaceable></term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            Chroot to <filename>directory</filename> so that
+            include
+            directives in the configuration file are processed as if
+            run by a similarly chrooted <command>named</command>.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-T <replaceable class="parameter">mode</replaceable></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Check if Sender Policy Framework (SPF) records exist
+	    and issues a warning if an SPF-formatted TXT record is
+	    not also present.  Possible modes are <command>"warn"</command>
+	    (default), <command>"ignore"</command>.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-w <replaceable class="parameter">directory</replaceable></term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            chdir to <filename>directory</filename> so that
+            relative
+            filenames in master file $INCLUDE directives work.  This
+            is similar to the directory clause in
+            <filename>named.conf</filename>.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-D</term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            Dump zone file in canonical format.
+	    This is always enabled for <command>named-compilezone</command>.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-W <replaceable class="parameter">mode</replaceable></term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            Specify whether to check for non-terminal wildcards.
+            Non-terminal wildcards are almost always the result of a
+            failure to understand the wildcard matching algorithm (RFC 1034).
+            Possible modes are <command>"warn"</command> (default)
+            and
+            <command>"ignore"</command>.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>zonename</term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            The domain name of the zone being checked.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>filename</term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            The name of the zone file.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+    </variablelist>
+
+  </refsection>
+
+  <refsection><info><title>RETURN VALUES</title></info>
+
+    <para><command>named-checkzone</command>
+      returns an exit status of 1 if
+      errors were detected and 0 otherwise.
+    </para>
+  </refsection>
+
+  <refsection><info><title>SEE ALSO</title></info>
+
+    <para><citerefentry>
+        <refentrytitle>named</refentrytitle><manvolnum>8</manvolnum>
+      </citerefentry>,
+      <citerefentry>
+        <refentrytitle>named-checkconf</refentrytitle><manvolnum>8</manvolnum>
+      </citerefentry>,
+      <citetitle>RFC 1035</citetitle>,
+      <citetitle>BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual</citetitle>.
+    </para>
+  </refsection>
+
+</refentry>

bin/check/named-checkzone.html

@@ -0,0 +1,429 @@
+<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/loose.dtd">
+<!--
+ - Copyright (C) 2000-2002, 2004-2007, 2009-2016, 2018-2020 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ - 
+ - This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
+ - License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+ - file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+-->
+<html lang="en">
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1">
+<title>named-checkzone</title>
+<meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.78.1">
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry">
+<a name="man.named-checkzone"></a><div class="titlepage"></div>
+  
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <div class="refnamediv">
+<h2>Name</h2>
+<p>
+    <span class="application">named-checkzone</span>, 
+    <span class="application">named-compilezone</span>
+     &#8212; zone file validity checking or converting tool
+  </p>
+</div>
+
+  <div class="refsynopsisdiv">
+<h2>Synopsis</h2>
+    <div class="cmdsynopsis"><p>
+      <code class="command">named-checkzone</code> 
+       [<code class="option">-d</code>]
+       [<code class="option">-h</code>]
+       [<code class="option">-j</code>]
+       [<code class="option">-q</code>]
+       [<code class="option">-v</code>]
+       [<code class="option">-c <em class="replaceable"><code>class</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-f <em class="replaceable"><code>format</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-F <em class="replaceable"><code>format</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-J <em class="replaceable"><code>filename</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-i <em class="replaceable"><code>mode</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-k <em class="replaceable"><code>mode</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-m <em class="replaceable"><code>mode</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-M <em class="replaceable"><code>mode</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-n <em class="replaceable"><code>mode</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-l <em class="replaceable"><code>ttl</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-L <em class="replaceable"><code>serial</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-o <em class="replaceable"><code>filename</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-r <em class="replaceable"><code>mode</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-s <em class="replaceable"><code>style</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-S <em class="replaceable"><code>mode</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-t <em class="replaceable"><code>directory</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-T <em class="replaceable"><code>mode</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-w <em class="replaceable"><code>directory</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-D</code>]
+       [<code class="option">-W <em class="replaceable"><code>mode</code></em></code>]
+       {zonename}
+       {filename}
+    </p></div>
+    <div class="cmdsynopsis"><p>
+      <code class="command">named-compilezone</code> 
+       [<code class="option">-d</code>]
+       [<code class="option">-j</code>]
+       [<code class="option">-q</code>]
+       [<code class="option">-v</code>]
+       [<code class="option">-c <em class="replaceable"><code>class</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-C <em class="replaceable"><code>mode</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-f <em class="replaceable"><code>format</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-F <em class="replaceable"><code>format</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-J <em class="replaceable"><code>filename</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-i <em class="replaceable"><code>mode</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-k <em class="replaceable"><code>mode</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-m <em class="replaceable"><code>mode</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-n <em class="replaceable"><code>mode</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-l <em class="replaceable"><code>ttl</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-L <em class="replaceable"><code>serial</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-r <em class="replaceable"><code>mode</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-s <em class="replaceable"><code>style</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-t <em class="replaceable"><code>directory</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-T <em class="replaceable"><code>mode</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-w <em class="replaceable"><code>directory</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-D</code>]
+       [<code class="option">-W <em class="replaceable"><code>mode</code></em></code>]
+       {<code class="option">-o <em class="replaceable"><code>filename</code></em></code>}
+       {zonename}
+       {filename}
+    </p></div>
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="refsection">
+<a name="id-1.7"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2>
+
+    <p><span class="command"><strong>named-checkzone</strong></span>
+      checks the syntax and integrity of a zone file.  It performs the
+      same checks as <span class="command"><strong>named</strong></span> does when loading a
+      zone.  This makes <span class="command"><strong>named-checkzone</strong></span> useful for
+      checking zone files before configuring them into a name server.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+        <span class="command"><strong>named-compilezone</strong></span> is similar to
+	<span class="command"><strong>named-checkzone</strong></span>, but it always dumps the
+        zone contents to a specified file in a specified format.
+	Additionally, it applies stricter check levels by default,
+        since the dump output will be used as an actual zone file
+	loaded by <span class="command"><strong>named</strong></span>.
+	When manually specified otherwise, the check levels must at
+        least be as strict as those specified in the
+	<span class="command"><strong>named</strong></span> configuration file.
+     </p>
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="refsection">
+<a name="id-1.8"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2>
+
+
+    <div class="variablelist"><dl class="variablelist">
+<dt><span class="term">-d</span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            Enable debugging.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-h</span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            Print the usage summary and exit.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-q</span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            Quiet mode - exit code only.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-v</span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            Print the version of the <span class="command"><strong>named-checkzone</strong></span>
+            program and exit.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-j</span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            When loading a zone file, read the journal if it exists.
+            The journal file name is assumed to be the zone file name
+	    appended with the string <code class="filename">.jnl</code>.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-J <em class="replaceable"><code>filename</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            When loading the zone file read the journal from the given
+            file, if it exists. (Implies -j.)
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-c <em class="replaceable"><code>class</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            Specify the class of the zone.  If not specified, "IN" is assumed.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-i <em class="replaceable"><code>mode</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	      Perform post-load zone integrity checks.  Possible modes are
+	      <span class="command"><strong>"full"</strong></span> (default),
+	      <span class="command"><strong>"full-sibling"</strong></span>,
+	      <span class="command"><strong>"local"</strong></span>,
+	      <span class="command"><strong>"local-sibling"</strong></span> and
+	      <span class="command"><strong>"none"</strong></span>.
+	  </p>
+	  <p>
+	      Mode <span class="command"><strong>"full"</strong></span> checks that MX records
+	      refer to A or AAAA record (both in-zone and out-of-zone
+	      hostnames).  Mode <span class="command"><strong>"local"</strong></span> only
+	      checks MX records which refer to in-zone hostnames.
+	  </p>
+	  <p>
+	      Mode <span class="command"><strong>"full"</strong></span> checks that SRV records
+	      refer to A or AAAA record (both in-zone and out-of-zone
+	      hostnames).  Mode <span class="command"><strong>"local"</strong></span> only
+	      checks SRV records which refer to in-zone hostnames.
+	  </p>
+	  <p>
+	      Mode <span class="command"><strong>"full"</strong></span> checks that delegation NS
+	      records refer to A or AAAA record (both in-zone and out-of-zone
+	      hostnames).  It also checks that glue address records
+	      in the zone match those advertised by the child.
+	      Mode <span class="command"><strong>"local"</strong></span> only checks NS records which
+	      refer to in-zone hostnames or that some required glue exists,
+	      that is when the nameserver is in a child zone.
+	  </p>
+	  <p>
+	      Mode <span class="command"><strong>"full-sibling"</strong></span> and
+	      <span class="command"><strong>"local-sibling"</strong></span> disable sibling glue
+	      checks but are otherwise the same as <span class="command"><strong>"full"</strong></span>
+	      and <span class="command"><strong>"local"</strong></span> respectively.
+	  </p>
+	  <p>
+	      Mode <span class="command"><strong>"none"</strong></span> disables the checks.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-f <em class="replaceable"><code>format</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Specify the format of the zone file.
+	    Possible formats are <span class="command"><strong>"text"</strong></span> (default),
+	    <span class="command"><strong>"raw"</strong></span>, and <span class="command"><strong>"map"</strong></span>.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-F <em class="replaceable"><code>format</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Specify the format of the output file specified.
+	    For <span class="command"><strong>named-checkzone</strong></span>,
+	    this does not cause any effects unless it dumps the zone
+	    contents.
+	  </p>
+	  <p>
+	    Possible formats are <span class="command"><strong>"text"</strong></span> (default),
+	    which is the standard textual representation of the zone,
+	    and <span class="command"><strong>"map"</strong></span>, <span class="command"><strong>"raw"</strong></span>,
+            and <span class="command"><strong>"raw=N"</strong></span>, which store the zone in a
+            binary format for rapid loading by <span class="command"><strong>named</strong></span>.
+            <span class="command"><strong>"raw=N"</strong></span> specifies the format version of
+            the raw zone file: if N is 0, the raw file can be read by
+            any version of <span class="command"><strong>named</strong></span>; if N is 1, the file
+            can be read by release 9.9.0 or higher; the default is 1.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-k <em class="replaceable"><code>mode</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            Perform <span class="command"><strong>"check-names"</strong></span> checks with the
+	    specified failure mode.
+            Possible modes are <span class="command"><strong>"fail"</strong></span>
+	    (default for <span class="command"><strong>named-compilezone</strong></span>),
+            <span class="command"><strong>"warn"</strong></span>
+	    (default for <span class="command"><strong>named-checkzone</strong></span>) and
+            <span class="command"><strong>"ignore"</strong></span>.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-l <em class="replaceable"><code>ttl</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            Sets a maximum permissible TTL for the input file.
+            Any record with a TTL higher than this value will cause
+            the zone to be rejected.  This is similar to using the
+            <span class="command"><strong>max-zone-ttl</strong></span> option in
+            <code class="filename">named.conf</code>.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-L <em class="replaceable"><code>serial</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            When compiling a zone to "raw" or "map" format, set the
+            "source serial" value in the header to the specified serial
+            number.  (This is expected to be used primarily for testing
+            purposes.)
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-m <em class="replaceable"><code>mode</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            Specify whether MX records should be checked to see if they
+            are addresses.  Possible modes are <span class="command"><strong>"fail"</strong></span>,
+            <span class="command"><strong>"warn"</strong></span> (default) and
+            <span class="command"><strong>"ignore"</strong></span>.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-M <em class="replaceable"><code>mode</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Check if a MX record refers to a CNAME.
+            Possible modes are <span class="command"><strong>"fail"</strong></span>,
+            <span class="command"><strong>"warn"</strong></span> (default) and
+            <span class="command"><strong>"ignore"</strong></span>.
+	  </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-n <em class="replaceable"><code>mode</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            Specify whether NS records should be checked to see if they
+            are addresses.
+	    Possible modes are <span class="command"><strong>"fail"</strong></span>
+	    (default for <span class="command"><strong>named-compilezone</strong></span>),
+            <span class="command"><strong>"warn"</strong></span>
+	    (default for <span class="command"><strong>named-checkzone</strong></span>) and
+            <span class="command"><strong>"ignore"</strong></span>.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-o <em class="replaceable"><code>filename</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            Write zone output to <code class="filename">filename</code>.
+	    If <code class="filename">filename</code> is <code class="filename">-</code> then
+	    write to standard out.
+	    This is mandatory for <span class="command"><strong>named-compilezone</strong></span>.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-r <em class="replaceable"><code>mode</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+            Check for records that are treated as different by DNSSEC but
+	    are semantically equal in plain DNS.
+            Possible modes are <span class="command"><strong>"fail"</strong></span>,
+            <span class="command"><strong>"warn"</strong></span> (default) and
+            <span class="command"><strong>"ignore"</strong></span>.
+	  </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-s <em class="replaceable"><code>style</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Specify the style of the dumped zone file.
+	    Possible styles are <span class="command"><strong>"full"</strong></span> (default)
+	    and <span class="command"><strong>"relative"</strong></span>.
+	    The full format is most suitable for processing
+	    automatically by a separate script.
+	    On the other hand, the relative format is more
+	    human-readable and is thus suitable for editing by hand.
+	    For <span class="command"><strong>named-checkzone</strong></span>
+	    this does not cause any effects unless it dumps the zone
+	    contents.
+	    It also does not have any meaning if the output format
+	    is not text.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-S <em class="replaceable"><code>mode</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Check if a SRV record refers to a CNAME.
+            Possible modes are <span class="command"><strong>"fail"</strong></span>,
+            <span class="command"><strong>"warn"</strong></span> (default) and
+            <span class="command"><strong>"ignore"</strong></span>.
+	  </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-t <em class="replaceable"><code>directory</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            Chroot to <code class="filename">directory</code> so that
+            include
+            directives in the configuration file are processed as if
+            run by a similarly chrooted <span class="command"><strong>named</strong></span>.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-T <em class="replaceable"><code>mode</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Check if Sender Policy Framework (SPF) records exist
+	    and issues a warning if an SPF-formatted TXT record is
+	    not also present.  Possible modes are <span class="command"><strong>"warn"</strong></span>
+	    (default), <span class="command"><strong>"ignore"</strong></span>.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-w <em class="replaceable"><code>directory</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            chdir to <code class="filename">directory</code> so that
+            relative
+            filenames in master file $INCLUDE directives work.  This
+            is similar to the directory clause in
+            <code class="filename">named.conf</code>.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-D</span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            Dump zone file in canonical format.
+	    This is always enabled for <span class="command"><strong>named-compilezone</strong></span>.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-W <em class="replaceable"><code>mode</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            Specify whether to check for non-terminal wildcards.
+            Non-terminal wildcards are almost always the result of a
+            failure to understand the wildcard matching algorithm (RFC 1034).
+            Possible modes are <span class="command"><strong>"warn"</strong></span> (default)
+            and
+            <span class="command"><strong>"ignore"</strong></span>.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">zonename</span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            The domain name of the zone being checked.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">filename</span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            The name of the zone file.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+</dl></div>
+
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="refsection">
+<a name="id-1.9"></a><h2>RETURN VALUES</h2>
+
+    <p><span class="command"><strong>named-checkzone</strong></span>
+      returns an exit status of 1 if
+      errors were detected and 0 otherwise.
+    </p>
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="refsection">
+<a name="id-1.10"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2>
+
+    <p><span class="citerefentry">
+        <span class="refentrytitle">named</span>(8)
+      </span>,
+      <span class="citerefentry">
+        <span class="refentrytitle">named-checkconf</span>(8)
+      </span>,
+      <em class="citetitle">RFC 1035</em>,
+      <em class="citetitle">BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual</em>.
+    </p>
+  </div>
+
+</div></body>
+</html>

bin/check/named-checkzone.rst

@@ -1,193 +0,0 @@
-.. Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-..
-.. SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
-..
-.. This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
-.. License, v. 2.0.  If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
-.. file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
-..
-.. See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
-.. information regarding copyright ownership.
-
-.. highlight: console
-
-.. BEWARE: Do not forget to edit also named-compilezone.rst!
-
-.. _man_named-checkzone:
-
-named-checkzone - zone file validation tool
--------------------------------------------
-
-Synopsis
-~~~~~~~~
-
-:program:`named-checkzone` [**-d**] [**-h**] [**-j**] [**-q**] [**-v**] [**-c** class] [**-f** format] [**-F** format] [**-J** filename] [**-i** mode] [**-k** mode] [**-m** mode] [**-M** mode] [**-n** mode] [**-l** ttl] [**-L** serial] [**-o** filename] [**-r** mode] [**-s** style] [**-S** mode] [**-t** directory] [**-T** mode] [**-w** directory] [**-D**] [**-W** mode] {zonename} {filename}
-
-Description
-~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-``named-checkzone`` checks the syntax and integrity of a zone file. It
-performs the same checks as ``named`` does when loading a zone. This
-makes ``named-checkzone`` useful for checking zone files before
-configuring them into a name server.
-
-Options
-~~~~~~~
-
-``-d``
-   This option enables debugging.
-
-``-h``
-   This option prints the usage summary and exits.
-
-``-q``
-   This option sets quiet mode, which only sets an exit code to indicate
-   successful or failed completion.
-
-``-v``
-   This option prints the version of the ``named-checkzone`` program and exits.
-
-``-j``
-   When loading a zone file, this option tells ``named`` to read the journal if it exists. The journal
-   file name is assumed to be the zone file name with the
-   string ``.jnl`` appended.
-
-``-J filename``
-   When loading the zone file, this option tells ``named`` to read the journal from the given file, if
-   it exists. This implies ``-j``.
-
-``-c class``
-   This option specifies the class of the zone. If not specified, ``IN`` is assumed.
-
-``-i mode``
-   This option performs post-load zone integrity checks. Possible modes are
-   ``full`` (the default), ``full-sibling``, ``local``,
-   ``local-sibling``, and ``none``.
-
-   Mode ``full`` checks that MX records refer to A or AAAA records
-   (both in-zone and out-of-zone hostnames). Mode ``local`` only
-   checks MX records which refer to in-zone hostnames.
-
-   Mode ``full`` checks that SRV records refer to A or AAAA records
-   (both in-zone and out-of-zone hostnames). Mode ``local`` only
-   checks SRV records which refer to in-zone hostnames.
-
-   Mode ``full`` checks that delegation NS records refer to A or AAAA
-   records (both in-zone and out-of-zone hostnames). It also checks that
-   glue address records in the zone match those advertised by the child.
-   Mode ``local`` only checks NS records which refer to in-zone
-   hostnames or verifies that some required glue exists, i.e., when the
-   name server is in a child zone.
-
-   Modes ``full-sibling`` and ``local-sibling`` disable sibling glue
-   checks, but are otherwise the same as ``full`` and ``local``,
-   respectively.
-
-   Mode ``none`` disables the checks.
-
-``-f format``
-   This option specifies the format of the zone file. Possible formats are
-   ``text`` (the default), ``raw``, and ``map``.
-
-``-F format``
-   This option specifies the format of the output file specified. For
-   ``named-checkzone``, this does not have any effect unless it dumps
-   the zone contents.
-
-   Possible formats are ``text`` (the default), which is the standard
-   textual representation of the zone, and ``map``, ``raw``, and ``raw=N``, which
-   store the zone in a binary format for rapid loading by ``named``.
-   ``raw=N`` specifies the format version of the raw zone file: if ``N`` is
-   0, the raw file can be read by any version of ``named``; if N is 1, the
-   file can only be read by release 9.9.0 or higher. The default is 1.
-
-``-k mode``
-   This option performs ``check-names`` checks with the specified failure mode.
-   Possible modes are ``fail``, ``warn`` (the default), and ``ignore``.
-
-``-l ttl``
-   This option sets a maximum permissible TTL for the input file. Any record with a
-   TTL higher than this value causes the zone to be rejected. This
-   is similar to using the ``max-zone-ttl`` option in ``named.conf``.
-
-``-L serial``
-   When compiling a zone to ``raw`` or ``map`` format, this option sets the "source
-   serial" value in the header to the specified serial number. This is
-   expected to be used primarily for testing purposes.
-
-``-m mode``
-   This option specifies whether MX records should be checked to see if they are
-   addresses. Possible modes are ``fail``, ``warn`` (the default), and
-   ``ignore``.
-
-``-M mode``
-   This option checks whether a MX record refers to a CNAME. Possible modes are
-   ``fail``, ``warn`` (the default), and ``ignore``.
-
-``-n mode``
-   This option specifies whether NS records should be checked to see if they are
-   addresses. Possible modes are ``fail``, ``warn`` (the default), and ``ignore``.
-
-``-o filename``
-   This option writes the zone output to ``filename``. If ``filename`` is ``-``, then
-   the zone output is written to standard output.
-
-``-r mode``
-   This option checks for records that are treated as different by DNSSEC but are
-   semantically equal in plain DNS. Possible modes are ``fail``,
-   ``warn`` (the default), and ``ignore``.
-
-``-s style``
-   This option specifies the style of the dumped zone file. Possible styles are
-   ``full`` (the default) and ``relative``. The ``full`` format is most
-   suitable for processing automatically by a separate script.
-   The relative format is more human-readable and is thus
-   suitable for editing by hand. This does not have any effect unless it dumps
-   the zone contents. It also does not have any meaning if the output format
-   is not text.
-
-``-S mode``
-   This option checks whether an SRV record refers to a CNAME. Possible modes are
-   ``fail``, ``warn`` (the default), and ``ignore``.
-
-``-t directory``
-   This option tells ``named`` to chroot to ``directory``, so that ``include`` directives in the
-   configuration file are processed as if run by a similarly chrooted
-   ``named``.
-
-``-T mode``
-   This option checks whether Sender Policy Framework (SPF) records exist and issues a
-   warning if an SPF-formatted TXT record is not also present. Possible
-   modes are ``warn`` (the default) and ``ignore``.
-
-``-w directory``
-   This option instructs ``named`` to chdir to ``directory``, so that relative filenames in master file
-   ``$INCLUDE`` directives work. This is similar to the directory clause in
-   ``named.conf``.
-
-``-D``
-   This option dumps the zone file in canonical format.
-
-``-W mode``
-   This option specifies whether to check for non-terminal wildcards. Non-terminal
-   wildcards are almost always the result of a failure to understand the
-   wildcard matching algorithm (:rfc:`4592`). Possible modes are ``warn``
-   (the default) and ``ignore``.
-
-``zonename``
-   This indicates the domain name of the zone being checked.
-
-``filename``
-   This is the name of the zone file.
-
-Return Values
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-``named-checkzone`` returns an exit status of 1 if errors were detected
-and 0 otherwise.
-
-See Also
-~~~~~~~~
-
-:manpage:`named(8)`, :manpage:`named-checkconf(8)`, :manpage:`named-compilezone(8)`,
-:rfc:`1035`, BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual.

bin/check/named-compilezone.rst

@@ -1,195 +0,0 @@
-.. Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-..
-.. SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
-..
-.. This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
-.. License, v. 2.0.  If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
-.. file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
-..
-.. See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
-.. information regarding copyright ownership.
-
-.. highlight: console
-
-.. BEWARE: Do not forget to edit also named-checkzone.rst!
-
-.. _man_named-compilezone:
-
-named-compilezone - zone file converting tool
----------------------------------------------
-
-Synopsis
-~~~~~~~~
-
-:program:`named-compilezone` [**-d**] [**-h**] [**-j**] [**-q**] [**-v**] [**-c** class] [**-f** format] [**-F** format] [**-J** filename] [**-i** mode] [**-k** mode] [**-m** mode] [**-M** mode] [**-n** mode] [**-l** ttl] [**-L** serial] [**-r** mode] [**-s** style] [**-S** mode] [**-t** directory] [**-T** mode] [**-w** directory] [**-D**] [**-W** mode] {**-o** filename} {zonename} {filename}
-
-Description
-~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-``named-compilezone`` checks the syntax and integrity of a zone file,
-and dumps the zone contents to a specified file in a specified format.
-It applies strict check levels by default, since the
-dump output is used as an actual zone file loaded by ``named``.
-When manually specified otherwise, the check levels must at least be as
-strict as those specified in the ``named`` configuration file.
-
-Options
-~~~~~~~
-
-``-d``
-   This option enables debugging.
-
-``-h``
-   This option prints the usage summary and exits.
-
-``-q``
-   This option sets quiet mode, which only sets an exit code to indicate
-   successful or failed completion.
-
-``-v``
-   This option prints the version of the ``named-checkzone`` program and exits.
-
-``-j``
-   When loading a zone file, this option tells ``named`` to read the journal if it exists. The journal
-   file name is assumed to be the zone file name with the
-   string ``.jnl`` appended.
-
-``-J filename``
-   When loading the zone file, this option tells ``named`` to read the journal from the given file, if
-   it exists. This implies ``-j``.
-
-``-c class``
-   This option specifies the class of the zone. If not specified, ``IN`` is assumed.
-
-``-i mode``
-   This option performs post-load zone integrity checks. Possible modes are
-   ``full`` (the default), ``full-sibling``, ``local``,
-   ``local-sibling``, and ``none``.
-
-   Mode ``full`` checks that MX records refer to A or AAAA records
-   (both in-zone and out-of-zone hostnames). Mode ``local`` only
-   checks MX records which refer to in-zone hostnames.
-
-   Mode ``full`` checks that SRV records refer to A or AAAA records
-   (both in-zone and out-of-zone hostnames). Mode ``local`` only
-   checks SRV records which refer to in-zone hostnames.
-
-   Mode ``full`` checks that delegation NS records refer to A or AAAA
-   records (both in-zone and out-of-zone hostnames). It also checks that
-   glue address records in the zone match those advertised by the child.
-   Mode ``local`` only checks NS records which refer to in-zone
-   hostnames or verifies that some required glue exists, i.e., when the
-   name server is in a child zone.
-
-   Modes ``full-sibling`` and ``local-sibling`` disable sibling glue
-   checks, but are otherwise the same as ``full`` and ``local``,
-   respectively.
-
-   Mode ``none`` disables the checks.
-
-``-f format``
-   This option specifies the format of the zone file. Possible formats are
-   ``text`` (the default), ``raw``, and ``map``.
-
-``-F format``
-   This option specifies the format of the output file specified. For
-   ``named-checkzone``, this does not have any effect unless it dumps
-   the zone contents.
-
-   Possible formats are ``text`` (the default), which is the standard
-   textual representation of the zone, and ``map``, ``raw``, and ``raw=N``, which
-   store the zone in a binary format for rapid loading by ``named``.
-   ``raw=N`` specifies the format version of the raw zone file: if ``N`` is
-   0, the raw file can be read by any version of ``named``; if N is 1, the
-   file can only be read by release 9.9.0 or higher. The default is 1.
-
-``-k mode``
-   This option performs ``check-names`` checks with the specified failure mode.
-   Possible modes are ``fail`` (the default), ``warn``, and ``ignore``.
-
-``-l ttl``
-   This option sets a maximum permissible TTL for the input file. Any record with a
-   TTL higher than this value causes the zone to be rejected. This
-   is similar to using the ``max-zone-ttl`` option in ``named.conf``.
-
-``-L serial``
-   When compiling a zone to ``raw`` or ``map`` format, this option sets the "source
-   serial" value in the header to the specified serial number. This is
-   expected to be used primarily for testing purposes.
-
-``-m mode``
-   This option specifies whether MX records should be checked to see if they are
-   addresses. Possible modes are ``fail``, ``warn`` (the default), and
-   ``ignore``.
-
-``-M mode``
-   This option checks whether a MX record refers to a CNAME. Possible modes are
-   ``fail``, ``warn`` (the default), and ``ignore``.
-
-``-n mode``
-   This option specifies whether NS records should be checked to see if they are
-   addresses. Possible modes are ``fail`` (the default), ``warn``,  and
-   ``ignore``.
-
-``-o filename``
-   This option writes the zone output to ``filename``. If ``filename`` is ``-``, then
-   the zone output is written to standard output. This is mandatory for ``named-compilezone``.
-
-``-r mode``
-   This option checks for records that are treated as different by DNSSEC but are
-   semantically equal in plain DNS. Possible modes are ``fail``,
-   ``warn`` (the default), and ``ignore``.
-
-``-s style``
-   This option specifies the style of the dumped zone file. Possible styles are
-   ``full`` (the default) and ``relative``. The ``full`` format is most
-   suitable for processing automatically by a separate script.
-   The relative format is more human-readable and is thus
-   suitable for editing by hand.
-
-``-S mode``
-   This option checks whether an SRV record refers to a CNAME. Possible modes are
-   ``fail``, ``warn`` (the default), and ``ignore``.
-
-``-t directory``
-   This option tells ``named`` to chroot to ``directory``, so that ``include`` directives in the
-   configuration file are processed as if run by a similarly chrooted
-   ``named``.
-
-``-T mode``
-   This option checks whether Sender Policy Framework (SPF) records exist and issues a
-   warning if an SPF-formatted TXT record is not also present. Possible
-   modes are ``warn`` (the default) and ``ignore``.
-
-``-w directory``
-   This option instructs ``named`` to chdir to ``directory``, so that relative filenames in master file
-   ``$INCLUDE`` directives work. This is similar to the directory clause in
-   ``named.conf``.
-
-``-D``
-   This option dumps the zone file in canonical format. This is always enabled for
-   ``named-compilezone``.
-
-``-W mode``
-   This option specifies whether to check for non-terminal wildcards. Non-terminal
-   wildcards are almost always the result of a failure to understand the
-   wildcard matching algorithm (:rfc:`4592`). Possible modes are ``warn``
-   (the default) and ``ignore``.
-
-``zonename``
-   This indicates the domain name of the zone being checked.
-
-``filename``
-   This is the name of the zone file.
-
-Return Values
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-``named-compilezone`` returns an exit status of 1 if errors were detected
-and 0 otherwise.
-
-See Also
-~~~~~~~~
-
-:manpage:`named(8)`, :manpage:`named-checkconf(8)`, :manpage:`named-checkzone(8)`,
-:rfc:`1035`, BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual.

bin/check/win32/checkconf.vcxproj.in

@@ -44,22 +44,19 @@
     <LinkIncremental>true</LinkIncremental>
     <OutDir>..\..\..\Build\$(Configuration)\</OutDir>
     <IntDir>.\$(Configuration)\</IntDir>
-    <IntDirSharingDetected>None</IntDirSharingDetected>
     <TargetName>named-$(ProjectName)</TargetName>
   </PropertyGroup>
   <PropertyGroup Condition="'$(Configuration)|$(Platform)'=='Release|@PLATFORM@'">
     <LinkIncremental>false</LinkIncremental>
     <OutDir>..\..\..\Build\$(Configuration)\</OutDir>
     <IntDir>.\$(Configuration)\</IntDir>
-    <IntDirSharingDetected>None</IntDirSharingDetected>
     <TargetName>named-$(ProjectName)</TargetName>
   </PropertyGroup>
   <ItemDefinitionGroup Condition="'$(Configuration)|$(Platform)'=='Debug|@PLATFORM@'">
     <ClCompile>
       <PrecompiledHeader>
       </PrecompiledHeader>
-      <WarningLevel>Level4</WarningLevel>
-      <TreatWarningAsError>false</TreatWarningAsError>
+      <WarningLevel>Level3</WarningLevel>
       <Optimization>Disabled</Optimization>
       <PreprocessorDefinitions>WIN32;_DEBUG;_CONSOLE;%(PreprocessorDefinitions)</PreprocessorDefinitions>
       <FunctionLevelLinking>true</FunctionLevelLinking>
@@ -77,13 +74,12 @@
       <GenerateDebugInformation>true</GenerateDebugInformation>
       <OutputFile>..\..\..\Build\$(Configuration)\$(TargetName)$(TargetExt)</OutputFile>
       <AdditionalLibraryDirectories>$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\isc\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\dns\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\isccfg\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\isccc\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\bind9\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\ns\win32\$(Configuration);%(AdditionalLibraryDirectories)</AdditionalLibraryDirectories>
-      <AdditionalDependencies>@OPENSSL_LIBCRYPTO@@OPENSSL_LIBSSL@checktool.lib;libisc.lib;libdns.lib;libisccfg.lib;libisccc.lib;libbind9.lib;libns.lib;ws2_32.lib;%(AdditionalDependencies)</AdditionalDependencies>
+      <AdditionalDependencies>@OPENSSL_LIB@checktool.lib;libisc.lib;libdns.lib;libisccfg.lib;libisccc.lib;libbind9.lib;libns.lib;ws2_32.lib;%(AdditionalDependencies)</AdditionalDependencies>
     </Link>
   </ItemDefinitionGroup>
   <ItemDefinitionGroup Condition="'$(Configuration)|$(Platform)'=='Release|@PLATFORM@'">
     <ClCompile>
-      <WarningLevel>Level1</WarningLevel>
-      <TreatWarningAsError>true</TreatWarningAsError>
+      <WarningLevel>Level3</WarningLevel>
       <PrecompiledHeader>
       </PrecompiledHeader>
       <Optimization>MaxSpeed</Optimization>
@@ -108,7 +104,7 @@
       <OptimizeReferences>true</OptimizeReferences>
       <OutputFile>..\..\..\Build\$(Configuration)\$(TargetName)$(TargetExt)</OutputFile>
       <AdditionalLibraryDirectories>$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\isc\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\dns\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\isccfg\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\isccc\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\bind9\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\ns\win32\$(Configuration);%(AdditionalLibraryDirectories)</AdditionalLibraryDirectories>
-      <AdditionalDependencies>@OPENSSL_LIBCRYPTO@@OPENSSL_LIBSSL@checktool.lib;libisc.lib;libdns.lib;libisccfg.lib;libisccc.lib;libbind9.lib;libns.lib;ws2_32.lib;%(AdditionalDependencies)</AdditionalDependencies>
+      <AdditionalDependencies>@OPENSSL_LIB@checktool.lib;libisc.lib;libdns.lib;libisccfg.lib;libisccc.lib;libbind9.lib;libns.lib;ws2_32.lib;%(AdditionalDependencies)</AdditionalDependencies>
       <LinkTimeCodeGeneration>Default</LinkTimeCodeGeneration>
     </Link>
   </ItemDefinitionGroup>

bin/check/win32/checktool.vcxproj.in

@@ -48,21 +48,18 @@
   </PropertyGroup>
   <PropertyGroup Condition="'$(Configuration)|$(Platform)'=='Debug|@PLATFORM@'">
     <IntDir>.\$(Configuration)\</IntDir>
-    <IntDirSharingDetected>None</IntDirSharingDetected>
   </PropertyGroup>
   <PropertyGroup Condition="'$(Configuration)|$(Platform)'=='Release|@PLATFORM@'">
     <OutDir>.\$(Configuration)\</OutDir>
   </PropertyGroup>
   <PropertyGroup Condition="'$(Configuration)|$(Platform)'=='Release|@PLATFORM@'">
     <IntDir>.\$(Configuration)\</IntDir>
-    <IntDirSharingDetected>None</IntDirSharingDetected>
   </PropertyGroup>
   <ItemDefinitionGroup Condition="'$(Configuration)|$(Platform)'=='Debug|@PLATFORM@'">
     <ClCompile>
       <PrecompiledHeader>
       </PrecompiledHeader>
-      <WarningLevel>Level4</WarningLevel>
-      <TreatWarningAsError>false</TreatWarningAsError>
+      <WarningLevel>Level3</WarningLevel>
       <Optimization>Disabled</Optimization>
       <PreprocessorDefinitions>WIN32;_DEBUG;_LIB;%(PreprocessorDefinitions)</PreprocessorDefinitions>
       <FunctionLevelLinking>true</FunctionLevelLinking>
@@ -81,8 +78,7 @@
   </ItemDefinitionGroup>
   <ItemDefinitionGroup Condition="'$(Configuration)|$(Platform)'=='Release|@PLATFORM@'">
     <ClCompile>
-      <WarningLevel>Level1</WarningLevel>
-      <TreatWarningAsError>true</TreatWarningAsError>
+      <WarningLevel>Level3</WarningLevel>
       <PrecompiledHeader>
       </PrecompiledHeader>
       <Optimization>MaxSpeed</Optimization>

bin/check/win32/checkzone.vcxproj.in

@@ -44,22 +44,19 @@
     <LinkIncremental>true</LinkIncremental>
     <OutDir>..\..\..\Build\$(Configuration)\</OutDir>
     <IntDir>.\$(Configuration)\</IntDir>
-    <IntDirSharingDetected>None</IntDirSharingDetected>
     <TargetName>named-$(ProjectName)</TargetName>
   </PropertyGroup>
   <PropertyGroup Condition="'$(Configuration)|$(Platform)'=='Release|@PLATFORM@'">
     <LinkIncremental>false</LinkIncremental>
     <OutDir>..\..\..\Build\$(Configuration)\</OutDir>
     <IntDir>.\$(Configuration)\</IntDir>
-    <IntDirSharingDetected>None</IntDirSharingDetected>
     <TargetName>named-$(ProjectName)</TargetName>
   </PropertyGroup>
   <ItemDefinitionGroup Condition="'$(Configuration)|$(Platform)'=='Debug|@PLATFORM@'">
     <ClCompile>
       <PrecompiledHeader>
       </PrecompiledHeader>
-      <WarningLevel>Level4</WarningLevel>
-      <TreatWarningAsError>false</TreatWarningAsError>
+      <WarningLevel>Level3</WarningLevel>
       <Optimization>Disabled</Optimization>
       <PreprocessorDefinitions>WIN32;_DEBUG;_CONSOLE;%(PreprocessorDefinitions)</PreprocessorDefinitions>
       <FunctionLevelLinking>true</FunctionLevelLinking>
@@ -77,7 +74,7 @@
       <GenerateDebugInformation>true</GenerateDebugInformation>
       <OutputFile>..\..\..\Build\$(Configuration)\$(TargetName)$(TargetExt)</OutputFile>
       <AdditionalLibraryDirectories>$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\isc\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\dns\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\isccfg\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\ns\win32\$(Configuration);%(AdditionalLibraryDirectories)</AdditionalLibraryDirectories>
-      <AdditionalDependencies>@OPENSSL_LIBCRYPTO@@OPENSSL_LIBSSL@checktool.lib;libisc.lib;libdns.lib;libisccfg.lib;libns.lib;ws2_32.lib;%(AdditionalDependencies)</AdditionalDependencies>
+      <AdditionalDependencies>@OPENSSL_LIB@checktool.lib;libisc.lib;libdns.lib;libisccfg.lib;libns.lib;ws2_32.lib;%(AdditionalDependencies)</AdditionalDependencies>
     </Link>
     <PostBuildEvent>
       <Command>cd ..\..\..\Build\$(Configuration)
@@ -88,8 +85,7 @@ copy /Y named-checkzone.ilk named-compilezone.ilk
   </ItemDefinitionGroup>
   <ItemDefinitionGroup Condition="'$(Configuration)|$(Platform)'=='Release|@PLATFORM@'">
     <ClCompile>
-      <WarningLevel>Level1</WarningLevel>
-      <TreatWarningAsError>true</TreatWarningAsError>
+      <WarningLevel>Level3</WarningLevel>
       <PrecompiledHeader>
       </PrecompiledHeader>
       <Optimization>MaxSpeed</Optimization>
@@ -114,7 +110,7 @@ copy /Y named-checkzone.ilk named-compilezone.ilk
       <OptimizeReferences>true</OptimizeReferences>
       <OutputFile>..\..\..\Build\$(Configuration)\$(TargetName)$(TargetExt)</OutputFile>
       <AdditionalLibraryDirectories>$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\isc\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\dns\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\isccfg\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\ns\win32\$(Configuration);%(AdditionalLibraryDirectories)</AdditionalLibraryDirectories>
-      <AdditionalDependencies>@OPENSSL_LIBCRYPTO@@OPENSSL_LIBSSL@checktool.lib;libisc.lib;libdns.lib;libisccfg.lib;libns.lib;ws2_32.lib;%(AdditionalDependencies)</AdditionalDependencies>
+      <AdditionalDependencies>@OPENSSL_LIB@checktool.lib;libisc.lib;libdns.lib;libisccfg.lib;libns.lib;ws2_32.lib;%(AdditionalDependencies)</AdditionalDependencies>
       <LinkTimeCodeGeneration>Default</LinkTimeCodeGeneration>
     </Link>
     <PostBuildEvent>

bin/confgen/Makefile.in

@@ -1,10 +1,8 @@
 # Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
 #
-# SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
-#
 # This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
-# License, v. 2.0.  If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
-# file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+# License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+# file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
 #
 # See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
 # information regarding copyright ownership.
@@ -29,9 +27,8 @@ CWARNINGS =
 
 ISCCFGLIBS =	../../lib/isccfg/libisccfg.@A@
 ISCCCLIBS =	../../lib/isccc/libisccc.@A@
-ISCLIBS =	../../lib/isc/libisc.@A@ @NO_LIBTOOL_ISCLIBS@
-ISCNOSYMLIBS =	../../lib/isc/libisc-nosymtbl.@A@ @NO_LIBTOOL_ISCLIBS@
-DNSLIBS =	../../lib/dns/libdns.@A@ @NO_LIBTOOL_DNSLIBS@
+ISCLIBS =	../../lib/isc/libisc.@A@ ${OPENSSL_LIBS} ${JSON_C_LIBS} ${LIBXML2_LIBS} ${ZLIB_LIBS}
+DNSLIBS =	../../lib/dns/libdns.@A@ ${MAXMINDDB_LIBS} @DNS_CRYPTO_LIBS@
 BIND9LIBS =	../../lib/bind9/libbind9.@A@
 
 ISCCFGDEPLIBS =	../../lib/isccfg/libisccfg.@A@
@@ -45,8 +42,6 @@ RNDCDEPLIBS =	${ISCCFGDEPLIBS} ${ISCCCDEPLIBS} ${BIND9DEPLIBS} ${DNSDEPLIBS} ${I
 
 LIBS =		${DNSLIBS} ${ISCLIBS} @LIBS@
 
-NOSYMLIBS =	${DNSLIBS} ${ISCNOSYMLIBS} @LIBS@
-
 CONFDEPLIBS =	${DNSDEPLIBS} ${ISCDEPLIBS}
 
 SRCS=		rndc-confgen.c ddns-confgen.c
@@ -55,6 +50,12 @@ SUBDIRS =	unix
 
 TARGETS =	rndc-confgen@EXEEXT@ ddns-confgen@EXEEXT@ tsig-keygen@EXEEXT@
 
+MANPAGES =	rndc-confgen.8 ddns-confgen.8
+
+HTMLPAGES =	rndc-confgen.html ddns-confgen.html
+
+MANOBJS =	${MANPAGES} ${HTMLPAGES}
+
 UOBJS =		unix/os.@O@
 
 @BIND9_MAKE_RULES@
@@ -80,16 +81,28 @@ tsig-keygen@EXEEXT@: ddns-confgen@EXEEXT@
 	rm -f tsig-keygen@EXEEXT@
 	${LINK_PROGRAM} ddns-confgen@EXEEXT@ tsig-keygen@EXEEXT@
 
+doc man:: ${MANOBJS}
+
+docclean manclean maintainer-clean::
+	rm -f ${MANOBJS}
+
 installdirs:
 	$(SHELL) ${top_srcdir}/mkinstalldirs ${DESTDIR}${sbindir}
+	$(SHELL) ${top_srcdir}/mkinstalldirs ${DESTDIR}${mandir}/man8
 
 install:: rndc-confgen@EXEEXT@ ddns-confgen@EXEEXT@ installdirs
 	${LIBTOOL_MODE_INSTALL} ${INSTALL_PROGRAM} rndc-confgen@EXEEXT@ ${DESTDIR}${sbindir}
 	${LIBTOOL_MODE_INSTALL} ${INSTALL_PROGRAM} ddns-confgen@EXEEXT@ ${DESTDIR}${sbindir}
+	${INSTALL_DATA} ${srcdir}/rndc-confgen.8 ${DESTDIR}${mandir}/man8
+	${INSTALL_DATA} ${srcdir}/ddns-confgen.8 ${DESTDIR}${mandir}/man8
 	(cd ${DESTDIR}${sbindir}; rm -f tsig-keygen@EXEEXT@; ${LINK_PROGRAM} ddns-confgen@EXEEXT@ tsig-keygen@EXEEXT@)
+	(cd ${DESTDIR}${mandir}/man8; rm -f tsig-keygen.8; ${LINK_PROGRAM} ddns-confgen.8 tsig-keygen.8)
 
 uninstall::
+	rm -f ${DESTDIR}${mandir}/man8/tsig-keygen.8
 	rm -f ${DESTDIR}${sbindir}/tsig-keygen@EXEEXT@
+	rm -f ${DESTDIR}${mandir}/man8/ddns-confgen.8
+	rm -f ${DESTDIR}${mandir}/man8/rndc-confgen.8
 	${LIBTOOL_MODE_UNINSTALL} rm -f ${DESTDIR}${sbindir}/ddns-confgen@EXEEXT@
 	${LIBTOOL_MODE_UNINSTALL} rm -f ${DESTDIR}${sbindir}/rndc-confgen@EXEEXT@
 

bin/confgen/ddns-confgen.8

@@ -0,0 +1,148 @@
+.\" Copyright (C) 2009, 2014-2016, 2018-2020 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.\" 
+.\" This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
+.\" License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+.\" file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+.\"
+.hy 0
+.ad l
+'\" t
+.\"     Title: ddns-confgen
+.\"    Author: 
+.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.78.1 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
+.\"      Date: 2014-03-06
+.\"    Manual: BIND9
+.\"    Source: ISC
+.\"  Language: English
+.\"
+.TH "DDNS\-CONFGEN" "8" "2014\-03\-06" "ISC" "BIND9"
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" * Define some portability stuff
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+.\" http://bugs.debian.org/507673
+.\" http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/groff/2009-02/msg00013.html
+.\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq
+.el       .ds Aq '
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" * set default formatting
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" disable hyphenation
+.nh
+.\" disable justification (adjust text to left margin only)
+.ad l
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.SH "NAME"
+ddns-confgen \- ddns key generation tool
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.HP \w'\fBtsig\-keygen\fR\ 'u
+\fBtsig\-keygen\fR [\fB\-a\ \fR\fB\fIalgorithm\fR\fR] [\fB\-h\fR] [name]
+.HP \w'\fBddns\-confgen\fR\ 'u
+\fBddns\-confgen\fR [\fB\-a\ \fR\fB\fIalgorithm\fR\fR] [\fB\-h\fR] [\fB\-k\ \fR\fB\fIkeyname\fR\fR] [\fB\-q\fR] [\fB\-r\ \fR\fB\fIrandomfile\fR\fR] [\-s\ \fIname\fR | \-z\ \fIzone\fR]
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBtsig\-keygen\fR
+and
+\fBddns\-confgen\fR
+are invocation methods for a utility that generates keys for use in TSIG signing\&. The resulting keys can be used, for example, to secure dynamic DNS updates to a zone or for the
+\fBrndc\fR
+command channel\&.
+.PP
+When run as
+\fBtsig\-keygen\fR, a domain name can be specified on the command line which will be used as the name of the generated key\&. If no name is specified, the default is
+\fBtsig\-key\fR\&.
+.PP
+When run as
+\fBddns\-confgen\fR, the generated key is accompanied by configuration text and instructions that can be used with
+\fBnsupdate\fR
+and
+\fBnamed\fR
+when setting up dynamic DNS, including an example
+\fBupdate\-policy\fR
+statement\&. (This usage similar to the
+\fBrndc\-confgen\fR
+command for setting up command channel security\&.)
+.PP
+Note that
+\fBnamed\fR
+itself can configure a local DDNS key for use with
+\fBnsupdate \-l\fR: it does this when a zone is configured with
+\fBupdate\-policy local;\fR\&.
+\fBddns\-confgen\fR
+is only needed when a more elaborate configuration is required: for instance, if
+\fBnsupdate\fR
+is to be used from a remote system\&.
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.PP
+\-a \fIalgorithm\fR
+.RS 4
+Specifies the algorithm to use for the TSIG key\&. Available choices are: hmac\-md5, hmac\-sha1, hmac\-sha224, hmac\-sha256, hmac\-sha384 and hmac\-sha512\&. The default is hmac\-sha256\&. Options are case\-insensitive, and the "hmac\-" prefix may be omitted\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-h
+.RS 4
+Prints a short summary of options and arguments\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-k \fIkeyname\fR
+.RS 4
+Specifies the key name of the DDNS authentication key\&. The default is
+\fBddns\-key\fR
+when neither the
+\fB\-s\fR
+nor
+\fB\-z\fR
+option is specified; otherwise, the default is
+\fBddns\-key\fR
+as a separate label followed by the argument of the option, e\&.g\&.,
+\fBddns\-key\&.example\&.com\&.\fR
+The key name must have the format of a valid domain name, consisting of letters, digits, hyphens and periods\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-q
+.RS 4
+(\fBddns\-confgen\fR
+only\&.) Quiet mode: Print only the key, with no explanatory text or usage examples; This is essentially identical to
+\fBtsig\-keygen\fR\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-s \fIname\fR
+.RS 4
+(\fBddns\-confgen\fR
+only\&.) Generate configuration example to allow dynamic updates of a single hostname\&. The example
+\fBnamed\&.conf\fR
+text shows how to set an update policy for the specified
+\fIname\fR
+using the "name" nametype\&. The default key name is ddns\-key\&.\fIname\fR\&. Note that the "self" nametype cannot be used, since the name to be updated may differ from the key name\&. This option cannot be used with the
+\fB\-z\fR
+option\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-z \fIzone\fR
+.RS 4
+(\fBddns\-confgen\fR
+only\&.) Generate configuration example to allow dynamic updates of a zone: The example
+\fBnamed\&.conf\fR
+text shows how to set an update policy for the specified
+\fIzone\fR
+using the "zonesub" nametype, allowing updates to all subdomain names within that
+\fIzone\fR\&. This option cannot be used with the
+\fB\-s\fR
+option\&.
+.RE
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBnsupdate\fR(1),
+\fBnamed.conf\fR(5),
+\fBnamed\fR(8),
+BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual\&.
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+\fBInternet Systems Consortium, Inc\&.\fR
+.SH "COPYRIGHT"
+.br
+Copyright \(co 2009, 2014-2016, 2018-2020 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.br

bin/confgen/ddns-confgen.c

@@ -1,11 +1,9 @@
 /*
  * Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
  *
- * SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
- *
  * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
  * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
- * file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+ * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
  *
  * See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
  * information regarding copyright ownership.
@@ -131,7 +129,8 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) {
 	} else if (PROGCMP("ddns-confgen")) {
 		progmode = progmode_confgen;
 	} else {
-		UNREACHABLE();
+		INSIST(0);
+		ISC_UNREACHABLE();
 	}
 
 	isc_commandline_errprint = false;

bin/confgen/ddns-confgen.docbook

@@ -0,0 +1,213 @@
+<!--
+ - Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ -
+ - This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
+ - License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+ - file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+ -
+ - See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
+ - information regarding copyright ownership.
+-->
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<refentry xmlns:db="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="man.ddns-confgen">
+  <info>
+    <date>2014-03-06</date>
+  </info>
+  <refentryinfo>
+    <corpname>ISC</corpname>
+    <corpauthor>Internet Systems Consortium, Inc.</corpauthor>
+  </refentryinfo>
+
+  <refmeta>
+    <refentrytitle><application>ddns-confgen</application></refentrytitle>
+    <manvolnum>8</manvolnum>
+    <refmiscinfo>BIND9</refmiscinfo>
+  </refmeta>
+
+  <refnamediv>
+    <refname><application>ddns-confgen</application></refname>
+    <refpurpose>ddns key generation tool</refpurpose>
+  </refnamediv>
+
+  <docinfo>
+    <copyright>
+      <year>2009</year>
+      <year>2014</year>
+      <year>2015</year>
+      <year>2016</year>
+      <year>2018</year>
+      <year>2019</year>
+      <year>2020</year>
+      <holder>Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")</holder>
+    </copyright>
+  </docinfo>
+
+  <refsynopsisdiv>
+    <cmdsynopsis sepchar=" ">
+      <command>tsig-keygen</command>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-a <replaceable class="parameter">algorithm</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-h</option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat">name</arg>
+    </cmdsynopsis>
+    <cmdsynopsis sepchar=" ">
+      <command>ddns-confgen</command>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-a <replaceable class="parameter">algorithm</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-h</option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-k <replaceable class="parameter">keyname</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-q</option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-r <replaceable class="parameter">randomfile</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <group choice="opt" rep="norepeat">
+        <arg choice="plain" rep="norepeat">-s <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable></arg>
+        <arg choice="plain" rep="norepeat">-z <replaceable class="parameter">zone</replaceable></arg>
+      </group>
+    </cmdsynopsis>
+  </refsynopsisdiv>
+
+  <refsection><info><title>DESCRIPTION</title></info>
+
+    <para>
+      <command>tsig-keygen</command> and <command>ddns-confgen</command>
+      are invocation methods for a utility that generates keys for use
+      in TSIG signing.  The resulting keys can be used, for example,
+      to secure dynamic DNS updates to a zone or for the
+      <command>rndc</command> command channel.
+    </para>
+
+    <para>
+      When run as <command>tsig-keygen</command>, a domain name
+      can be specified on the command line which will be used as
+      the name of the generated key.  If no name is specified,
+      the default is <constant>tsig-key</constant>.
+    </para>
+
+    <para>
+      When run as <command>ddns-confgen</command>, the generated
+      key is accompanied by configuration text and instructions
+      that can be used with <command>nsupdate</command> and
+      <command>named</command> when setting up dynamic DNS,
+      including an example <command>update-policy</command>
+      statement.  (This usage similar to the
+      <command>rndc-confgen</command> command for setting
+      up command channel security.)
+    </para>
+
+    <para>
+      Note that <command>named</command> itself can configure a
+      local DDNS key for use with <command>nsupdate -l</command>:
+      it does this when a zone is configured with
+      <command>update-policy local;</command>.
+      <command>ddns-confgen</command> is only needed when a
+      more elaborate configuration is required: for instance,
+      if <command>nsupdate</command> is to be used from a remote
+      system.
+    </para>
+  </refsection>
+
+  <refsection><info><title>OPTIONS</title></info>
+
+
+    <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-a <replaceable class="parameter">algorithm</replaceable></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+            Specifies the algorithm to use for the TSIG key.  Available
+            choices are: hmac-md5, hmac-sha1, hmac-sha224, hmac-sha256,
+            hmac-sha384 and hmac-sha512.  The default is hmac-sha256.
+            Options are case-insensitive, and the "hmac-" prefix
+            may be omitted.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-h</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Prints a short summary of options and arguments.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-k <replaceable class="parameter">keyname</replaceable></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Specifies the key name of the DDNS authentication key.
+	    The default is <constant>ddns-key</constant> when neither
+	    the <option>-s</option> nor <option>-z</option> option is
+	    specified; otherwise, the default
+	    is <constant>ddns-key</constant> as a separate label
+	    followed by the argument of the option, e.g.,
+	    <constant>ddns-key.example.com.</constant>
+	    The key name must have the format of a valid domain name,
+	    consisting of letters, digits, hyphens and periods.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-q</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    (<command>ddns-confgen</command> only.) Quiet mode:  Print
+            only the key, with no explanatory text or usage examples;
+            This is essentially identical to <command>tsig-keygen</command>.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-s <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+            (<command>ddns-confgen</command> only.)
+	    Generate configuration example to allow dynamic updates
+            of a single hostname.  The example <command>named.conf</command>
+            text shows how to set an update policy for the specified
+            <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>
+	    using the "name" nametype.  The default key name is
+	    ddns-key.<replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable>.
+	    Note that the "self" nametype cannot be used, since
+	    the name to be updated may differ from the key name.
+	    This option cannot be used with the <option>-z</option> option.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-z <replaceable class="parameter">zone</replaceable></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+            (<command>ddns-confgen</command> only.)
+	    Generate configuration example to allow dynamic updates
+            of a zone:  The example <command>named.conf</command> text
+            shows how to set an update policy for the specified
+	    <replaceable class="parameter">zone</replaceable>
+	    using the "zonesub" nametype, allowing updates to
+            all subdomain names within that
+            <replaceable class="parameter">zone</replaceable>.
+	    This option cannot be used with the <option>-s</option> option.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+    </variablelist>
+  </refsection>
+
+  <refsection><info><title>SEE ALSO</title></info>
+
+    <para><citerefentry>
+	<refentrytitle>nsupdate</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
+      </citerefentry>,
+      <citerefentry>
+	<refentrytitle>named.conf</refentrytitle><manvolnum>5</manvolnum>
+      </citerefentry>,
+      <citerefentry>
+	<refentrytitle>named</refentrytitle><manvolnum>8</manvolnum>
+      </citerefentry>,
+      <citetitle>BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual</citetitle>.
+    </para>
+  </refsection>
+
+</refentry>

bin/confgen/ddns-confgen.html

@@ -0,0 +1,187 @@
+<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/loose.dtd">
+<!--
+ - Copyright (C) 2009, 2014-2016, 2018-2020 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ - 
+ - This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
+ - License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+ - file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+-->
+<html lang="en">
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1">
+<title>ddns-confgen</title>
+<meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.78.1">
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry">
+<a name="man.ddns-confgen"></a><div class="titlepage"></div>
+  
+  
+
+  
+
+  <div class="refnamediv">
+<h2>Name</h2>
+<p>
+    <span class="application">ddns-confgen</span>
+     &#8212; ddns key generation tool
+  </p>
+</div>
+
+  
+
+  <div class="refsynopsisdiv">
+<h2>Synopsis</h2>
+    <div class="cmdsynopsis"><p>
+      <code class="command">tsig-keygen</code> 
+       [<code class="option">-a <em class="replaceable"><code>algorithm</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-h</code>]
+       [name]
+    </p></div>
+    <div class="cmdsynopsis"><p>
+      <code class="command">ddns-confgen</code> 
+       [<code class="option">-a <em class="replaceable"><code>algorithm</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-h</code>]
+       [<code class="option">-k <em class="replaceable"><code>keyname</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-q</code>]
+       [<code class="option">-r <em class="replaceable"><code>randomfile</code></em></code>]
+       [
+         -s <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em> 
+         |   -z <em class="replaceable"><code>zone</code></em> 
+      ]
+    </p></div>
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="refsection">
+<a name="id-1.7"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2>
+
+    <p>
+      <span class="command"><strong>tsig-keygen</strong></span> and <span class="command"><strong>ddns-confgen</strong></span>
+      are invocation methods for a utility that generates keys for use
+      in TSIG signing.  The resulting keys can be used, for example,
+      to secure dynamic DNS updates to a zone or for the
+      <span class="command"><strong>rndc</strong></span> command channel.
+    </p>
+
+    <p>
+      When run as <span class="command"><strong>tsig-keygen</strong></span>, a domain name
+      can be specified on the command line which will be used as
+      the name of the generated key.  If no name is specified,
+      the default is <code class="constant">tsig-key</code>.
+    </p>
+
+    <p>
+      When run as <span class="command"><strong>ddns-confgen</strong></span>, the generated
+      key is accompanied by configuration text and instructions
+      that can be used with <span class="command"><strong>nsupdate</strong></span> and
+      <span class="command"><strong>named</strong></span> when setting up dynamic DNS,
+      including an example <span class="command"><strong>update-policy</strong></span>
+      statement.  (This usage similar to the
+      <span class="command"><strong>rndc-confgen</strong></span> command for setting
+      up command channel security.)
+    </p>
+
+    <p>
+      Note that <span class="command"><strong>named</strong></span> itself can configure a
+      local DDNS key for use with <span class="command"><strong>nsupdate -l</strong></span>:
+      it does this when a zone is configured with
+      <span class="command"><strong>update-policy local;</strong></span>.
+      <span class="command"><strong>ddns-confgen</strong></span> is only needed when a
+      more elaborate configuration is required: for instance,
+      if <span class="command"><strong>nsupdate</strong></span> is to be used from a remote
+      system.
+    </p>
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="refsection">
+<a name="id-1.8"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2>
+
+
+    <div class="variablelist"><dl class="variablelist">
+<dt><span class="term">-a <em class="replaceable"><code>algorithm</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+            Specifies the algorithm to use for the TSIG key.  Available
+            choices are: hmac-md5, hmac-sha1, hmac-sha224, hmac-sha256,
+            hmac-sha384 and hmac-sha512.  The default is hmac-sha256.
+            Options are case-insensitive, and the "hmac-" prefix
+            may be omitted.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-h</span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Prints a short summary of options and arguments.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-k <em class="replaceable"><code>keyname</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Specifies the key name of the DDNS authentication key.
+	    The default is <code class="constant">ddns-key</code> when neither
+	    the <code class="option">-s</code> nor <code class="option">-z</code> option is
+	    specified; otherwise, the default
+	    is <code class="constant">ddns-key</code> as a separate label
+	    followed by the argument of the option, e.g.,
+	    <code class="constant">ddns-key.example.com.</code>
+	    The key name must have the format of a valid domain name,
+	    consisting of letters, digits, hyphens and periods.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-q</span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    (<span class="command"><strong>ddns-confgen</strong></span> only.) Quiet mode:  Print
+            only the key, with no explanatory text or usage examples;
+            This is essentially identical to <span class="command"><strong>tsig-keygen</strong></span>.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-s <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+            (<span class="command"><strong>ddns-confgen</strong></span> only.)
+	    Generate configuration example to allow dynamic updates
+            of a single hostname.  The example <span class="command"><strong>named.conf</strong></span>
+            text shows how to set an update policy for the specified
+            <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em>
+	    using the "name" nametype.  The default key name is
+	    ddns-key.<em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em>.
+	    Note that the "self" nametype cannot be used, since
+	    the name to be updated may differ from the key name.
+	    This option cannot be used with the <code class="option">-z</code> option.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-z <em class="replaceable"><code>zone</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+            (<span class="command"><strong>ddns-confgen</strong></span> only.)
+	    Generate configuration example to allow dynamic updates
+            of a zone:  The example <span class="command"><strong>named.conf</strong></span> text
+            shows how to set an update policy for the specified
+	    <em class="replaceable"><code>zone</code></em>
+	    using the "zonesub" nametype, allowing updates to
+            all subdomain names within that
+            <em class="replaceable"><code>zone</code></em>.
+	    This option cannot be used with the <code class="option">-s</code> option.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+</dl></div>
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="refsection">
+<a name="id-1.9"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2>
+
+    <p><span class="citerefentry">
+	<span class="refentrytitle">nsupdate</span>(1)
+      </span>,
+      <span class="citerefentry">
+	<span class="refentrytitle">named.conf</span>(5)
+      </span>,
+      <span class="citerefentry">
+	<span class="refentrytitle">named</span>(8)
+      </span>,
+      <em class="citetitle">BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual</em>.
+    </p>
+  </div>
+
+</div></body>
+</html>

bin/confgen/ddns-confgen.rst

@@ -1,88 +0,0 @@
-.. Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-..
-.. SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
-..
-.. This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
-.. License, v. 2.0.  If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
-.. file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
-..
-.. See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
-.. information regarding copyright ownership.
-
-.. highlight: console
-
-.. BEWARE: Do not forget to edit also tsig-keygen.rst!
-
-.. _man_ddns-confgen:
-
-ddns-confgen - TSIG key generation tool
----------------------------------------
-
-Synopsis
-~~~~~~~~
-:program:`ddns-confgen` [**-a** algorithm] [**-h**] [**-k** keyname] [**-q**] [**-s** name] [**-z** zone]
-
-Description
-~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-``ddns-confgen`` is an utility that generates keys for use in TSIG signing.
-The resulting keys can be used, for example, to secure dynamic DNS updates
-to a zone, or for the ``rndc`` command channel.
-
-The key name can specified using ``-k`` parameter and defaults to ``ddns-key``.
-The generated key is accompanied by configuration text and instructions that
-can be used with ``nsupdate`` and ``named`` when setting up dynamic DNS,
-including an example ``update-policy`` statement.
-(This usage is similar to the ``rndc-confgen`` command for setting up
-command-channel security.)
-
-Note that ``named`` itself can configure a local DDNS key for use with
-``nsupdate -l``; it does this when a zone is configured with
-``update-policy local;``. ``ddns-confgen`` is only needed when a more
-elaborate configuration is required: for instance, if ``nsupdate`` is to
-be used from a remote system.
-
-Options
-~~~~~~~
-
-``-a algorithm``
-   This option specifies the algorithm to use for the TSIG key. Available
-   choices are: hmac-md5, hmac-sha1, hmac-sha224, hmac-sha256, hmac-sha384,
-   and hmac-sha512. The default is hmac-sha256. Options are
-   case-insensitive, and the "hmac-" prefix may be omitted.
-
-``-h``
-   This option prints a short summary of options and arguments.
-
-``-k keyname``
-   This option specifies the key name of the DDNS authentication key. The
-   default is ``ddns-key`` when neither the ``-s`` nor ``-z`` option is
-   specified; otherwise, the default is ``ddns-key`` as a separate label
-   followed by the argument of the option, e.g., ``ddns-key.example.com.``
-   The key name must have the format of a valid domain name, consisting of
-   letters, digits, hyphens, and periods.
-
-``-q``
-   This option enables quiet mode, which prints only the key, with no
-   explanatory text or usage examples. This is essentially identical to
-   ``tsig-keygen``.
-
-``-s name``
-   This option generates a configuration example to allow dynamic updates
-   of a single hostname. The example ``named.conf`` text shows how to set
-   an update policy for the specified name using the "name" nametype. The
-   default key name is ``ddns-key.name``. Note that the "self" nametype
-   cannot be used, since the name to be updated may differ from the key
-   name. This option cannot be used with the ``-z`` option.
-
-``-z zone``
-   This option generates a configuration example to allow
-   dynamic updates of a zone. The example ``named.conf`` text shows how
-   to set an update policy for the specified zone using the "zonesub"
-   nametype, allowing updates to all subdomain names within that zone.
-   This option cannot be used with the ``-s`` option.
-
-See Also
-~~~~~~~~
-
-:manpage:`nsupdate(1)`, :manpage:`named.conf(5)`, :manpage:`named(8)`, BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual.

bin/confgen/include/confgen/os.h

@@ -1,11 +1,9 @@
 /*
  * Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
  *
- * SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
- *
  * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
  * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
- * file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+ * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
  *
  * See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
  * information regarding copyright ownership.

bin/confgen/keygen.c

@@ -1,11 +1,9 @@
 /*
  * Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
  *
- * SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
- *
  * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
  * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
- * file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+ * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
  *
  * See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
  * information regarding copyright ownership.

bin/confgen/keygen.h

@@ -1,11 +1,9 @@
 /*
  * Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
  *
- * SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
- *
  * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
  * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
- * file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+ * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
  *
  * See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
  * information regarding copyright ownership.

bin/confgen/rndc-confgen.8

@@ -0,0 +1,210 @@
+.\" Copyright (C) 2001, 2003-2005, 2007, 2009, 2013-2020 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.\" 
+.\" This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
+.\" License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+.\" file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+.\"
+.hy 0
+.ad l
+'\" t
+.\"     Title: rndc-confgen
+.\"    Author: 
+.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.78.1 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
+.\"      Date: 2013-03-14
+.\"    Manual: BIND9
+.\"    Source: ISC
+.\"  Language: English
+.\"
+.TH "RNDC\-CONFGEN" "8" "2013\-03\-14" "ISC" "BIND9"
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" * Define some portability stuff
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+.\" http://bugs.debian.org/507673
+.\" http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/groff/2009-02/msg00013.html
+.\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq
+.el       .ds Aq '
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" * set default formatting
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" disable hyphenation
+.nh
+.\" disable justification (adjust text to left margin only)
+.ad l
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.SH "NAME"
+rndc-confgen \- rndc key generation tool
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.HP \w'\fBrndc\-confgen\fR\ 'u
+\fBrndc\-confgen\fR [\fB\-a\fR] [\fB\-A\ \fR\fB\fIalgorithm\fR\fR] [\fB\-b\ \fR\fB\fIkeysize\fR\fR] [\fB\-c\ \fR\fB\fIkeyfile\fR\fR] [\fB\-h\fR] [\fB\-k\ \fR\fB\fIkeyname\fR\fR] [\fB\-p\ \fR\fB\fIport\fR\fR] [\fB\-s\ \fR\fB\fIaddress\fR\fR] [\fB\-t\ \fR\fB\fIchrootdir\fR\fR] [\fB\-u\ \fR\fB\fIuser\fR\fR]
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBrndc\-confgen\fR
+generates configuration files for
+\fBrndc\fR\&. It can be used as a convenient alternative to writing the
+rndc\&.conf
+file and the corresponding
+\fBcontrols\fR
+and
+\fBkey\fR
+statements in
+named\&.conf
+by hand\&. Alternatively, it can be run with the
+\fB\-a\fR
+option to set up a
+rndc\&.key
+file and avoid the need for a
+rndc\&.conf
+file and a
+\fBcontrols\fR
+statement altogether\&.
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.PP
+\-a
+.RS 4
+Do automatic
+\fBrndc\fR
+configuration\&. This creates a file
+rndc\&.key
+in
+/etc
+(or whatever
+\fIsysconfdir\fR
+was specified as when
+BIND
+was built) that is read by both
+\fBrndc\fR
+and
+\fBnamed\fR
+on startup\&. The
+rndc\&.key
+file defines a default command channel and authentication key allowing
+\fBrndc\fR
+to communicate with
+\fBnamed\fR
+on the local host with no further configuration\&.
+.sp
+Running
+\fBrndc\-confgen \-a\fR
+allows BIND 9 and
+\fBrndc\fR
+to be used as drop\-in replacements for BIND 8 and
+\fBndc\fR, with no changes to the existing BIND 8
+named\&.conf
+file\&.
+.sp
+If a more elaborate configuration than that generated by
+\fBrndc\-confgen \-a\fR
+is required, for example if rndc is to be used remotely, you should run
+\fBrndc\-confgen\fR
+without the
+\fB\-a\fR
+option and set up a
+rndc\&.conf
+and
+named\&.conf
+as directed\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-A \fIalgorithm\fR
+.RS 4
+Specifies the algorithm to use for the TSIG key\&. Available choices are: hmac\-md5, hmac\-sha1, hmac\-sha224, hmac\-sha256, hmac\-sha384 and hmac\-sha512\&. The default is hmac\-sha256\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-b \fIkeysize\fR
+.RS 4
+Specifies the size of the authentication key in bits\&. Must be between 1 and 512 bits; the default is the hash size\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-c \fIkeyfile\fR
+.RS 4
+Used with the
+\fB\-a\fR
+option to specify an alternate location for
+rndc\&.key\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-h
+.RS 4
+Prints a short summary of the options and arguments to
+\fBrndc\-confgen\fR\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-k \fIkeyname\fR
+.RS 4
+Specifies the key name of the rndc authentication key\&. This must be a valid domain name\&. The default is
+\fBrndc\-key\fR\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-p \fIport\fR
+.RS 4
+Specifies the command channel port where
+\fBnamed\fR
+listens for connections from
+\fBrndc\fR\&. The default is 953\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-s \fIaddress\fR
+.RS 4
+Specifies the IP address where
+\fBnamed\fR
+listens for command channel connections from
+\fBrndc\fR\&. The default is the loopback address 127\&.0\&.0\&.1\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-t \fIchrootdir\fR
+.RS 4
+Used with the
+\fB\-a\fR
+option to specify a directory where
+\fBnamed\fR
+will run chrooted\&. An additional copy of the
+rndc\&.key
+will be written relative to this directory so that it will be found by the chrooted
+\fBnamed\fR\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-u \fIuser\fR
+.RS 4
+Used with the
+\fB\-a\fR
+option to set the owner of the
+rndc\&.key
+file generated\&. If
+\fB\-t\fR
+is also specified only the file in the chroot area has its owner changed\&.
+.RE
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+.PP
+To allow
+\fBrndc\fR
+to be used with no manual configuration, run
+.PP
+\fBrndc\-confgen \-a\fR
+.PP
+To print a sample
+rndc\&.conf
+file and corresponding
+\fBcontrols\fR
+and
+\fBkey\fR
+statements to be manually inserted into
+named\&.conf, run
+.PP
+\fBrndc\-confgen\fR
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBrndc\fR(8),
+\fBrndc.conf\fR(5),
+\fBnamed\fR(8),
+BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual\&.
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+\fBInternet Systems Consortium, Inc\&.\fR
+.SH "COPYRIGHT"
+.br
+Copyright \(co 2001, 2003-2005, 2007, 2009, 2013-2020 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.br

bin/confgen/rndc-confgen.c

@@ -1,11 +1,9 @@
 /*
  * Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
  *
- * SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
- *
  * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
  * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
- * file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+ * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
  *
  * See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
  * information regarding copyright ownership.

bin/confgen/rndc-confgen.docbook

@@ -0,0 +1,271 @@
+<!--
+ - Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ -
+ - This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
+ - License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+ - file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+ -
+ - See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
+ - information regarding copyright ownership.
+-->
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<refentry xmlns:db="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="man.rndc-confgen">
+  <info>
+    <date>2013-03-14</date>
+  </info>
+  <refentryinfo>
+    <corpname>ISC</corpname>
+    <corpauthor>Internet Systems Consortium, Inc.</corpauthor>
+  </refentryinfo>
+
+  <refmeta>
+    <refentrytitle><application>rndc-confgen</application></refentrytitle>
+    <manvolnum>8</manvolnum>
+    <refmiscinfo>BIND9</refmiscinfo>
+  </refmeta>
+
+  <refnamediv>
+    <refname><application>rndc-confgen</application></refname>
+    <refpurpose>rndc key generation tool</refpurpose>
+  </refnamediv>
+
+  <docinfo>
+    <copyright>
+      <year>2001</year>
+      <year>2003</year>
+      <year>2004</year>
+      <year>2005</year>
+      <year>2007</year>
+      <year>2009</year>
+      <year>2013</year>
+      <year>2014</year>
+      <year>2015</year>
+      <year>2016</year>
+      <year>2017</year>
+      <year>2018</year>
+      <year>2019</year>
+      <year>2020</year>
+      <holder>Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")</holder>
+    </copyright>
+  </docinfo>
+
+  <refsynopsisdiv>
+    <cmdsynopsis sepchar=" ">
+      <command>rndc-confgen</command>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-a</option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-A <replaceable class="parameter">algorithm</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-b <replaceable class="parameter">keysize</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-c <replaceable class="parameter">keyfile</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-h</option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-k <replaceable class="parameter">keyname</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-p <replaceable class="parameter">port</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-s <replaceable class="parameter">address</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-t <replaceable class="parameter">chrootdir</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-u <replaceable class="parameter">user</replaceable></option></arg>
+    </cmdsynopsis>
+  </refsynopsisdiv>
+
+  <refsection><info><title>DESCRIPTION</title></info>
+
+    <para><command>rndc-confgen</command>
+      generates configuration files
+      for <command>rndc</command>.  It can be used as a
+      convenient alternative to writing the
+      <filename>rndc.conf</filename> file
+      and the corresponding <command>controls</command>
+      and <command>key</command>
+      statements in <filename>named.conf</filename> by hand.
+      Alternatively, it can be run with the <command>-a</command>
+      option to set up a <filename>rndc.key</filename> file and
+      avoid the need for a <filename>rndc.conf</filename> file
+      and a <command>controls</command> statement altogether.
+    </para>
+
+  </refsection>
+
+  <refsection><info><title>OPTIONS</title></info>
+
+
+    <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-a</term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            Do automatic <command>rndc</command> configuration.
+            This creates a file <filename>rndc.key</filename>
+            in <filename>/etc</filename> (or whatever
+            <varname>sysconfdir</varname>
+            was specified as when <acronym>BIND</acronym> was
+            built)
+            that is read by both <command>rndc</command>
+            and <command>named</command> on startup.  The
+            <filename>rndc.key</filename> file defines a default
+            command channel and authentication key allowing
+            <command>rndc</command> to communicate with
+            <command>named</command> on the local host
+            with no further configuration.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            Running <command>rndc-confgen -a</command> allows
+            BIND 9 and <command>rndc</command> to be used as
+            drop-in
+            replacements for BIND 8 and <command>ndc</command>,
+            with no changes to the existing BIND 8
+            <filename>named.conf</filename> file.
+          </para>
+          <para>
+            If a more elaborate configuration than that
+            generated by <command>rndc-confgen -a</command>
+            is required, for example if rndc is to be used remotely,
+            you should run <command>rndc-confgen</command> without
+            the
+            <command>-a</command> option and set up a
+            <filename>rndc.conf</filename> and
+            <filename>named.conf</filename>
+            as directed.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-A <replaceable class="parameter">algorithm</replaceable></term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            Specifies the algorithm to use for the TSIG key.  Available
+            choices are: hmac-md5, hmac-sha1, hmac-sha224, hmac-sha256,
+            hmac-sha384 and hmac-sha512.  The default is hmac-sha256.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-b <replaceable class="parameter">keysize</replaceable></term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            Specifies the size of the authentication key in bits.
+            Must be between 1 and 512 bits; the default is the
+            hash size.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-c <replaceable class="parameter">keyfile</replaceable></term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            Used with the <command>-a</command> option to specify
+            an alternate location for <filename>rndc.key</filename>.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-h</term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            Prints a short summary of the options and arguments to
+            <command>rndc-confgen</command>.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-k <replaceable class="parameter">keyname</replaceable></term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            Specifies the key name of the rndc authentication key.
+            This must be a valid domain name.
+            The default is <constant>rndc-key</constant>.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-p <replaceable class="parameter">port</replaceable></term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            Specifies the command channel port where <command>named</command>
+            listens for connections from <command>rndc</command>.
+            The default is 953.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-s <replaceable class="parameter">address</replaceable></term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            Specifies the IP address where <command>named</command>
+            listens for command channel connections from
+            <command>rndc</command>.  The default is the loopback
+            address 127.0.0.1.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-t <replaceable class="parameter">chrootdir</replaceable></term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            Used with the <command>-a</command> option to specify
+            a directory where <command>named</command> will run
+            chrooted.  An additional copy of the <filename>rndc.key</filename>
+            will be written relative to this directory so that
+            it will be found by the chrooted <command>named</command>.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+        <term>-u <replaceable class="parameter">user</replaceable></term>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>
+            Used with the <command>-a</command> option to set the
+            owner
+            of the <filename>rndc.key</filename> file generated.
+            If
+            <command>-t</command> is also specified only the file
+            in
+            the chroot area has its owner changed.
+          </para>
+        </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+    </variablelist>
+  </refsection>
+
+  <refsection><info><title>EXAMPLES</title></info>
+
+    <para>
+      To allow <command>rndc</command> to be used with
+      no manual configuration, run
+    </para>
+    <para><userinput>rndc-confgen -a</userinput>
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      To print a sample <filename>rndc.conf</filename> file and
+      corresponding <command>controls</command> and <command>key</command>
+      statements to be manually inserted into <filename>named.conf</filename>,
+      run
+    </para>
+    <para><userinput>rndc-confgen</userinput>
+    </para>
+  </refsection>
+
+  <refsection><info><title>SEE ALSO</title></info>
+
+    <para><citerefentry>
+        <refentrytitle>rndc</refentrytitle><manvolnum>8</manvolnum>
+      </citerefentry>,
+      <citerefentry>
+        <refentrytitle>rndc.conf</refentrytitle><manvolnum>5</manvolnum>
+      </citerefentry>,
+      <citerefentry>
+        <refentrytitle>named</refentrytitle><manvolnum>8</manvolnum>
+      </citerefentry>,
+      <citetitle>BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual</citetitle>.
+    </para>
+  </refsection>
+
+</refentry>

bin/confgen/rndc-confgen.html

@@ -0,0 +1,226 @@
+<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/loose.dtd">
+<!--
+ - Copyright (C) 2001, 2003-2005, 2007, 2009, 2013-2020 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ - 
+ - This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
+ - License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+ - file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+-->
+<html lang="en">
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1">
+<title>rndc-confgen</title>
+<meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.78.1">
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry">
+<a name="man.rndc-confgen"></a><div class="titlepage"></div>
+  
+  
+
+  
+
+  <div class="refnamediv">
+<h2>Name</h2>
+<p>
+    <span class="application">rndc-confgen</span>
+     &#8212; rndc key generation tool
+  </p>
+</div>
+
+  
+
+  <div class="refsynopsisdiv">
+<h2>Synopsis</h2>
+    <div class="cmdsynopsis"><p>
+      <code class="command">rndc-confgen</code> 
+       [<code class="option">-a</code>]
+       [<code class="option">-A <em class="replaceable"><code>algorithm</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-b <em class="replaceable"><code>keysize</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-c <em class="replaceable"><code>keyfile</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-h</code>]
+       [<code class="option">-k <em class="replaceable"><code>keyname</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-p <em class="replaceable"><code>port</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-s <em class="replaceable"><code>address</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-t <em class="replaceable"><code>chrootdir</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-u <em class="replaceable"><code>user</code></em></code>]
+    </p></div>
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="refsection">
+<a name="id-1.7"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2>
+
+    <p><span class="command"><strong>rndc-confgen</strong></span>
+      generates configuration files
+      for <span class="command"><strong>rndc</strong></span>.  It can be used as a
+      convenient alternative to writing the
+      <code class="filename">rndc.conf</code> file
+      and the corresponding <span class="command"><strong>controls</strong></span>
+      and <span class="command"><strong>key</strong></span>
+      statements in <code class="filename">named.conf</code> by hand.
+      Alternatively, it can be run with the <span class="command"><strong>-a</strong></span>
+      option to set up a <code class="filename">rndc.key</code> file and
+      avoid the need for a <code class="filename">rndc.conf</code> file
+      and a <span class="command"><strong>controls</strong></span> statement altogether.
+    </p>
+
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="refsection">
+<a name="id-1.8"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2>
+
+
+    <div class="variablelist"><dl class="variablelist">
+<dt><span class="term">-a</span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            Do automatic <span class="command"><strong>rndc</strong></span> configuration.
+            This creates a file <code class="filename">rndc.key</code>
+            in <code class="filename">/etc</code> (or whatever
+            <code class="varname">sysconfdir</code>
+            was specified as when <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> was
+            built)
+            that is read by both <span class="command"><strong>rndc</strong></span>
+            and <span class="command"><strong>named</strong></span> on startup.  The
+            <code class="filename">rndc.key</code> file defines a default
+            command channel and authentication key allowing
+            <span class="command"><strong>rndc</strong></span> to communicate with
+            <span class="command"><strong>named</strong></span> on the local host
+            with no further configuration.
+          </p>
+          <p>
+            Running <span class="command"><strong>rndc-confgen -a</strong></span> allows
+            BIND 9 and <span class="command"><strong>rndc</strong></span> to be used as
+            drop-in
+            replacements for BIND 8 and <span class="command"><strong>ndc</strong></span>,
+            with no changes to the existing BIND 8
+            <code class="filename">named.conf</code> file.
+          </p>
+          <p>
+            If a more elaborate configuration than that
+            generated by <span class="command"><strong>rndc-confgen -a</strong></span>
+            is required, for example if rndc is to be used remotely,
+            you should run <span class="command"><strong>rndc-confgen</strong></span> without
+            the
+            <span class="command"><strong>-a</strong></span> option and set up a
+            <code class="filename">rndc.conf</code> and
+            <code class="filename">named.conf</code>
+            as directed.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-A <em class="replaceable"><code>algorithm</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            Specifies the algorithm to use for the TSIG key.  Available
+            choices are: hmac-md5, hmac-sha1, hmac-sha224, hmac-sha256,
+            hmac-sha384 and hmac-sha512.  The default is hmac-sha256.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-b <em class="replaceable"><code>keysize</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            Specifies the size of the authentication key in bits.
+            Must be between 1 and 512 bits; the default is the
+            hash size.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-c <em class="replaceable"><code>keyfile</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            Used with the <span class="command"><strong>-a</strong></span> option to specify
+            an alternate location for <code class="filename">rndc.key</code>.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-h</span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            Prints a short summary of the options and arguments to
+            <span class="command"><strong>rndc-confgen</strong></span>.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-k <em class="replaceable"><code>keyname</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            Specifies the key name of the rndc authentication key.
+            This must be a valid domain name.
+            The default is <code class="constant">rndc-key</code>.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-p <em class="replaceable"><code>port</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            Specifies the command channel port where <span class="command"><strong>named</strong></span>
+            listens for connections from <span class="command"><strong>rndc</strong></span>.
+            The default is 953.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-s <em class="replaceable"><code>address</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            Specifies the IP address where <span class="command"><strong>named</strong></span>
+            listens for command channel connections from
+            <span class="command"><strong>rndc</strong></span>.  The default is the loopback
+            address 127.0.0.1.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-t <em class="replaceable"><code>chrootdir</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            Used with the <span class="command"><strong>-a</strong></span> option to specify
+            a directory where <span class="command"><strong>named</strong></span> will run
+            chrooted.  An additional copy of the <code class="filename">rndc.key</code>
+            will be written relative to this directory so that
+            it will be found by the chrooted <span class="command"><strong>named</strong></span>.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-u <em class="replaceable"><code>user</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+          <p>
+            Used with the <span class="command"><strong>-a</strong></span> option to set the
+            owner
+            of the <code class="filename">rndc.key</code> file generated.
+            If
+            <span class="command"><strong>-t</strong></span> is also specified only the file
+            in
+            the chroot area has its owner changed.
+          </p>
+        </dd>
+</dl></div>
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="refsection">
+<a name="id-1.9"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2>
+
+    <p>
+      To allow <span class="command"><strong>rndc</strong></span> to be used with
+      no manual configuration, run
+    </p>
+    <p><strong class="userinput"><code>rndc-confgen -a</code></strong>
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      To print a sample <code class="filename">rndc.conf</code> file and
+      corresponding <span class="command"><strong>controls</strong></span> and <span class="command"><strong>key</strong></span>
+      statements to be manually inserted into <code class="filename">named.conf</code>,
+      run
+    </p>
+    <p><strong class="userinput"><code>rndc-confgen</code></strong>
+    </p>
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="refsection">
+<a name="id-1.10"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2>
+
+    <p><span class="citerefentry">
+        <span class="refentrytitle">rndc</span>(8)
+      </span>,
+      <span class="citerefentry">
+        <span class="refentrytitle">rndc.conf</span>(5)
+      </span>,
+      <span class="citerefentry">
+        <span class="refentrytitle">named</span>(8)
+      </span>,
+      <em class="citetitle">BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual</em>.
+    </p>
+  </div>
+
+</div></body>
+</html>

bin/confgen/rndc-confgen.rst

@@ -1,106 +0,0 @@
-.. Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-..
-.. SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
-..
-.. This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
-.. License, v. 2.0.  If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
-.. file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
-..
-.. See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
-.. information regarding copyright ownership.
-
-.. highlight: console
-
-.. _man_rndc-confgen:
-
-rndc-confgen - rndc key generation tool
----------------------------------------
-
-Synopsis
-~~~~~~~~
-
-:program:`rndc-confgen` [**-a**] [**-A** algorithm] [**-b** keysize] [**-c** keyfile] [**-h**] [**-k** keyname] [**-p** port] [**-s** address] [**-t** chrootdir] [**-u** user]
-
-Description
-~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-``rndc-confgen`` generates configuration files for ``rndc``. It can be
-used as a convenient alternative to writing the ``rndc.conf`` file and
-the corresponding ``controls`` and ``key`` statements in ``named.conf``
-by hand. Alternatively, it can be run with the ``-a`` option to set up a
-``rndc.key`` file and avoid the need for a ``rndc.conf`` file and a
-``controls`` statement altogether.
-
-Options
-~~~~~~~
-
-``-a``
-   This option sets automatic ``rndc`` configuration, which creates a file ``rndc.key``
-   in ``/etc`` (or a different ``sysconfdir`` specified when BIND
-   was built) that is read by both ``rndc`` and ``named`` on startup.
-   The ``rndc.key`` file defines a default command channel and
-   authentication key allowing ``rndc`` to communicate with ``named`` on
-   the local host with no further configuration.
-
-   If a more elaborate configuration than that generated by
-   ``rndc-confgen -a`` is required, for example if rndc is to be used
-   remotely, run ``rndc-confgen`` without the ``-a`` option
-   and set up ``rndc.conf`` and ``named.conf`` as directed.
-
-``-A algorithm``
-   This option specifies the algorithm to use for the TSIG key. Available choices
-   are: hmac-md5, hmac-sha1, hmac-sha224, hmac-sha256, hmac-sha384, and
-   hmac-sha512. The default is hmac-sha256.
-
-``-b keysize``
-   This option specifies the size of the authentication key in bits. The size must be between
-   1 and 512 bits; the default is the hash size.
-
-``-c keyfile``
-   This option is used with the ``-a`` option to specify an alternate location for
-   ``rndc.key``.
-
-``-h``
-   This option prints a short summary of the options and arguments to
-   ``rndc-confgen``.
-
-``-k keyname``
-   This option specifies the key name of the ``rndc`` authentication key. This must be a
-   valid domain name. The default is ``rndc-key``.
-
-``-p port``
-   This option specifies the command channel port where ``named`` listens for
-   connections from ``rndc``. The default is 953.
-
-``-s address``
-   This option specifies the IP address where ``named`` listens for command-channel
-   connections from ``rndc``. The default is the loopback address
-   127.0.0.1.
-
-``-t chrootdir``
-   This option is used with the ``-a`` option to specify a directory where ``named``
-   runs chrooted. An additional copy of the ``rndc.key`` is
-   written relative to this directory, so that it is found by the
-   chrooted ``named``.
-
-``-u user``
-   This option is used with the ``-a`` option to set the owner of the generated ``rndc.key`` file.
-   If ``-t`` is also specified, only the file in the chroot
-   area has its owner changed.
-
-Examples
-~~~~~~~~
-
-To allow ``rndc`` to be used with no manual configuration, run:
-
-``rndc-confgen -a``
-
-To print a sample ``rndc.conf`` file and the corresponding ``controls`` and
-``key`` statements to be manually inserted into ``named.conf``, run:
-
-``rndc-confgen``
-
-See Also
-~~~~~~~~
-
-:manpage:`rndc(8)`, :manpage:`rndc.conf(5)`, :manpage:`named(8)`, BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual.

bin/confgen/tsig-keygen.rst

@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
-.. Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-..
-.. SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
-..
-.. This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
-.. License, v. 2.0.  If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
-.. file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
-..
-.. See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
-.. information regarding copyright ownership.
-
-.. highlight: console
-
-.. BEWARE: Do not forget to edit also ddns-confgen.rst!
-
-.. _man_tsig-keygen:
-
-tsig-keygen - TSIG key generation tool
---------------------------------------
-
-Synopsis
-~~~~~~~~
-:program:`tsig-keygen` [**-a** algorithm] [**-h**] [name]
-
-Description
-~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-``tsig-keygen`` is an utility that generates keys for use in TSIG signing.
-The resulting keys can be used, for example, to secure dynamic DNS updates
-to a zone, or for the ``rndc`` command channel.
-
-A domain name can be specified on the command line to be used as the name
-of the generated key. If no name is specified, the default is ``tsig-key``.
-
-Options
-~~~~~~~
-
-``-a algorithm``
-   This option specifies the algorithm to use for the TSIG key. Available
-   choices are: hmac-md5, hmac-sha1, hmac-sha224, hmac-sha256, hmac-sha384,
-   and hmac-sha512. The default is hmac-sha256. Options are
-   case-insensitive, and the "hmac-" prefix may be omitted.
-
-``-h``
-   This option prints a short summary of options and arguments.
-
-See Also
-~~~~~~~~
-
-:manpage:`nsupdate(1)`, :manpage:`named.conf(5)`, :manpage:`named(8)`, BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual.

bin/confgen/unix/Makefile.in

@@ -1,10 +1,8 @@
 # Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
 #
-# SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
-#
 # This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
-# License, v. 2.0.  If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
-# file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+# License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+# file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
 #
 # See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
 # information regarding copyright ownership.

bin/confgen/unix/os.c

@@ -1,11 +1,9 @@
 /*
  * Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
  *
- * SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
- *
  * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
  * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
- * file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+ * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
  *
  * See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
  * information regarding copyright ownership.

bin/confgen/util.c

@@ -1,11 +1,9 @@
 /*
  * Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
  *
- * SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
- *
  * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
  * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
- * file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+ * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
  *
  * See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
  * information regarding copyright ownership.

bin/confgen/util.h

@@ -1,11 +1,9 @@
 /*
  * Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
  *
- * SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
- *
  * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
  * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
- * file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+ * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
  *
  * See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
  * information regarding copyright ownership.

bin/confgen/win32/confgentool.vcxproj.in

@@ -44,20 +44,17 @@
     <LinkIncremental>true</LinkIncremental>
     <OutDir>.\$(Configuration)\</OutDir>
     <IntDir>.\$(Configuration)\</IntDir>
-    <IntDirSharingDetected>None</IntDirSharingDetected>
   </PropertyGroup>
   <PropertyGroup Condition="'$(Configuration)|$(Platform)'=='Release|@PLATFORM@'">
     <LinkIncremental>false</LinkIncremental>
     <OutDir>.\$(Configuration)\</OutDir>
     <IntDir>.\$(Configuration)\</IntDir>
-    <IntDirSharingDetected>None</IntDirSharingDetected>
   </PropertyGroup>
   <ItemDefinitionGroup Condition="'$(Configuration)|$(Platform)'=='Debug|@PLATFORM@'">
     <ClCompile>
       <PrecompiledHeader>
       </PrecompiledHeader>
-      <WarningLevel>Level4</WarningLevel>
-      <TreatWarningAsError>false</TreatWarningAsError>
+      <WarningLevel>Level3</WarningLevel>
       <Optimization>Disabled</Optimization>
       <PreprocessorDefinitions>WIN32;_DEBUG;_CONSOLE;%(PreprocessorDefinitions)</PreprocessorDefinitions>
       <FunctionLevelLinking>true</FunctionLevelLinking>
@@ -77,8 +74,7 @@
   </ItemDefinitionGroup>
   <ItemDefinitionGroup Condition="'$(Configuration)|$(Platform)'=='Release|@PLATFORM@'">
     <ClCompile>
-      <WarningLevel>Level1</WarningLevel>
-      <TreatWarningAsError>true</TreatWarningAsError>
+      <WarningLevel>Level3</WarningLevel>
       <PrecompiledHeader>
       </PrecompiledHeader>
       <Optimization>MaxSpeed</Optimization>

bin/confgen/win32/ddnsconfgen.vcxproj.in

@@ -44,22 +44,19 @@
     <LinkIncremental>true</LinkIncremental>
     <OutDir>..\..\..\Build\$(Configuration)\</OutDir>
     <IntDir>.\$(Configuration)\</IntDir>
-    <IntDirSharingDetected>None</IntDirSharingDetected>
     <TargetName>ddns-confgen</TargetName>
   </PropertyGroup>
   <PropertyGroup Condition="'$(Configuration)|$(Platform)'=='Release|@PLATFORM@'">
     <LinkIncremental>false</LinkIncremental>
     <OutDir>..\..\..\Build\$(Configuration)\</OutDir>
     <IntDir>.\$(Configuration)\</IntDir>
-    <IntDirSharingDetected>None</IntDirSharingDetected>
     <TargetName>ddns-confgen</TargetName>
   </PropertyGroup>
   <ItemDefinitionGroup Condition="'$(Configuration)|$(Platform)'=='Debug|@PLATFORM@'">
     <ClCompile>
       <PrecompiledHeader>
       </PrecompiledHeader>
-      <WarningLevel>Level4</WarningLevel>
-      <TreatWarningAsError>false</TreatWarningAsError>
+      <WarningLevel>Level3</WarningLevel>
       <Optimization>Disabled</Optimization>
       <PreprocessorDefinitions>WIN32;_DEBUG;_CONSOLE;%(PreprocessorDefinitions)</PreprocessorDefinitions>
       <FunctionLevelLinking>true</FunctionLevelLinking>
@@ -77,7 +74,7 @@
       <GenerateDebugInformation>true</GenerateDebugInformation>
       <OutputFile>..\..\..\Build\$(Configuration)\$(TargetName)$(TargetExt)</OutputFile>
       <AdditionalLibraryDirectories>$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\isc\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\dns\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\isccfg\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\isccc\win32\$(Configuration);%(AdditionalLibraryDirectories)</AdditionalLibraryDirectories>
-      <AdditionalDependencies>@OPENSSL_LIBCRYPTO@@OPENSSL_LIBSSL@confgentool.lib;libisc.lib;libdns.lib;libisccfg.lib;libisccc.lib;ws2_32.lib;%(AdditionalDependencies)</AdditionalDependencies>
+      <AdditionalDependencies>@OPENSSL_LIB@confgentool.lib;libisc.lib;libdns.lib;libisccfg.lib;libisccc.lib;ws2_32.lib;%(AdditionalDependencies)</AdditionalDependencies>
     </Link>
     <PostBuildEvent>
       <Command>cd ..\..\..\Build\$(Configuration)
@@ -88,8 +85,7 @@ copy /Y ddns-confgen.ilk tsig-keygen.ilk
   </ItemDefinitionGroup>
   <ItemDefinitionGroup Condition="'$(Configuration)|$(Platform)'=='Release|@PLATFORM@'">
     <ClCompile>
-      <WarningLevel>Level1</WarningLevel>
-      <TreatWarningAsError>true</TreatWarningAsError>
+      <WarningLevel>Level3</WarningLevel>
       <PrecompiledHeader>
       </PrecompiledHeader>
       <Optimization>MaxSpeed</Optimization>
@@ -115,7 +111,7 @@ copy /Y ddns-confgen.ilk tsig-keygen.ilk
       <OutputFile>..\..\..\Build\$(Configuration)\$(TargetName)$(TargetExt)</OutputFile>
       <LinkTimeCodeGeneration>Default</LinkTimeCodeGeneration>
       <AdditionalLibraryDirectories>$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\isc\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\dns\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\isccfg\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\isccc\win32\$(Configuration);%(AdditionalLibraryDirectories)</AdditionalLibraryDirectories>
-      <AdditionalDependencies>@OPENSSL_LIBCRYPTO@@OPENSSL_LIBSSL@confgentool.lib;libisc.lib;libdns.lib;libisccfg.lib;libisccc.lib;ws2_32.lib;%(AdditionalDependencies)</AdditionalDependencies>
+      <AdditionalDependencies>@OPENSSL_LIB@confgentool.lib;libisc.lib;libdns.lib;libisccfg.lib;libisccc.lib;ws2_32.lib;%(AdditionalDependencies)</AdditionalDependencies>
     </Link>
     <PostBuildEvent>
       <Command>cd ..\..\..\Build\$(Configuration)

bin/confgen/win32/os.c

@@ -1,11 +1,9 @@
 /*
  * Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
  *
- * SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
- *
  * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
- * License, v. 2.0.  If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
- * file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+ * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+ * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
  *
  * See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
  * information regarding copyright ownership.

bin/confgen/win32/rndcconfgen.vcxproj.in

@@ -44,22 +44,19 @@
     <LinkIncremental>true</LinkIncremental>
     <OutDir>..\..\..\Build\$(Configuration)\</OutDir>
     <IntDir>.\$(Configuration)\</IntDir>
-    <IntDirSharingDetected>None</IntDirSharingDetected>
     <TargetName>rndc-confgen</TargetName>
   </PropertyGroup>
   <PropertyGroup Condition="'$(Configuration)|$(Platform)'=='Release|@PLATFORM@'">
     <LinkIncremental>false</LinkIncremental>
     <OutDir>..\..\..\Build\$(Configuration)\</OutDir>
     <IntDir>.\$(Configuration)\</IntDir>
-    <IntDirSharingDetected>None</IntDirSharingDetected>
     <TargetName>rndc-confgen</TargetName>
   </PropertyGroup>
   <ItemDefinitionGroup Condition="'$(Configuration)|$(Platform)'=='Debug|@PLATFORM@'">
     <ClCompile>
       <PrecompiledHeader>
       </PrecompiledHeader>
-      <WarningLevel>Level4</WarningLevel>
-      <TreatWarningAsError>false</TreatWarningAsError>
+      <WarningLevel>Level3</WarningLevel>
       <Optimization>Disabled</Optimization>
       <PreprocessorDefinitions>WIN32;_DEBUG;_CONSOLE;%(PreprocessorDefinitions)</PreprocessorDefinitions>
       <FunctionLevelLinking>true</FunctionLevelLinking>
@@ -77,13 +74,12 @@
       <GenerateDebugInformation>true</GenerateDebugInformation>
       <OutputFile>..\..\..\Build\$(Configuration)\$(TargetName)$(TargetExt)</OutputFile>
       <AdditionalLibraryDirectories>$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\isc\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\dns\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\isccfg\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\isccc\win32\$(Configuration);%(AdditionalLibraryDirectories)</AdditionalLibraryDirectories>
-      <AdditionalDependencies>@OPENSSL_LIBCRYPTO@@OPENSSL_LIBSSL@confgentool.lib;libisc.lib;libdns.lib;libisccfg.lib;libisccc.lib;ws2_32.lib;%(AdditionalDependencies)</AdditionalDependencies>
+      <AdditionalDependencies>@OPENSSL_LIB@confgentool.lib;libisc.lib;libdns.lib;libisccfg.lib;libisccc.lib;ws2_32.lib;%(AdditionalDependencies)</AdditionalDependencies>
     </Link>
   </ItemDefinitionGroup>
   <ItemDefinitionGroup Condition="'$(Configuration)|$(Platform)'=='Release|@PLATFORM@'">
     <ClCompile>
-      <WarningLevel>Level1</WarningLevel>
-      <TreatWarningAsError>true</TreatWarningAsError>
+      <WarningLevel>Level3</WarningLevel>
       <PrecompiledHeader>
       </PrecompiledHeader>
       <Optimization>MaxSpeed</Optimization>
@@ -109,7 +105,7 @@
       <OutputFile>..\..\..\Build\$(Configuration)\$(TargetName)$(TargetExt)</OutputFile>
       <LinkTimeCodeGeneration>Default</LinkTimeCodeGeneration>
       <AdditionalLibraryDirectories>$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\isc\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\dns\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\isccfg\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\isccc\win32\$(Configuration);%(AdditionalLibraryDirectories)</AdditionalLibraryDirectories>
-      <AdditionalDependencies>@OPENSSL_LIBCRYPTO@@OPENSSL_LIBSSL@confgentool.lib;libisc.lib;libdns.lib;libisccfg.lib;libisccc.lib;ws2_32.lib;%(AdditionalDependencies)</AdditionalDependencies>
+      <AdditionalDependencies>@OPENSSL_LIB@confgentool.lib;libisc.lib;libdns.lib;libisccfg.lib;libisccc.lib;ws2_32.lib;%(AdditionalDependencies)</AdditionalDependencies>
     </Link>
   </ItemDefinitionGroup>
   <ItemGroup>

bin/delv/Makefile.in

@@ -1,10 +1,8 @@
 # Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
 #
-# SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
-#
 # This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
-# License, v. 2.0.  If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
-# file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+# License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+# file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
 #
 # See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
 # information regarding copyright ownership.
@@ -26,9 +24,8 @@ CDEFINES =	-DVERSION=\"${VERSION}\" \
 CWARNINGS =
 
 ISCCFGLIBS =	../../lib/isccfg/libisccfg.@A@
-DNSLIBS =	../../lib/dns/libdns.@A@ @NO_LIBTOOL_DNSLIBS@
-ISCNOSYMLIBS =	../../lib/isc/libisc-nosymtbl.@A@ @NO_LIBTOOL_ISCLIBS@
-ISCLIBS =	../../lib/isc/libisc.@A@ @NO_LIBTOOL_ISCLIBS@
+DNSLIBS =	../../lib/dns/libdns.@A@ ${MAXMINDDB_LIBS} @DNS_CRYPTO_LIBS@
+ISCLIBS =	../../lib/isc/libisc.@A@ ${OPENSSL_LIBS} ${JSON_C_LIBS} ${LIBXML2_LIBS} ${ZLIB_LIBS}
 IRSLIBS =	../../lib/irs/libirs.@A@
 
 ISCCFGDEPLIBS =	../../lib/isccfg/libisccfg.@A@
@@ -39,7 +36,6 @@ IRSDEPLIBS =	../../lib/irs/libirs.@A@
 DEPLIBS =	${DNSDEPLIBS} ${IRSDEPLIBS} ${ISCCFGDEPLIBS} ${ISCDEPLIBS}
 
 LIBS =		${DNSLIBS} ${IRSLIBS} ${ISCCFGLIBS} ${ISCLIBS} @LIBS@
-NOSYMLIBS =	${DNSLIBS} ${IRSLIBS} ${ISCCFGLIBS} ${ISCNOSYMLIBS} @LIBS@
 
 SUBDIRS =
 
@@ -49,6 +45,12 @@ OBJS =		delv.@O@
 
 SRCS =		delv.c
 
+MANPAGES =	delv.1
+
+HTMLPAGES =	delv.html
+
+MANOBJS =	${MANPAGES} ${HTMLPAGES}
+
 @BIND9_MAKE_RULES@
 
 delv@EXEEXT@: delv.@O@ ${DEPLIBS}
@@ -58,13 +60,21 @@ delv@EXEEXT@: delv.@O@ ${DEPLIBS}
 
 installdirs:
 	$(SHELL) ${top_srcdir}/mkinstalldirs ${DESTDIR}${bindir}
+	$(SHELL) ${top_srcdir}/mkinstalldirs ${DESTDIR}${mandir}/man1
 
 install:: delv@EXEEXT@ installdirs
 	${LIBTOOL_MODE_INSTALL} ${INSTALL_PROGRAM} \
 		delv@EXEEXT@ ${DESTDIR}${bindir}
+	${INSTALL_DATA} ${srcdir}/delv.1 ${DESTDIR}${mandir}/man1
 
 uninstall::
+	rm -f ${DESTDIR}${mandir}/man1/delv.1
 	${LIBTOOL_MODE_UNINSTALL} rm -f ${DESTDIR}${bindir}/delv@EXEEXT@
 
+doc man:: ${MANOBJS}
+
+docclean manclean maintainer-clean::
+	rm -f ${MANOBJS}
+
 clean distclean maintainer-clean::
 	rm -f ${TARGETS}

bin/delv/delv.1

@@ -0,0 +1,437 @@
+.\" Copyright (C) 2014-2020 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.\" 
+.\" This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
+.\" License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+.\" file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+.\"
+.hy 0
+.ad l
+'\" t
+.\"     Title: delv
+.\"    Author: 
+.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.78.1 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
+.\"      Date: 2014-04-23
+.\"    Manual: BIND9
+.\"    Source: ISC
+.\"  Language: English
+.\"
+.TH "DELV" "1" "2014\-04\-23" "ISC" "BIND9"
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" * Define some portability stuff
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+.\" http://bugs.debian.org/507673
+.\" http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/groff/2009-02/msg00013.html
+.\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq
+.el       .ds Aq '
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" * set default formatting
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" disable hyphenation
+.nh
+.\" disable justification (adjust text to left margin only)
+.ad l
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.SH "NAME"
+delv \- DNS lookup and validation utility
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.HP \w'\fBdelv\fR\ 'u
+\fBdelv\fR [@server] [[\fB\-4\fR] | [\fB\-6\fR]] [\fB\-a\ \fR\fB\fIanchor\-file\fR\fR] [\fB\-b\ \fR\fB\fIaddress\fR\fR] [\fB\-c\ \fR\fB\fIclass\fR\fR] [\fB\-d\ \fR\fB\fIlevel\fR\fR] [\fB\-i\fR] [\fB\-m\fR] [\fB\-p\ \fR\fB\fIport#\fR\fR] [\fB\-q\ \fR\fB\fIname\fR\fR] [\fB\-t\ \fR\fB\fItype\fR\fR] [\fB\-x\ \fR\fB\fIaddr\fR\fR] [name] [type] [class] [queryopt...]
+.HP \w'\fBdelv\fR\ 'u
+\fBdelv\fR [\fB\-h\fR]
+.HP \w'\fBdelv\fR\ 'u
+\fBdelv\fR [\fB\-v\fR]
+.HP \w'\fBdelv\fR\ 'u
+\fBdelv\fR [queryopt...] [query...]
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBdelv\fR
+is a tool for sending DNS queries and validating the results, using the same internal resolver and validator logic as
+\fBnamed\fR\&.
+.PP
+\fBdelv\fR
+will send to a specified name server all queries needed to fetch and validate the requested data; this includes the original requested query, subsequent queries to follow CNAME or DNAME chains, and queries for DNSKEY and DS records to establish a chain of trust for DNSSEC validation\&. It does not perform iterative resolution, but simulates the behavior of a name server configured for DNSSEC validating and forwarding\&.
+.PP
+By default, responses are validated using built\-in DNSSEC trust anchor for the root zone ("\&.")\&. Records returned by
+\fBdelv\fR
+are either fully validated or were not signed\&. If validation fails, an explanation of the failure is included in the output; the validation process can be traced in detail\&. Because
+\fBdelv\fR
+does not rely on an external server to carry out validation, it can be used to check the validity of DNS responses in environments where local name servers may not be trustworthy\&.
+.PP
+Unless it is told to query a specific name server,
+\fBdelv\fR
+will try each of the servers listed in
+/etc/resolv\&.conf\&. If no usable server addresses are found,
+\fBdelv\fR
+will send queries to the localhost addresses (127\&.0\&.0\&.1 for IPv4, ::1 for IPv6)\&.
+.PP
+When no command line arguments or options are given,
+\fBdelv\fR
+will perform an NS query for "\&." (the root zone)\&.
+.SH "SIMPLE USAGE"
+.PP
+A typical invocation of
+\fBdelv\fR
+looks like:
+.sp
+.if n \{\
+.RS 4
+.\}
+.nf
+ delv @server name type 
+.fi
+.if n \{\
+.RE
+.\}
+.sp
+where:
+.PP
+\fBserver\fR
+.RS 4
+is the name or IP address of the name server to query\&. This can be an IPv4 address in dotted\-decimal notation or an IPv6 address in colon\-delimited notation\&. When the supplied
+\fIserver\fR
+argument is a hostname,
+\fBdelv\fR
+resolves that name before querying that name server (note, however, that this initial lookup is
+\fInot\fR
+validated by DNSSEC)\&.
+.sp
+If no
+\fIserver\fR
+argument is provided,
+\fBdelv\fR
+consults
+/etc/resolv\&.conf; if an address is found there, it queries the name server at that address\&. If either of the
+\fB\-4\fR
+or
+\fB\-6\fR
+options are in use, then only addresses for the corresponding transport will be tried\&. If no usable addresses are found,
+\fBdelv\fR
+will send queries to the localhost addresses (127\&.0\&.0\&.1 for IPv4, ::1 for IPv6)\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fBname\fR
+.RS 4
+is the domain name to be looked up\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fBtype\fR
+.RS 4
+indicates what type of query is required \(em ANY, A, MX, etc\&.
+\fItype\fR
+can be any valid query type\&. If no
+\fItype\fR
+argument is supplied,
+\fBdelv\fR
+will perform a lookup for an A record\&.
+.RE
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.PP
+\-a \fIanchor\-file\fR
+.RS 4
+Specifies a file from which to read DNSSEC trust anchors\&. The default is
+/etc/bind\&.keys, which is included with
+BIND
+9 and contains one or more trust anchors for the root zone ("\&.")\&.
+.sp
+Keys that do not match the root zone name are ignored\&. An alternate key name can be specified using the
+\fB+root=NAME\fR
+options\&.
+.sp
+Note: When reading the trust anchor file,
+\fBdelv\fR
+treats
+\fBtrust\-anchors\fR\fBinitial\-key\fR
+and
+\fBstatic\-key\fR
+entries identically\&. That is, even if a key is configured with
+\fBinitial\-key\fR, indicating that it is meant to be used only as an initializing key for RFC 5011 key maintenance, it is still treated by
+\fBdelv\fR
+as if it had been configured as a
+\fBstatic\-key\fR\&.
+\fBdelv\fR
+does not consult the managed keys database maintained by
+\fBnamed\fR\&. This means that if either of the keys in
+/etc/bind\&.keys
+is revoked and rolled over, it will be necessary to update
+/etc/bind\&.keys
+to use DNSSEC validation in
+\fBdelv\fR\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-b \fIaddress\fR
+.RS 4
+Sets the source IP address of the query to
+\fIaddress\fR\&. This must be a valid address on one of the host\*(Aqs network interfaces or "0\&.0\&.0\&.0" or "::"\&. An optional source port may be specified by appending "#<port>"
+.RE
+.PP
+\-c \fIclass\fR
+.RS 4
+Sets the query class for the requested data\&. Currently, only class "IN" is supported in
+\fBdelv\fR
+and any other value is ignored\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-d \fIlevel\fR
+.RS 4
+Set the systemwide debug level to
+\fBlevel\fR\&. The allowed range is from 0 to 99\&. The default is 0 (no debugging)\&. Debugging traces from
+\fBdelv\fR
+become more verbose as the debug level increases\&. See the
+\fB+mtrace\fR,
+\fB+rtrace\fR, and
+\fB+vtrace\fR
+options below for additional debugging details\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-h
+.RS 4
+Display the
+\fBdelv\fR
+help usage output and exit\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-i
+.RS 4
+Insecure mode\&. This disables internal DNSSEC validation\&. (Note, however, this does not set the CD bit on upstream queries\&. If the server being queried is performing DNSSEC validation, then it will not return invalid data; this can cause
+\fBdelv\fR
+to time out\&. When it is necessary to examine invalid data to debug a DNSSEC problem, use
+\fBdig +cd\fR\&.)
+.RE
+.PP
+\-m
+.RS 4
+Enables memory usage debugging\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-p \fIport#\fR
+.RS 4
+Specifies a destination port to use for queries instead of the standard DNS port number 53\&. This option would be used with a name server that has been configured to listen for queries on a non\-standard port number\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-q \fIname\fR
+.RS 4
+Sets the query name to
+\fIname\fR\&. While the query name can be specified without using the
+\fB\-q\fR, it is sometimes necessary to disambiguate names from types or classes (for example, when looking up the name "ns", which could be misinterpreted as the type NS, or "ch", which could be misinterpreted as class CH)\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-t \fItype\fR
+.RS 4
+Sets the query type to
+\fItype\fR, which can be any valid query type supported in BIND 9 except for zone transfer types AXFR and IXFR\&. As with
+\fB\-q\fR, this is useful to distinguish query name type or class when they are ambiguous\&. it is sometimes necessary to disambiguate names from types\&.
+.sp
+The default query type is "A", unless the
+\fB\-x\fR
+option is supplied to indicate a reverse lookup, in which case it is "PTR"\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-v
+.RS 4
+Print the
+\fBdelv\fR
+version and exit\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-x \fIaddr\fR
+.RS 4
+Performs a reverse lookup, mapping an addresses to a name\&.
+\fIaddr\fR
+is an IPv4 address in dotted\-decimal notation, or a colon\-delimited IPv6 address\&. When
+\fB\-x\fR
+is used, there is no need to provide the
+\fIname\fR
+or
+\fItype\fR
+arguments\&.
+\fBdelv\fR
+automatically performs a lookup for a name like
+11\&.12\&.13\&.10\&.in\-addr\&.arpa
+and sets the query type to PTR\&. IPv6 addresses are looked up using nibble format under the IP6\&.ARPA domain\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-4
+.RS 4
+Forces
+\fBdelv\fR
+to only use IPv4\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-6
+.RS 4
+Forces
+\fBdelv\fR
+to only use IPv6\&.
+.RE
+.SH "QUERY OPTIONS"
+.PP
+\fBdelv\fR
+provides a number of query options which affect the way results are displayed, and in some cases the way lookups are performed\&.
+.PP
+Each query option is identified by a keyword preceded by a plus sign (+)\&. Some keywords set or reset an option\&. These may be preceded by the string
+no
+to negate the meaning of that keyword\&. Other keywords assign values to options like the timeout interval\&. They have the form
+\fB+keyword=value\fR\&. The query options are:
+.PP
+\fB+[no]cdflag\fR
+.RS 4
+Controls whether to set the CD (checking disabled) bit in queries sent by
+\fBdelv\fR\&. This may be useful when troubleshooting DNSSEC problems from behind a validating resolver\&. A validating resolver will block invalid responses, making it difficult to retrieve them for analysis\&. Setting the CD flag on queries will cause the resolver to return invalid responses, which
+\fBdelv\fR
+can then validate internally and report the errors in detail\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]class\fR
+.RS 4
+Controls whether to display the CLASS when printing a record\&. The default is to display the CLASS\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]ttl\fR
+.RS 4
+Controls whether to display the TTL when printing a record\&. The default is to display the TTL\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]rtrace\fR
+.RS 4
+Toggle resolver fetch logging\&. This reports the name and type of each query sent by
+\fBdelv\fR
+in the process of carrying out the resolution and validation process: this includes including the original query and all subsequent queries to follow CNAMEs and to establish a chain of trust for DNSSEC validation\&.
+.sp
+This is equivalent to setting the debug level to 1 in the "resolver" logging category\&. Setting the systemwide debug level to 1 using the
+\fB\-d\fR
+option will product the same output (but will affect other logging categories as well)\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]mtrace\fR
+.RS 4
+Toggle message logging\&. This produces a detailed dump of the responses received by
+\fBdelv\fR
+in the process of carrying out the resolution and validation process\&.
+.sp
+This is equivalent to setting the debug level to 10 for the "packets" module of the "resolver" logging category\&. Setting the systemwide debug level to 10 using the
+\fB\-d\fR
+option will produce the same output (but will affect other logging categories as well)\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]vtrace\fR
+.RS 4
+Toggle validation logging\&. This shows the internal process of the validator as it determines whether an answer is validly signed, unsigned, or invalid\&.
+.sp
+This is equivalent to setting the debug level to 3 for the "validator" module of the "dnssec" logging category\&. Setting the systemwide debug level to 3 using the
+\fB\-d\fR
+option will produce the same output (but will affect other logging categories as well)\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]short\fR
+.RS 4
+Provide a terse answer\&. The default is to print the answer in a verbose form\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]comments\fR
+.RS 4
+Toggle the display of comment lines in the output\&. The default is to print comments\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]rrcomments\fR
+.RS 4
+Toggle the display of per\-record comments in the output (for example, human\-readable key information about DNSKEY records)\&. The default is to print per\-record comments\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]crypto\fR
+.RS 4
+Toggle the display of cryptographic fields in DNSSEC records\&. The contents of these field are unnecessary to debug most DNSSEC validation failures and removing them makes it easier to see the common failures\&. The default is to display the fields\&. When omitted they are replaced by the string "[omitted]" or in the DNSKEY case the key id is displayed as the replacement, e\&.g\&. "[ key id = value ]"\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]trust\fR
+.RS 4
+Controls whether to display the trust level when printing a record\&. The default is to display the trust level\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]split[=W]\fR
+.RS 4
+Split long hex\- or base64\-formatted fields in resource records into chunks of
+\fIW\fR
+characters (where
+\fIW\fR
+is rounded up to the nearest multiple of 4)\&.
+\fI+nosplit\fR
+or
+\fI+split=0\fR
+causes fields not to be split at all\&. The default is 56 characters, or 44 characters when multiline mode is active\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]all\fR
+.RS 4
+Set or clear the display options
+\fB+[no]comments\fR,
+\fB+[no]rrcomments\fR, and
+\fB+[no]trust\fR
+as a group\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]multiline\fR
+.RS 4
+Print long records (such as RRSIG, DNSKEY, and SOA records) in a verbose multi\-line format with human\-readable comments\&. The default is to print each record on a single line, to facilitate machine parsing of the
+\fBdelv\fR
+output\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]dnssec\fR
+.RS 4
+Indicates whether to display RRSIG records in the
+\fBdelv\fR
+output\&. The default is to do so\&. Note that (unlike in
+\fBdig\fR) this does
+\fInot\fR
+control whether to request DNSSEC records or whether to validate them\&. DNSSEC records are always requested, and validation will always occur unless suppressed by the use of
+\fB\-i\fR
+or
+\fB+noroot\fR\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]root[=ROOT]\fR
+.RS 4
+Indicates whether to perform conventional DNSSEC validation, and if so, specifies the name of a trust anchor\&. The default is to validate using a trust anchor of "\&." (the root zone), for which there is a built\-in key\&. If specifying a different trust anchor, then
+\fB\-a\fR
+must be used to specify a file containing the key\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]tcp\fR
+.RS 4
+Controls whether to use TCP when sending queries\&. The default is to use UDP unless a truncated response has been received\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]unknownformat\fR
+.RS 4
+Print all RDATA in unknown RR type presentation format (RFC 3597)\&. The default is to print RDATA for known types in the type\*(Aqs presentation format\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]yaml\fR
+.RS 4
+Print response data in YAML format\&.
+.RE
+.SH "FILES"
+.PP
+/etc/bind\&.keys
+.PP
+/etc/resolv\&.conf
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBdig\fR(1),
+\fBnamed\fR(8),
+RFC4034,
+RFC4035,
+RFC4431,
+RFC5074,
+RFC5155\&.
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+\fBInternet Systems Consortium, Inc\&.\fR
+.SH "COPYRIGHT"
+.br
+Copyright \(co 2014-2020 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.br

bin/delv/delv.c

@@ -1,11 +1,9 @@
 /*
  * Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
  *
- * SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
- *
  * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
  * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
- * file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+ * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
  *
  * See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
  * information regarding copyright ownership.
@@ -35,7 +33,6 @@
 #include <isc/hex.h>
 #include <isc/lib.h>
 #include <isc/log.h>
-#include <isc/managers.h>
 #include <isc/md.h>
 #include <isc/mem.h>
 #ifdef WIN32
@@ -74,6 +71,7 @@
 #include <isccfg/log.h>
 #include <isccfg/namedconf.h>
 
+#include <irs/netdb.h>
 #include <irs/resconf.h>
 
 #define CHECK(r)                             \
@@ -603,14 +601,11 @@ key_fromconfig(const cfg_obj_t *key, dns_client_t *client) {
 	dns_name_t *keyname;
 	isc_result_t result;
 	bool match_root = false;
-	enum {
-		INITIAL_KEY,
-		STATIC_KEY,
-		INITIAL_DS,
-		STATIC_DS,
-		TRUSTED
-	} anchortype;
-	const cfg_obj_t *obj;
+	enum { INITIAL_KEY,
+	       STATIC_KEY,
+	       INITIAL_DS,
+	       STATIC_DS,
+	       TRUSTED } anchortype;
 
 	keynamestr = cfg_obj_asstring(cfg_tuple_get(key, "name"));
 	CHECK(convert_name(&fkeyname, &keyname, keynamestr));
@@ -643,30 +638,21 @@ key_fromconfig(const cfg_obj_t *key, dns_client_t *client) {
 	rdata3 = cfg_obj_asuint32(cfg_tuple_get(key, "rdata3"));
 
 	/* What type of trust anchor is this? */
-	obj = cfg_tuple_get(key, "anchortype");
-	if (cfg_obj_isvoid(obj)) {
-		/*
-		 * "anchortype" is not defined, this must be a static-key
-		 * configured with trusted-keys.
-		 */
+	atstr = cfg_obj_asstring(cfg_tuple_get(key, "anchortype"));
+	if (strcasecmp(atstr, "static-key") == 0) {
 		anchortype = STATIC_KEY;
+	} else if (strcasecmp(atstr, "static-ds") == 0) {
+		anchortype = STATIC_DS;
+	} else if (strcasecmp(atstr, "initial-key") == 0) {
+		anchortype = INITIAL_KEY;
+	} else if (strcasecmp(atstr, "initial-ds") == 0) {
+		anchortype = INITIAL_DS;
 	} else {
-		atstr = cfg_obj_asstring(obj);
-		if (strcasecmp(atstr, "static-key") == 0) {
-			anchortype = STATIC_KEY;
-		} else if (strcasecmp(atstr, "static-ds") == 0) {
-			anchortype = STATIC_DS;
-		} else if (strcasecmp(atstr, "initial-key") == 0) {
-			anchortype = INITIAL_KEY;
-		} else if (strcasecmp(atstr, "initial-ds") == 0) {
-			anchortype = INITIAL_DS;
-		} else {
-			delv_log(ISC_LOG_ERROR,
-				 "key '%s': invalid initialization method '%s'",
-				 keynamestr, atstr);
-			result = ISC_R_FAILURE;
-			goto cleanup;
-		}
+		delv_log(ISC_LOG_ERROR,
+			 "key '%s': invalid initialization method '%s'",
+			 keynamestr, atstr);
+		result = ISC_R_FAILURE;
+		goto cleanup;
 	}
 
 	isc_buffer_init(&databuf, data, sizeof(data));
@@ -852,7 +838,6 @@ setup_dnsseckeys(dns_client_t *client) {
 
 		isc_buffer_init(&b, anchortext, sizeof(anchortext) - 1);
 		isc_buffer_add(&b, sizeof(anchortext) - 1);
-		cfg_parser_reset(parser);
 		result = cfg_parse_buffer(parser, &b, NULL, 0,
 					  &cfg_type_bindkeys, 0, &bindkeys);
 		if (result != ISC_R_SUCCESS) {
@@ -1333,6 +1318,7 @@ dash_option(char *option, char *next, bool *open_type_class) {
 		case 'h':
 			usage();
 			exit(0);
+		/* NOTREACHED */
 		case 'i':
 			no_sigs = true;
 			root_validation = false;
@@ -1343,8 +1329,10 @@ dash_option(char *option, char *next, bool *open_type_class) {
 		case 'v':
 			fputs("delv " VERSION "\n", stderr);
 			exit(0);
+		/* NOTREACHED */
 		default:
-			UNREACHABLE();
+			INSIST(0);
+			ISC_UNREACHABLE();
 		}
 		if (strlen(option) > 1U) {
 			option = &option[1];
@@ -1482,7 +1470,7 @@ dash_option(char *option, char *next, bool *open_type_class) {
 		fprintf(stderr, "Invalid option: -%s\n", option);
 		usage();
 	}
-	UNREACHABLE();
+	/* NOTREACHED */
 	return (false);
 }
 
@@ -1727,7 +1715,6 @@ main(int argc, char *argv[]) {
 	dns_namelist_t namelist;
 	unsigned int resopt, clopt;
 	isc_appctx_t *actx = NULL;
-	isc_nm_t *netmgr = NULL;
 	isc_taskmgr_t *taskmgr = NULL;
 	isc_socketmgr_t *socketmgr = NULL;
 	isc_timermgr_t *timermgr = NULL;
@@ -1751,9 +1738,9 @@ main(int argc, char *argv[]) {
 	isc_mem_create(&mctx);
 
 	CHECK(isc_appctx_create(mctx, &actx));
-	CHECK(isc_managers_create(mctx, 1, 0, &netmgr, &taskmgr));
-	CHECK(isc_socketmgr_create(mctx, &socketmgr));
-	CHECK(isc_timermgr_create(mctx, &timermgr));
+	CHECK(isc_taskmgr_createinctx(mctx, 1, 0, &taskmgr));
+	CHECK(isc_socketmgr_createinctx(mctx, &socketmgr));
+	CHECK(isc_timermgr_createinctx(mctx, &timermgr));
 
 	parse_args(argc, argv);
 
@@ -1774,8 +1761,8 @@ main(int argc, char *argv[]) {
 
 	/* Create client */
 	clopt = DNS_CLIENTCREATEOPT_USECACHE;
-	result = dns_client_create(mctx, actx, taskmgr, socketmgr, timermgr,
-				   clopt, &client, srcaddr4, srcaddr6);
+	result = dns_client_createx(mctx, actx, taskmgr, socketmgr, timermgr,
+				    clopt, &client, srcaddr4, srcaddr6);
 	if (result != ISC_R_SUCCESS) {
 		delv_log(ISC_LOG_ERROR, "dns_client_create: %s",
 			 isc_result_totext(result));
@@ -1795,7 +1782,7 @@ main(int argc, char *argv[]) {
 	CHECK(convert_name(&qfn, &query_name, qname));
 
 	/* Set up resolution options */
-	resopt = DNS_CLIENTRESOPT_NOCDFLAG;
+	resopt = DNS_CLIENTRESOPT_ALLOWRUN | DNS_CLIENTRESOPT_NOCDFLAG;
 	if (no_sigs) {
 		resopt |= DNS_CLIENTRESOPT_NODNSSEC;
 	}
@@ -1858,7 +1845,7 @@ cleanup:
 		dns_client_destroy(&client);
 	}
 	if (taskmgr != NULL) {
-		isc_managers_destroy(&netmgr, &taskmgr);
+		isc_taskmgr_destroy(&taskmgr);
 	}
 	if (timermgr != NULL) {
 		isc_timermgr_destroy(&timermgr);

bin/delv/delv.docbook

@@ -0,0 +1,699 @@
+<!DOCTYPE book [
+<!ENTITY mdash "&#8212;">]>
+<!--
+ - Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ -
+ - This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
+ - License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+ - file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+ -
+ - See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
+ - information regarding copyright ownership.
+-->
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<refentry xmlns:db="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="man.delv">
+  <info>
+    <date>2014-04-23</date>
+  </info>
+  <refentryinfo>
+    <corpname>ISC</corpname>
+    <corpauthor>Internet Systems Consortium, Inc.</corpauthor>
+  </refentryinfo>
+
+  <refmeta>
+    <refentrytitle>delv</refentrytitle>
+    <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
+    <refmiscinfo>BIND9</refmiscinfo>
+  </refmeta>
+
+  <refnamediv>
+    <refname>delv</refname>
+    <refpurpose>DNS lookup and validation utility</refpurpose>
+  </refnamediv>
+
+  <docinfo>
+    <copyright>
+      <year>2014</year>
+      <year>2015</year>
+      <year>2016</year>
+      <year>2017</year>
+      <year>2018</year>
+      <year>2019</year>
+      <year>2020</year>
+      <holder>Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")</holder>
+    </copyright>
+  </docinfo>
+
+  <refsynopsisdiv>
+    <cmdsynopsis sepchar=" ">
+      <command>delv</command>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat">@server</arg>
+      <group choice="opt" rep="norepeat">
+	<arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-4</option></arg>
+	<arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-6</option></arg>
+      </group>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-a <replaceable class="parameter">anchor-file</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-b <replaceable class="parameter">address</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-c <replaceable class="parameter">class</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-d <replaceable class="parameter">level</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-i</option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-m</option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-p <replaceable class="parameter">port#</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-q <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-t <replaceable class="parameter">type</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-x <replaceable class="parameter">addr</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat">name</arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat">type</arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat">class</arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="repeat">queryopt</arg>
+    </cmdsynopsis>
+
+    <cmdsynopsis sepchar=" ">
+      <command>delv</command>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-h</option></arg>
+    </cmdsynopsis>
+
+    <cmdsynopsis sepchar=" ">
+      <command>delv</command>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-v</option></arg>
+    </cmdsynopsis>
+
+    <cmdsynopsis sepchar=" ">
+      <command>delv</command>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="repeat">queryopt</arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="repeat">query</arg>
+    </cmdsynopsis>
+  </refsynopsisdiv>
+
+  <refsection><info><title>DESCRIPTION</title></info>
+
+    <para><command>delv</command>
+      is a tool for sending
+      DNS queries and validating the results, using the same internal
+      resolver and validator logic as <command>named</command>.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      <command>delv</command> will send to a specified name server all
+      queries needed to fetch and validate the requested data; this
+      includes the original requested query, subsequent queries to follow
+      CNAME or DNAME chains, and queries for DNSKEY and DS records
+      to establish a chain of trust for DNSSEC validation.
+      It does not perform iterative resolution, but simulates the
+      behavior of a name server configured for DNSSEC validating and
+      forwarding.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      By default, responses are validated using built-in DNSSEC trust
+      anchor for the root zone (".").  Records returned by
+      <command>delv</command> are either fully validated or
+      were not signed.  If validation fails, an explanation of
+      the failure is included in the output; the validation process
+      can be traced in detail.  Because <command>delv</command> does
+      not rely on an external server to carry out validation, it can
+      be used to check the validity of DNS responses in environments
+      where local name servers may not be trustworthy.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      Unless it is told to query a specific name server,
+      <command>delv</command> will try each of the servers listed in
+      <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>. If no usable server
+      addresses are found, <command>delv</command> will send
+      queries to the localhost addresses (127.0.0.1 for IPv4, ::1
+      for IPv6).
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      When no command line arguments or options are given,
+      <command>delv</command> will perform an NS query for "."
+      (the root zone).
+    </para>
+  </refsection>
+
+  <refsection><info><title>SIMPLE USAGE</title></info>
+
+
+    <para>
+      A typical invocation of <command>delv</command> looks like:
+      <programlisting> delv @server name type </programlisting>
+      where:
+
+      <variablelist>
+	<varlistentry>
+	  <term><constant>server</constant></term>
+	  <listitem>
+	    <para>
+	      is the name or IP address of the name server to query.  This
+	      can be an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal notation or an IPv6
+	      address in colon-delimited notation.  When the supplied
+	      <parameter>server</parameter> argument is a hostname,
+	      <command>delv</command> resolves that name before
+	      querying that name server (note, however, that this
+	      initial lookup is <emphasis>not</emphasis> validated
+	      by DNSSEC).
+	    </para>
+	    <para>
+	      If no <parameter>server</parameter> argument is
+	      provided, <command>delv</command> consults
+	      <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>; if an
+	      address is found there, it queries the name server at
+	      that address. If either of the <option>-4</option> or
+	      <option>-6</option> options are in use, then
+	      only addresses for the corresponding transport
+	      will be tried.  If no usable addresses are found,
+	      <command>delv</command> will send queries to
+	      the localhost addresses (127.0.0.1 for IPv4,
+	      ::1 for IPv6).
+	    </para>
+	  </listitem>
+	</varlistentry>
+
+	<varlistentry>
+	  <term><constant>name</constant></term>
+	  <listitem>
+	    <para>
+	      is the domain name to be looked up.
+	    </para>
+	  </listitem>
+	</varlistentry>
+
+	<varlistentry>
+	  <term><constant>type</constant></term>
+	  <listitem>
+	    <para>
+	      indicates what type of query is required &mdash;
+	      ANY, A, MX, etc.
+	      <parameter>type</parameter> can be any valid query
+	      type.  If no
+	      <parameter>type</parameter> argument is supplied,
+	      <command>delv</command> will perform a lookup for an
+	      A record.
+	    </para>
+	  </listitem>
+	</varlistentry>
+
+      </variablelist>
+    </para>
+
+  </refsection>
+
+  <refsection><info><title>OPTIONS</title></info>
+
+    <variablelist>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-a <replaceable class="parameter">anchor-file</replaceable></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Specifies a file from which to read DNSSEC trust anchors.
+	    The default is <filename>/etc/bind.keys</filename>, which
+	    is included with <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 and contains
+	    one or more trust anchors for the root zone (".").
+	  </para>
+	  <para>
+	    Keys that do not match the root zone name are ignored.
+            An alternate key name can be specified using the
+	    <option>+root=NAME</option> options.
+	  </para>
+	  <para>
+	    Note: When reading the trust anchor file,
+	    <command>delv</command> treats <option>trust-anchors</option>
+	    <option>initial-key</option> and <option>static-key</option>
+	    entries identically.  That is, even if a key is configured
+	    with <command>initial-key</command>, indicating that it is
+	    meant to be used only as an initializing key for RFC 5011
+	    key maintenance, it is still treated by <command>delv</command>
+	    as if it had been configured as a <command>static-key</command>.
+	    <command>delv</command> does not consult the managed keys
+	    database maintained by <command>named</command>. This means
+	    that if either of the keys in
+	    <filename>/etc/bind.keys</filename> is revoked
+	    and rolled over, it will be necessary to update
+	    <filename>/etc/bind.keys</filename> to use DNSSEC
+	    validation in <command>delv</command>.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-b  <replaceable class="parameter">address</replaceable></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Sets the source IP address of the query to
+	    <parameter>address</parameter>.  This must be a valid address
+	    on one of the host's network interfaces or "0.0.0.0" or "::".
+	    An optional source port may be specified by appending
+	    "#&lt;port&gt;"
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-c <replaceable class="parameter">class</replaceable></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Sets the query class for the requested data. Currently,
+	    only class "IN" is supported in <command>delv</command>
+	    and any other value is ignored.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-d <replaceable class="parameter">level</replaceable></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Set the systemwide debug level to <option>level</option>.
+	    The allowed range is from 0 to 99.
+	    The default is 0 (no debugging).
+	    Debugging traces from <command>delv</command> become
+	    more verbose as the debug level increases.
+	    See the <option>+mtrace</option>, <option>+rtrace</option>,
+	    and <option>+vtrace</option> options below for additional
+	    debugging details.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-h</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Display the <command>delv</command> help usage output and exit.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-i</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Insecure mode. This disables internal DNSSEC validation.
+	    (Note, however, this does not set the CD bit on upstream
+	    queries. If the server being queried is performing DNSSEC
+	    validation, then it will not return invalid data; this
+	    can cause <command>delv</command> to time out. When it
+	    is necessary to examine invalid data to debug a DNSSEC
+	    problem, use <command>dig +cd</command>.)
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-m</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Enables memory usage debugging.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-p <replaceable class="parameter">port#</replaceable></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Specifies a destination port to use for queries instead of
+	    the standard DNS port number 53.  This option would be used
+	    with a name server that has been configured to listen
+	    for queries on a non-standard port number.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-q <replaceable class="parameter">name</replaceable></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Sets the query name to <parameter>name</parameter>.
+	    While the query name can be specified without using the
+	    <option>-q</option>, it is sometimes necessary to disambiguate
+	    names from types or classes (for example, when looking up the
+	    name "ns", which could be misinterpreted as the type NS,
+	    or "ch", which could be misinterpreted as class CH).
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-t <replaceable class="parameter">type</replaceable></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Sets the query type to <parameter>type</parameter>, which
+	    can be any valid query type supported in BIND 9 except
+	    for zone transfer types AXFR and IXFR. As with
+	    <option>-q</option>, this is useful to distinguish
+	    query name type or class when they are ambiguous.
+	    it is sometimes necessary to disambiguate names from types.
+	  </para>
+	  <para>
+	    The default query type is "A", unless the <option>-x</option>
+	    option is supplied to indicate a reverse lookup, in which case
+	    it is "PTR".
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-v</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Print the <command>delv</command> version and exit.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-x <replaceable class="parameter">addr</replaceable></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Performs a reverse lookup, mapping an addresses to
+	    a name.  <parameter>addr</parameter> is an IPv4 address in
+	    dotted-decimal notation, or a colon-delimited IPv6 address.
+	    When <option>-x</option> is used, there is no need to provide
+	    the <parameter>name</parameter> or <parameter>type</parameter>
+	    arguments.  <command>delv</command> automatically performs a
+	    lookup for a name like <literal>11.12.13.10.in-addr.arpa</literal>
+	    and sets the query type to PTR.  IPv6 addresses are looked up
+	    using nibble format under the IP6.ARPA domain.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-4</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Forces <command>delv</command> to only use IPv4.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-6</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Forces <command>delv</command> to only use IPv6.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+    </variablelist>
+  </refsection>
+
+  <refsection><info><title>QUERY OPTIONS</title></info>
+
+
+    <para><command>delv</command>
+      provides a number of query options which affect the way results are
+      displayed, and in some cases the way lookups are performed.
+    </para>
+
+    <para>
+      Each query option is identified by a keyword preceded by a plus sign
+      (<literal>+</literal>).  Some keywords set or reset an
+      option.  These may be preceded by the string
+      <literal>no</literal> to negate the meaning of that keyword.
+      Other keywords assign values to options like the timeout interval.
+      They have the form <option>+keyword=value</option>.
+      The query options are:
+
+      <variablelist>
+	<varlistentry>
+	  <term><option>+[no]cdflag</option></term>
+	  <listitem>
+	    <para>
+	      Controls whether to set the CD (checking disabled) bit in
+	      queries sent by <command>delv</command>. This may be useful
+	      when troubleshooting DNSSEC problems from behind a validating
+	      resolver. A validating resolver will block invalid responses,
+	      making it difficult to retrieve them for analysis. Setting
+	      the CD flag on queries will cause the resolver to return
+	      invalid responses, which <command>delv</command> can then
+	      validate internally and report the errors in detail.
+	    </para>
+	  </listitem>
+	</varlistentry>
+
+	<varlistentry>
+	  <term><option>+[no]class</option></term>
+	  <listitem>
+	    <para>
+	      Controls whether to display the CLASS when printing
+	      a record. The default is to display the CLASS.
+	    </para>
+	  </listitem>
+	</varlistentry>
+
+	<varlistentry>
+	  <term><option>+[no]ttl</option></term>
+	  <listitem>
+	    <para>
+	      Controls whether to display the TTL when printing
+	      a record. The default is to display the TTL.
+	    </para>
+	  </listitem>
+	</varlistentry>
+
+	<varlistentry>
+	  <term><option>+[no]rtrace</option></term>
+	  <listitem>
+	    <para>
+	      Toggle resolver fetch logging. This reports the
+	      name and type of each query sent by <command>delv</command>
+	      in the process of carrying out the resolution and validation
+	      process: this includes including the original query and
+	      all subsequent queries to follow CNAMEs and to establish a
+	      chain of trust for DNSSEC validation.
+	    </para>
+	    <para>
+	      This is equivalent to setting the debug level to 1 in
+	      the "resolver" logging category. Setting the systemwide
+	      debug level to 1 using the <option>-d</option> option will
+	      product the same output (but will affect other logging
+	      categories as well).
+	    </para>
+	  </listitem>
+	</varlistentry>
+
+	<varlistentry>
+	  <term><option>+[no]mtrace</option></term>
+	  <listitem>
+	    <para>
+	      Toggle message logging. This produces a detailed dump of
+	      the responses received by <command>delv</command> in the
+	      process of carrying out the resolution and validation process.
+	    </para>
+	    <para>
+	      This is equivalent to setting the debug level to 10
+	      for the "packets" module of the "resolver" logging
+	      category. Setting the systemwide debug level to 10 using
+	      the <option>-d</option> option will produce the same output
+	      (but will affect other logging categories as well).
+	    </para>
+	  </listitem>
+	</varlistentry>
+
+	<varlistentry>
+	  <term><option>+[no]vtrace</option></term>
+	  <listitem>
+	    <para>
+	      Toggle validation logging. This shows the internal
+	      process of the validator as it determines whether an
+	      answer is validly signed, unsigned, or invalid.
+	    </para>
+	    <para>
+	      This is equivalent to setting the debug level to 3
+	      for the "validator" module of the "dnssec" logging
+	      category. Setting the systemwide debug level to 3 using
+	      the <option>-d</option> option will produce the same output
+	      (but will affect other logging categories as well).
+	    </para>
+	  </listitem>
+	</varlistentry>
+
+	<varlistentry>
+	  <term><option>+[no]short</option></term>
+	  <listitem>
+	    <para>
+	      Provide a terse answer.  The default is to print the answer in a
+	      verbose form.
+	    </para>
+	  </listitem>
+	</varlistentry>
+
+	<varlistentry>
+	  <term><option>+[no]comments</option></term>
+	  <listitem>
+	    <para>
+	      Toggle the display of comment lines in the output.  The default
+	      is to print comments.
+	    </para>
+	  </listitem>
+	</varlistentry>
+
+	<varlistentry>
+	  <term><option>+[no]rrcomments</option></term>
+	  <listitem>
+	    <para>
+	      Toggle the display of per-record comments in the output (for
+	      example, human-readable key information about DNSKEY records).
+	      The default is to print per-record comments.
+	    </para>
+	  </listitem>
+	</varlistentry>
+
+	<varlistentry>
+	  <term><option>+[no]crypto</option></term>
+	  <listitem>
+	    <para>
+	      Toggle the display of cryptographic fields in DNSSEC records.
+	      The contents of these field are unnecessary to debug most DNSSEC
+	      validation failures and removing them makes it easier to see
+	      the common failures.  The default is to display the fields.
+	      When omitted they are replaced by the string "[omitted]" or
+	      in the DNSKEY case the key id is displayed as the replacement,
+	      e.g. "[ key id = value ]".
+	    </para>
+	  </listitem>
+	</varlistentry>
+
+	<varlistentry>
+	  <term><option>+[no]trust</option></term>
+	  <listitem>
+	    <para>
+	      Controls whether to display the trust level when printing
+	      a record. The default is to display the trust level.
+	    </para>
+	  </listitem>
+	</varlistentry>
+
+	<varlistentry>
+	  <term><option>+[no]split[=W]</option></term>
+	  <listitem>
+	    <para>
+	      Split long hex- or base64-formatted fields in resource
+	      records into chunks of <parameter>W</parameter> characters
+	      (where <parameter>W</parameter> is rounded up to the nearest
+	      multiple of 4).
+	      <parameter>+nosplit</parameter> or
+	      <parameter>+split=0</parameter> causes fields not to be
+	      split at all.  The default is 56 characters, or 44 characters
+	      when multiline mode is active.
+	    </para>
+	  </listitem>
+	</varlistentry>
+
+	<varlistentry>
+	  <term><option>+[no]all</option></term>
+	  <listitem>
+	    <para>
+	      Set or clear the display options
+	      <option>+[no]comments</option>,
+	      <option>+[no]rrcomments</option>, and
+	      <option>+[no]trust</option> as a group.
+	    </para>
+	  </listitem>
+	</varlistentry>
+
+	<varlistentry>
+	  <term><option>+[no]multiline</option></term>
+	  <listitem>
+	    <para>
+	      Print long records (such as RRSIG, DNSKEY, and SOA records)
+	      in a verbose multi-line format with human-readable comments.
+	      The default is to print each record on a single line, to
+	      facilitate machine parsing of the <command>delv</command>
+	      output.
+	    </para>
+	  </listitem>
+	</varlistentry>
+
+	<varlistentry>
+	  <term><option>+[no]dnssec</option></term>
+	  <listitem>
+	    <para>
+	      Indicates whether to display RRSIG records in the
+	      <command>delv</command> output.  The default is to
+	      do so.  Note that (unlike in <command>dig</command>)
+	      this does <emphasis>not</emphasis> control whether to
+	      request DNSSEC records or whether to validate them.
+	      DNSSEC records are always requested, and validation
+	      will always occur unless suppressed by the use of
+	      <option>-i</option> or <option>+noroot</option>.
+	    </para>
+	  </listitem>
+	</varlistentry>
+
+	<varlistentry>
+	  <term><option>+[no]root[=ROOT]</option></term>
+	  <listitem>
+	    <para>
+	      Indicates whether to perform conventional
+	      DNSSEC validation, and if so, specifies the
+	      name of a trust anchor.  The default is to validate using
+	      a trust anchor of "." (the root zone), for which there is
+	      a built-in key.  If specifying a different trust anchor,
+	      then <option>-a</option> must be used to specify a file
+	      containing the key.
+	    </para>
+	  </listitem>
+	</varlistentry>
+
+	<varlistentry>
+	  <term><option>+[no]tcp</option></term>
+	  <listitem>
+	    <para>
+	      Controls whether to use TCP when sending queries.
+	      The default is to use UDP unless a truncated
+	      response has been received.
+	    </para>
+	  </listitem>
+	</varlistentry>
+
+	<varlistentry>
+	  <term><option>+[no]unknownformat</option></term>
+	  <listitem>
+	    <para>
+	      Print all RDATA in unknown RR type presentation format
+	      (RFC 3597). The default is to print RDATA for known types
+	      in the type's presentation format.
+	    </para>
+	  </listitem>
+	</varlistentry>
+
+	<varlistentry>
+	  <term><option>+[no]yaml</option></term>
+	  <listitem>
+	    <para>
+	      Print response data in YAML format.
+	    </para>
+	  </listitem>
+	</varlistentry>
+
+      </variablelist>
+
+    </para>
+  </refsection>
+
+  <refsection><info><title>FILES</title></info>
+
+    <para><filename>/etc/bind.keys</filename></para>
+    <para><filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename></para>
+  </refsection>
+
+  <refsection><info><title>SEE ALSO</title></info>
+
+    <para><citerefentry>
+	<refentrytitle>dig</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
+      </citerefentry>,
+      <citerefentry>
+	<refentrytitle>named</refentrytitle><manvolnum>8</manvolnum>
+      </citerefentry>,
+      <citetitle>RFC4034</citetitle>,
+      <citetitle>RFC4035</citetitle>,
+      <citetitle>RFC4431</citetitle>,
+      <citetitle>RFC5074</citetitle>,
+      <citetitle>RFC5155</citetitle>.
+    </para>
+  </refsection>
+
+</refentry>

bin/delv/delv.html

@@ -0,0 +1,588 @@
+<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/loose.dtd">
+<!--
+ - Copyright (C) 2014-2020 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ - 
+ - This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
+ - License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+ - file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+-->
+<html lang="en">
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1">
+<title>delv</title>
+<meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.78.1">
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry">
+<a name="man.delv"></a><div class="titlepage"></div>
+  
+  
+
+  
+
+  <div class="refnamediv">
+<h2>Name</h2>
+<p>
+    delv
+     &#8212; DNS lookup and validation utility
+  </p>
+</div>
+
+  
+
+  <div class="refsynopsisdiv">
+<h2>Synopsis</h2>
+    <div class="cmdsynopsis"><p>
+      <code class="command">delv</code> 
+       [@server]
+       [
+	[<code class="option">-4</code>]
+	 |  [<code class="option">-6</code>]
+      ]
+       [<code class="option">-a <em class="replaceable"><code>anchor-file</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-b <em class="replaceable"><code>address</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-c <em class="replaceable"><code>class</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-d <em class="replaceable"><code>level</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-i</code>]
+       [<code class="option">-m</code>]
+       [<code class="option">-p <em class="replaceable"><code>port#</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-q <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-t <em class="replaceable"><code>type</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-x <em class="replaceable"><code>addr</code></em></code>]
+       [name]
+       [type]
+       [class]
+       [queryopt...]
+    </p></div>
+
+    <div class="cmdsynopsis"><p>
+      <code class="command">delv</code> 
+       [<code class="option">-h</code>]
+    </p></div>
+
+    <div class="cmdsynopsis"><p>
+      <code class="command">delv</code> 
+       [<code class="option">-v</code>]
+    </p></div>
+
+    <div class="cmdsynopsis"><p>
+      <code class="command">delv</code> 
+       [queryopt...]
+       [query...]
+    </p></div>
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="refsection">
+<a name="id-1.7"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2>
+
+    <p><span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span>
+      is a tool for sending
+      DNS queries and validating the results, using the same internal
+      resolver and validator logic as <span class="command"><strong>named</strong></span>.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span> will send to a specified name server all
+      queries needed to fetch and validate the requested data; this
+      includes the original requested query, subsequent queries to follow
+      CNAME or DNAME chains, and queries for DNSKEY and DS records
+      to establish a chain of trust for DNSSEC validation.
+      It does not perform iterative resolution, but simulates the
+      behavior of a name server configured for DNSSEC validating and
+      forwarding.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      By default, responses are validated using built-in DNSSEC trust
+      anchor for the root zone (".").  Records returned by
+      <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span> are either fully validated or
+      were not signed.  If validation fails, an explanation of
+      the failure is included in the output; the validation process
+      can be traced in detail.  Because <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span> does
+      not rely on an external server to carry out validation, it can
+      be used to check the validity of DNS responses in environments
+      where local name servers may not be trustworthy.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Unless it is told to query a specific name server,
+      <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span> will try each of the servers listed in
+      <code class="filename">/etc/resolv.conf</code>. If no usable server
+      addresses are found, <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span> will send
+      queries to the localhost addresses (127.0.0.1 for IPv4, ::1
+      for IPv6).
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      When no command line arguments or options are given,
+      <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span> will perform an NS query for "."
+      (the root zone).
+    </p>
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="refsection">
+<a name="id-1.8"></a><h2>SIMPLE USAGE</h2>
+
+
+    <p>
+      A typical invocation of <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span> looks like:
+      </p>
+<pre class="programlisting"> delv @server name type </pre>
+<p>
+      where:
+
+      </p>
+<div class="variablelist"><dl class="variablelist">
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="constant">server</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	    <p>
+	      is the name or IP address of the name server to query.  This
+	      can be an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal notation or an IPv6
+	      address in colon-delimited notation.  When the supplied
+	      <em class="parameter"><code>server</code></em> argument is a hostname,
+	      <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span> resolves that name before
+	      querying that name server (note, however, that this
+	      initial lookup is <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span> validated
+	      by DNSSEC).
+	    </p>
+	    <p>
+	      If no <em class="parameter"><code>server</code></em> argument is
+	      provided, <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span> consults
+	      <code class="filename">/etc/resolv.conf</code>; if an
+	      address is found there, it queries the name server at
+	      that address. If either of the <code class="option">-4</code> or
+	      <code class="option">-6</code> options are in use, then
+	      only addresses for the corresponding transport
+	      will be tried.  If no usable addresses are found,
+	      <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span> will send queries to
+	      the localhost addresses (127.0.0.1 for IPv4,
+	      ::1 for IPv6).
+	    </p>
+	  </dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="constant">name</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	    <p>
+	      is the domain name to be looked up.
+	    </p>
+	  </dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="constant">type</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	    <p>
+	      indicates what type of query is required &#8212;
+	      ANY, A, MX, etc.
+	      <em class="parameter"><code>type</code></em> can be any valid query
+	      type.  If no
+	      <em class="parameter"><code>type</code></em> argument is supplied,
+	      <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span> will perform a lookup for an
+	      A record.
+	    </p>
+	  </dd>
+</dl></div>
+<p>
+    </p>
+
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="refsection">
+<a name="id-1.9"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2>
+
+    <div class="variablelist"><dl class="variablelist">
+<dt><span class="term">-a <em class="replaceable"><code>anchor-file</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Specifies a file from which to read DNSSEC trust anchors.
+	    The default is <code class="filename">/etc/bind.keys</code>, which
+	    is included with <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 and contains
+	    one or more trust anchors for the root zone (".").
+	  </p>
+	  <p>
+	    Keys that do not match the root zone name are ignored.
+            An alternate key name can be specified using the
+	    <code class="option">+root=NAME</code> options.
+	  </p>
+	  <p>
+	    Note: When reading the trust anchor file,
+	    <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span> treats <code class="option">trust-anchors</code>
+	    <code class="option">initial-key</code> and <code class="option">static-key</code>
+	    entries identically.  That is, even if a key is configured
+	    with <span class="command"><strong>initial-key</strong></span>, indicating that it is
+	    meant to be used only as an initializing key for RFC 5011
+	    key maintenance, it is still treated by <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span>
+	    as if it had been configured as a <span class="command"><strong>static-key</strong></span>.
+	    <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span> does not consult the managed keys
+	    database maintained by <span class="command"><strong>named</strong></span>. This means
+	    that if either of the keys in
+	    <code class="filename">/etc/bind.keys</code> is revoked
+	    and rolled over, it will be necessary to update
+	    <code class="filename">/etc/bind.keys</code> to use DNSSEC
+	    validation in <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span>.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-b  <em class="replaceable"><code>address</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Sets the source IP address of the query to
+	    <em class="parameter"><code>address</code></em>.  This must be a valid address
+	    on one of the host's network interfaces or "0.0.0.0" or "::".
+	    An optional source port may be specified by appending
+	    "#&lt;port&gt;"
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-c <em class="replaceable"><code>class</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Sets the query class for the requested data. Currently,
+	    only class "IN" is supported in <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span>
+	    and any other value is ignored.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-d <em class="replaceable"><code>level</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Set the systemwide debug level to <code class="option">level</code>.
+	    The allowed range is from 0 to 99.
+	    The default is 0 (no debugging).
+	    Debugging traces from <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span> become
+	    more verbose as the debug level increases.
+	    See the <code class="option">+mtrace</code>, <code class="option">+rtrace</code>,
+	    and <code class="option">+vtrace</code> options below for additional
+	    debugging details.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-h</span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Display the <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span> help usage output and exit.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-i</span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Insecure mode. This disables internal DNSSEC validation.
+	    (Note, however, this does not set the CD bit on upstream
+	    queries. If the server being queried is performing DNSSEC
+	    validation, then it will not return invalid data; this
+	    can cause <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span> to time out. When it
+	    is necessary to examine invalid data to debug a DNSSEC
+	    problem, use <span class="command"><strong>dig +cd</strong></span>.)
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-m</span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Enables memory usage debugging.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-p <em class="replaceable"><code>port#</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Specifies a destination port to use for queries instead of
+	    the standard DNS port number 53.  This option would be used
+	    with a name server that has been configured to listen
+	    for queries on a non-standard port number.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-q <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Sets the query name to <em class="parameter"><code>name</code></em>.
+	    While the query name can be specified without using the
+	    <code class="option">-q</code>, it is sometimes necessary to disambiguate
+	    names from types or classes (for example, when looking up the
+	    name "ns", which could be misinterpreted as the type NS,
+	    or "ch", which could be misinterpreted as class CH).
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-t <em class="replaceable"><code>type</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Sets the query type to <em class="parameter"><code>type</code></em>, which
+	    can be any valid query type supported in BIND 9 except
+	    for zone transfer types AXFR and IXFR. As with
+	    <code class="option">-q</code>, this is useful to distinguish
+	    query name type or class when they are ambiguous.
+	    it is sometimes necessary to disambiguate names from types.
+	  </p>
+	  <p>
+	    The default query type is "A", unless the <code class="option">-x</code>
+	    option is supplied to indicate a reverse lookup, in which case
+	    it is "PTR".
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-v</span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Print the <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span> version and exit.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-x <em class="replaceable"><code>addr</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Performs a reverse lookup, mapping an addresses to
+	    a name.  <em class="parameter"><code>addr</code></em> is an IPv4 address in
+	    dotted-decimal notation, or a colon-delimited IPv6 address.
+	    When <code class="option">-x</code> is used, there is no need to provide
+	    the <em class="parameter"><code>name</code></em> or <em class="parameter"><code>type</code></em>
+	    arguments.  <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span> automatically performs a
+	    lookup for a name like <code class="literal">11.12.13.10.in-addr.arpa</code>
+	    and sets the query type to PTR.  IPv6 addresses are looked up
+	    using nibble format under the IP6.ARPA domain.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-4</span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Forces <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span> to only use IPv4.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-6</span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Forces <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span> to only use IPv6.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+</dl></div>
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="refsection">
+<a name="id-1.10"></a><h2>QUERY OPTIONS</h2>
+
+
+    <p><span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span>
+      provides a number of query options which affect the way results are
+      displayed, and in some cases the way lookups are performed.
+    </p>
+
+    <p>
+      Each query option is identified by a keyword preceded by a plus sign
+      (<code class="literal">+</code>).  Some keywords set or reset an
+      option.  These may be preceded by the string
+      <code class="literal">no</code> to negate the meaning of that keyword.
+      Other keywords assign values to options like the timeout interval.
+      They have the form <code class="option">+keyword=value</code>.
+      The query options are:
+
+      </p>
+<div class="variablelist"><dl class="variablelist">
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="option">+[no]cdflag</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	    <p>
+	      Controls whether to set the CD (checking disabled) bit in
+	      queries sent by <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span>. This may be useful
+	      when troubleshooting DNSSEC problems from behind a validating
+	      resolver. A validating resolver will block invalid responses,
+	      making it difficult to retrieve them for analysis. Setting
+	      the CD flag on queries will cause the resolver to return
+	      invalid responses, which <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span> can then
+	      validate internally and report the errors in detail.
+	    </p>
+	  </dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="option">+[no]class</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	    <p>
+	      Controls whether to display the CLASS when printing
+	      a record. The default is to display the CLASS.
+	    </p>
+	  </dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="option">+[no]ttl</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	    <p>
+	      Controls whether to display the TTL when printing
+	      a record. The default is to display the TTL.
+	    </p>
+	  </dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="option">+[no]rtrace</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	    <p>
+	      Toggle resolver fetch logging. This reports the
+	      name and type of each query sent by <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span>
+	      in the process of carrying out the resolution and validation
+	      process: this includes including the original query and
+	      all subsequent queries to follow CNAMEs and to establish a
+	      chain of trust for DNSSEC validation.
+	    </p>
+	    <p>
+	      This is equivalent to setting the debug level to 1 in
+	      the "resolver" logging category. Setting the systemwide
+	      debug level to 1 using the <code class="option">-d</code> option will
+	      product the same output (but will affect other logging
+	      categories as well).
+	    </p>
+	  </dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="option">+[no]mtrace</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	    <p>
+	      Toggle message logging. This produces a detailed dump of
+	      the responses received by <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span> in the
+	      process of carrying out the resolution and validation process.
+	    </p>
+	    <p>
+	      This is equivalent to setting the debug level to 10
+	      for the "packets" module of the "resolver" logging
+	      category. Setting the systemwide debug level to 10 using
+	      the <code class="option">-d</code> option will produce the same output
+	      (but will affect other logging categories as well).
+	    </p>
+	  </dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="option">+[no]vtrace</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	    <p>
+	      Toggle validation logging. This shows the internal
+	      process of the validator as it determines whether an
+	      answer is validly signed, unsigned, or invalid.
+	    </p>
+	    <p>
+	      This is equivalent to setting the debug level to 3
+	      for the "validator" module of the "dnssec" logging
+	      category. Setting the systemwide debug level to 3 using
+	      the <code class="option">-d</code> option will produce the same output
+	      (but will affect other logging categories as well).
+	    </p>
+	  </dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="option">+[no]short</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	    <p>
+	      Provide a terse answer.  The default is to print the answer in a
+	      verbose form.
+	    </p>
+	  </dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="option">+[no]comments</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	    <p>
+	      Toggle the display of comment lines in the output.  The default
+	      is to print comments.
+	    </p>
+	  </dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="option">+[no]rrcomments</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	    <p>
+	      Toggle the display of per-record comments in the output (for
+	      example, human-readable key information about DNSKEY records).
+	      The default is to print per-record comments.
+	    </p>
+	  </dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="option">+[no]crypto</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	    <p>
+	      Toggle the display of cryptographic fields in DNSSEC records.
+	      The contents of these field are unnecessary to debug most DNSSEC
+	      validation failures and removing them makes it easier to see
+	      the common failures.  The default is to display the fields.
+	      When omitted they are replaced by the string "[omitted]" or
+	      in the DNSKEY case the key id is displayed as the replacement,
+	      e.g. "[ key id = value ]".
+	    </p>
+	  </dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="option">+[no]trust</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	    <p>
+	      Controls whether to display the trust level when printing
+	      a record. The default is to display the trust level.
+	    </p>
+	  </dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="option">+[no]split[=W]</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	    <p>
+	      Split long hex- or base64-formatted fields in resource
+	      records into chunks of <em class="parameter"><code>W</code></em> characters
+	      (where <em class="parameter"><code>W</code></em> is rounded up to the nearest
+	      multiple of 4).
+	      <em class="parameter"><code>+nosplit</code></em> or
+	      <em class="parameter"><code>+split=0</code></em> causes fields not to be
+	      split at all.  The default is 56 characters, or 44 characters
+	      when multiline mode is active.
+	    </p>
+	  </dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="option">+[no]all</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	    <p>
+	      Set or clear the display options
+	      <code class="option">+[no]comments</code>,
+	      <code class="option">+[no]rrcomments</code>, and
+	      <code class="option">+[no]trust</code> as a group.
+	    </p>
+	  </dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="option">+[no]multiline</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	    <p>
+	      Print long records (such as RRSIG, DNSKEY, and SOA records)
+	      in a verbose multi-line format with human-readable comments.
+	      The default is to print each record on a single line, to
+	      facilitate machine parsing of the <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span>
+	      output.
+	    </p>
+	  </dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="option">+[no]dnssec</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	    <p>
+	      Indicates whether to display RRSIG records in the
+	      <span class="command"><strong>delv</strong></span> output.  The default is to
+	      do so.  Note that (unlike in <span class="command"><strong>dig</strong></span>)
+	      this does <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span> control whether to
+	      request DNSSEC records or whether to validate them.
+	      DNSSEC records are always requested, and validation
+	      will always occur unless suppressed by the use of
+	      <code class="option">-i</code> or <code class="option">+noroot</code>.
+	    </p>
+	  </dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="option">+[no]root[=ROOT]</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	    <p>
+	      Indicates whether to perform conventional
+	      DNSSEC validation, and if so, specifies the
+	      name of a trust anchor.  The default is to validate using
+	      a trust anchor of "." (the root zone), for which there is
+	      a built-in key.  If specifying a different trust anchor,
+	      then <code class="option">-a</code> must be used to specify a file
+	      containing the key.
+	    </p>
+	  </dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="option">+[no]tcp</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	    <p>
+	      Controls whether to use TCP when sending queries.
+	      The default is to use UDP unless a truncated
+	      response has been received.
+	    </p>
+	  </dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="option">+[no]unknownformat</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	    <p>
+	      Print all RDATA in unknown RR type presentation format
+	      (RFC 3597). The default is to print RDATA for known types
+	      in the type's presentation format.
+	    </p>
+	  </dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="option">+[no]yaml</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	    <p>
+	      Print response data in YAML format.
+	    </p>
+	  </dd>
+</dl></div>
+<p>
+
+    </p>
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="refsection">
+<a name="id-1.11"></a><h2>FILES</h2>
+
+    <p><code class="filename">/etc/bind.keys</code></p>
+    <p><code class="filename">/etc/resolv.conf</code></p>
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="refsection">
+<a name="id-1.12"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2>
+
+    <p><span class="citerefentry">
+	<span class="refentrytitle">dig</span>(1)
+      </span>,
+      <span class="citerefentry">
+	<span class="refentrytitle">named</span>(8)
+      </span>,
+      <em class="citetitle">RFC4034</em>,
+      <em class="citetitle">RFC4035</em>,
+      <em class="citetitle">RFC4431</em>,
+      <em class="citetitle">RFC5074</em>,
+      <em class="citetitle">RFC5155</em>.
+    </p>
+  </div>
+
+</div></body>
+</html>

bin/delv/delv.rst

@@ -1,326 +0,0 @@
-.. Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-..
-.. SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
-..
-.. This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
-.. License, v. 2.0.  If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
-.. file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
-..
-.. See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
-.. information regarding copyright ownership.
-
-.. highlight: console
-
-.. _man_delv:
-
-delv - DNS lookup and validation utility
-----------------------------------------
-
-Synopsis
-~~~~~~~~
-
-:program:`delv` [@server] [ [**-4**] | [**-6**] ] [**-a** anchor-file] [**-b** address] [**-c** class] [**-d** level] [**-i**] [**-m**] [**-p** port#] [**-q** name] [**-t** type] [**-x** addr] [name] [type] [class] [queryopt...]
-
-:program:`delv` [**-h**]
-
-:program:`delv` [**-v**]
-
-:program:`delv` [queryopt...] [query...]
-
-Description
-~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-``delv`` is a tool for sending DNS queries and validating the results,
-using the same internal resolver and validator logic as ``named``.
-
-``delv`` sends to a specified name server all queries needed to
-fetch and validate the requested data; this includes the original
-requested query, subsequent queries to follow CNAME or DNAME chains,
-queries for DNSKEY, and DS records to establish a chain of trust for
-DNSSEC validation. It does not perform iterative resolution, but
-simulates the behavior of a name server configured for DNSSEC validating
-and forwarding.
-
-By default, responses are validated using the built-in DNSSEC trust anchor
-for the root zone ("."). Records returned by ``delv`` are either fully
-validated or were not signed. If validation fails, an explanation of the
-failure is included in the output; the validation process can be traced
-in detail. Because ``delv`` does not rely on an external server to carry
-out validation, it can be used to check the validity of DNS responses in
-environments where local name servers may not be trustworthy.
-
-Unless it is told to query a specific name server, ``delv`` tries
-each of the servers listed in ``/etc/resolv.conf``. If no usable server
-addresses are found, ``delv`` sends queries to the localhost
-addresses (127.0.0.1 for IPv4, ::1 for IPv6).
-
-When no command-line arguments or options are given, ``delv``
-performs an NS query for "." (the root zone).
-
-Simple Usage
-~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-A typical invocation of ``delv`` looks like:
-
-::
-
-    delv @server name type
-
-where:
-
-``server``
-   is the name or IP address of the name server to query. This can be an
-   IPv4 address in dotted-decimal notation or an IPv6 address in
-   colon-delimited notation. When the supplied ``server`` argument is a
-   hostname, ``delv`` resolves that name before querying that name
-   server (note, however, that this initial lookup is *not* validated by
-   DNSSEC).
-
-   If no ``server`` argument is provided, ``delv`` consults
-   ``/etc/resolv.conf``; if an address is found there, it queries the
-   name server at that address. If either of the ``-4`` or ``-6``
-   options is in use, then only addresses for the corresponding
-   transport are tried. If no usable addresses are found, ``delv``
-   sends queries to the localhost addresses (127.0.0.1 for IPv4, ::1
-   for IPv6).
-
-``name``
-   is the domain name to be looked up.
-
-``type``
-   indicates what type of query is required - ANY, A, MX, etc.
-   ``type`` can be any valid query type. If no ``type`` argument is
-   supplied, ``delv`` performs a lookup for an A record.
-
-Options
-~~~~~~~
-
-``-a anchor-file``
-   This option specifies a file from which to read DNSSEC trust anchors. The default
-   is ``/etc/bind.keys``, which is included with BIND 9 and contains one
-   or more trust anchors for the root zone (".").
-
-   Keys that do not match the root zone name are ignored. An alternate
-   key name can be specified using the ``+root=NAME`` options.
-
-   Note: When reading the trust anchor file, ``delv`` treats ``trust-anchors``,
-   ``initial-key``, and ``static-key`` identically. That is, for a managed key,
-   it is the *initial* key that is trusted; :rfc:`5011` key management is not
-   supported. ``delv`` does not consult the managed-keys database maintained by
-   ``named``, which means that if either of the keys in ``/etc/bind.keys`` is
-   revoked and rolled over, ``/etc/bind.keys`` must be updated to
-   use DNSSEC validation in ``delv``.
-
-``-b address``
-   This option sets the source IP address of the query to ``address``. This must be
-   a valid address on one of the host's network interfaces, or ``0.0.0.0``,
-   or ``::``. An optional source port may be specified by appending
-   ``#<port>``
-
-``-c class``
-   This option sets the query class for the requested data. Currently, only class
-   "IN" is supported in ``delv`` and any other value is ignored.
-
-``-d level``
-   This option sets the systemwide debug level to ``level``. The allowed range is
-   from 0 to 99. The default is 0 (no debugging). Debugging traces from
-   ``delv`` become more verbose as the debug level increases. See the
-   ``+mtrace``, ``+rtrace``, and ``+vtrace`` options below for
-   additional debugging details.
-
-``-h``
-   This option displays the ``delv`` help usage output and exits.
-
-``-i``
-   This option sets insecure mode, which disables internal DNSSEC validation. (Note,
-   however, that this does not set the CD bit on upstream queries. If the
-   server being queried is performing DNSSEC validation, then it does
-   not return invalid data; this can cause ``delv`` to time out. When it
-   is necessary to examine invalid data to debug a DNSSEC problem, use
-   ``dig +cd``.)
-
-``-m``
-   This option enables memory usage debugging.
-
-``-p port#``
-   This option specifies a destination port to use for queries, instead of the
-   standard DNS port number 53. This option is used with a name
-   server that has been configured to listen for queries on a
-   non-standard port number.
-
-``-q name``
-   This option sets the query name to ``name``. While the query name can be
-   specified without using the ``-q`` option, it is sometimes necessary to
-   disambiguate names from types or classes (for example, when looking
-   up the name "ns", which could be misinterpreted as the type NS, or
-   "ch", which could be misinterpreted as class CH).
-
-``-t type``
-   This option sets the query type to ``type``, which can be any valid query type
-   supported in BIND 9 except for zone transfer types AXFR and IXFR. As
-   with ``-q``, this is useful to distinguish query-name types or classes
-   when they are ambiguous. It is sometimes necessary to disambiguate
-   names from types.
-
-   The default query type is "A", unless the ``-x`` option is supplied
-   to indicate a reverse lookup, in which case it is "PTR".
-
-``-v``
-   This option prints the ``delv`` version and exits.
-
-``-x addr``
-   This option performs a reverse lookup, mapping an address to a name. ``addr``
-   is an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal notation, or a colon-delimited
-   IPv6 address. When ``-x`` is used, there is no need to provide the
-   ``name`` or ``type`` arguments; ``delv`` automatically performs a
-   lookup for a name like ``11.12.13.10.in-addr.arpa`` and sets the
-   query type to PTR. IPv6 addresses are looked up using nibble format
-   under the IP6.ARPA domain.
-
-``-4``
-   This option forces ``delv`` to only use IPv4.
-
-``-6``
-   This option forces ``delv`` to only use IPv6.
-
-Query Options
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-``delv`` provides a number of query options which affect the way results
-are displayed, and in some cases the way lookups are performed.
-
-Each query option is identified by a keyword preceded by a plus sign
-(``+``). Some keywords set or reset an option. These may be preceded by
-the string ``no`` to negate the meaning of that keyword. Other keywords
-assign values to options like the timeout interval. They have the form
-``+keyword=value``. The query options are:
-
-``+[no]cdflag``
-   This option controls whether to set the CD (checking disabled) bit in queries
-   sent by ``delv``. This may be useful when troubleshooting DNSSEC
-   problems from behind a validating resolver. A validating resolver
-   blocks invalid responses, making it difficult to retrieve them
-   for analysis. Setting the CD flag on queries causes the resolver
-   to return invalid responses, which ``delv`` can then validate
-   internally and report the errors in detail.
-
-``+[no]class``
-   This option controls whether to display the CLASS when printing a record. The
-   default is to display the CLASS.
-
-``+[no]ttl``
-   This option controls whether to display the TTL when printing a record. The
-   default is to display the TTL.
-
-``+[no]rtrace``
-   This option toggles resolver fetch logging. This reports the name and type of each
-   query sent by ``delv`` in the process of carrying out the resolution
-   and validation process, including the original query
-   and all subsequent queries to follow CNAMEs and to establish a chain
-   of trust for DNSSEC validation.
-
-   This is equivalent to setting the debug level to 1 in the "resolver"
-   logging category. Setting the systemwide debug level to 1 using the
-   ``-d`` option produces the same output, but affects other
-   logging categories as well.
-
-``+[no]mtrace``
-   This option toggles message logging. This produces a detailed dump of the
-   responses received by ``delv`` in the process of carrying out the
-   resolution and validation process.
-
-   This is equivalent to setting the debug level to 10 for the "packets"
-   module of the "resolver" logging category. Setting the systemwide
-   debug level to 10 using the ``-d`` option produces the same
-   output, but affects other logging categories as well.
-
-``+[no]vtrace``
-   This option toggles validation logging. This shows the internal process of the
-   validator as it determines whether an answer is validly signed,
-   unsigned, or invalid.
-
-   This is equivalent to setting the debug level to 3 for the
-   "validator" module of the "dnssec" logging category. Setting the
-   systemwide debug level to 3 using the ``-d`` option produces the
-   same output, but affects other logging categories as well.
-
-``+[no]short``
-   This option toggles between verbose and terse answers. The default is to print the answer in a
-   verbose form.
-
-``+[no]comments``
-   This option toggles the display of comment lines in the output. The default is to
-   print comments.
-
-``+[no]rrcomments``
-   This option toggles the display of per-record comments in the output (for example,
-   human-readable key information about DNSKEY records). The default is
-   to print per-record comments.
-
-``+[no]crypto``
-   This option toggles the display of cryptographic fields in DNSSEC records. The
-   contents of these fields are unnecessary to debug most DNSSEC
-   validation failures and removing them makes it easier to see the
-   common failures. The default is to display the fields. When omitted,
-   they are replaced by the string ``[omitted]`` or, in the DNSKEY case, the
-   key ID is displayed as the replacement, e.g. ``[ key id = value ]``.
-
-``+[no]trust``
-   This option controls whether to display the trust level when printing a record.
-   The default is to display the trust level.
-
-``+[no]split[=W]``
-   This option splits long hex- or base64-formatted fields in resource records into
-   chunks of ``W`` characters (where ``W`` is rounded up to the nearest
-   multiple of 4). ``+nosplit`` or ``+split=0`` causes fields not to be
-   split at all. The default is 56 characters, or 44 characters when
-   multiline mode is active.
-
-``+[no]all``
-   This option sets or clears the display options ``+[no]comments``,
-   ``+[no]rrcomments``, and ``+[no]trust`` as a group.
-
-``+[no]multiline``
-   This option prints long records (such as RRSIG, DNSKEY, and SOA records) in a
-   verbose multi-line format with human-readable comments. The default
-   is to print each record on a single line, to facilitate machine
-   parsing of the ``delv`` output.
-
-``+[no]dnssec``
-   This option indicates whether to display RRSIG records in the ``delv`` output.
-   The default is to do so. Note that (unlike in ``dig``) this does
-   *not* control whether to request DNSSEC records or to
-   validate them. DNSSEC records are always requested, and validation
-   always occurs unless suppressed by the use of ``-i`` or
-   ``+noroot``.
-
-``+[no]root[=ROOT]``
-   This option indicates whether to perform conventional DNSSEC validation, and if so,
-   specifies the name of a trust anchor. The default is to validate using a
-   trust anchor of "." (the root zone), for which there is a built-in key. If
-   specifying a different trust anchor, then ``-a`` must be used to specify a
-   file containing the key.
-
-``+[no]tcp``
-   This option controls whether to use TCP when sending queries. The default is to
-   use UDP unless a truncated response has been received.
-
-``+[no]unknownformat``
-   This option prints all RDATA in unknown RR-type presentation format (:rfc:`3597`).
-   The default is to print RDATA for known types in the type's
-   presentation format.
-
-``+[no]yaml``
-   This option prints response data in YAML format.
-
-Files
-~~~~~
-
-``/etc/bind.keys``
-
-``/etc/resolv.conf``
-
-See Also
-~~~~~~~~
-
-:manpage:`dig(1)`, :manpage:`named(8)`, :rfc:`4034`, :rfc:`4035`, :rfc:`4431`, :rfc:`5074`, :rfc:`5155`.

bin/delv/win32/delv.vcxproj.in

@@ -44,20 +44,17 @@
     <LinkIncremental>true</LinkIncremental>
     <OutDir>..\..\..\Build\$(Configuration)\</OutDir>
     <IntDir>.\$(Configuration)\</IntDir>
-    <IntDirSharingDetected>None</IntDirSharingDetected>
   </PropertyGroup>
   <PropertyGroup Condition="'$(Configuration)|$(Platform)'=='Release|@PLATFORM@'">
     <LinkIncremental>false</LinkIncremental>
     <OutDir>..\..\..\Build\$(Configuration)\</OutDir>
     <IntDir>.\$(Configuration)\</IntDir>
-    <IntDirSharingDetected>None</IntDirSharingDetected>
   </PropertyGroup>
   <ItemDefinitionGroup Condition="'$(Configuration)|$(Platform)'=='Debug|@PLATFORM@'">
     <ClCompile>
       <PrecompiledHeader>
       </PrecompiledHeader>
-      <WarningLevel>Level4</WarningLevel>
-      <TreatWarningAsError>false</TreatWarningAsError>
+      <WarningLevel>Level3</WarningLevel>
       <Optimization>Disabled</Optimization>
       <PreprocessorDefinitions>WIN32;_DEBUG;_CONSOLE;%(PreprocessorDefinitions)</PreprocessorDefinitions>
       <FunctionLevelLinking>true</FunctionLevelLinking>
@@ -75,13 +72,12 @@
       <GenerateDebugInformation>true</GenerateDebugInformation>
       <OutputFile>..\..\..\Build\$(Configuration)\$(TargetName)$(TargetExt)</OutputFile>
       <AdditionalLibraryDirectories>..\..\..\lib\isc\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\dns\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\isccfg\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\irs\win32\$(Configuration);%(AdditionalLibraryDirectories)</AdditionalLibraryDirectories>
-      <AdditionalDependencies>@OPENSSL_LIBCRYPTO@@OPENSSL_LIBSSL@libisc.lib;libdns.lib;libisccfg.lib;libirs.lib;ws2_32.lib;%(AdditionalDependencies)</AdditionalDependencies>
+      <AdditionalDependencies>@OPENSSL_LIB@libisc.lib;libdns.lib;libisccfg.lib;libirs.lib;ws2_32.lib;%(AdditionalDependencies)</AdditionalDependencies>
     </Link>
   </ItemDefinitionGroup>
   <ItemDefinitionGroup Condition="'$(Configuration)|$(Platform)'=='Release|@PLATFORM@'">
     <ClCompile>
-      <WarningLevel>Level1</WarningLevel>
-      <TreatWarningAsError>true</TreatWarningAsError>
+      <WarningLevel>Level3</WarningLevel>
       <PrecompiledHeader>
       </PrecompiledHeader>
       <Optimization>MaxSpeed</Optimization>
@@ -107,7 +103,7 @@
       <OutputFile>..\..\..\Build\$(Configuration)\$(TargetName)$(TargetExt)</OutputFile>
       <LinkTimeCodeGeneration>Default</LinkTimeCodeGeneration>
       <AdditionalLibraryDirectories>..\..\..\lib\isc\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\dns\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\isccfg\win32\$(Configuration);..\..\..\lib\irs\win32\$(Configuration);%(AdditionalLibraryDirectories)</AdditionalLibraryDirectories>
-      <AdditionalDependencies>@OPENSSL_LIBCRYPTO@@OPENSSL_LIBSSL@libisc.lib;libdns.lib;libisccfg.lib;libirs.lib;ws2_32.lib;%(AdditionalDependencies)</AdditionalDependencies>
+      <AdditionalDependencies>@OPENSSL_LIB@libisc.lib;libdns.lib;libisccfg.lib;libirs.lib;ws2_32.lib;%(AdditionalDependencies)</AdditionalDependencies>
     </Link>
   </ItemDefinitionGroup>
   <ItemGroup>

bin/dig/Makefile.in

@@ -1,10 +1,8 @@
 # Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
 #
-# SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
-#
 # This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
-# License, v. 2.0.  If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
-# file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+# License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+# file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
 #
 # See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
 # information regarding copyright ownership.
@@ -28,10 +26,9 @@ CDEFINES =	-DVERSION=\"${VERSION}\"
 CWARNINGS =
 
 ISCCFGLIBS =	../../lib/isccfg/libisccfg.@A@
-DNSLIBS =	../../lib/dns/libdns.@A@ @NO_LIBTOOL_DNSLIBS@
+DNSLIBS =	../../lib/dns/libdns.@A@ ${MAXMINDDB_LIBS} @DNS_CRYPTO_LIBS@
 BIND9LIBS =	../../lib/bind9/libbind9.@A@
-ISCLIBS =	../../lib/isc/libisc.@A@ @NO_LIBTOOL_ISCLIBS@
-ISCNOSYMLIBS =	../../lib/isc/libisc-nosymtbl.@A@ @NO_LIBTOOL_ISCLIBS@
+ISCLIBS =	../../lib/isc/libisc.@A@ ${OPENSSL_LIBS} ${JSON_C_LIBS} ${LIBXML2_LIBS} ${ZLIB_LIBS}
 IRSLIBS =	../../lib/irs/libirs.@A@
 
 ISCCFGDEPLIBS =	../../lib/isccfg/libisccfg.@A@
@@ -46,9 +43,6 @@ DEPLIBS =	${DNSDEPLIBS} ${IRSDEPLIBS} ${BIND9DEPLIBS} \
 LIBS =		${DNSLIBS} ${IRSLIBS} ${BIND9LIBS} ${ISCCFGLIBS} \
 		${ISCLIBS} @LIBIDN2_LIBS@ @LIBS@
 
-NOSYMLIBS =	${DNSLIBS} ${IRSLIBS} ${BIND9LIBS} ${ISCCFGLIBS} \
-		${ISCNOSYMLIBS} @LIBIDN2_LIBS@ @LIBS@
-
 SUBDIRS =
 
 TARGETS =	dig@EXEEXT@ host@EXEEXT@ nslookup@EXEEXT@
@@ -59,6 +53,12 @@ UOBJS =
 
 SRCS =		dig.c dighost.c host.c nslookup.c
 
+MANPAGES =	dig.1 host.1 nslookup.1
+
+HTMLPAGES =	dig.html host.html nslookup.html
+
+MANOBJS =	${MANPAGES} ${HTMLPAGES}
+
 @BIND9_MAKE_RULES@
 
 LDFLAGS =	@LDFLAGS@ @LIBIDN2_LDFLAGS@
@@ -78,11 +78,17 @@ nslookup@EXEEXT@: nslookup.@O@ dighost.@O@ ${UOBJS} ${DEPLIBS}
 	export LIBS0="${DNSLIBS} ${IRSLIBS}"; \
 	${FINALBUILDCMD}
 
+doc man:: ${MANOBJS}
+
+docclean manclean maintainer-clean::
+	rm -f ${MANOBJS}
+
 clean distclean maintainer-clean::
 	rm -f ${TARGETS}
 
 installdirs:
 	$(SHELL) ${top_srcdir}/mkinstalldirs ${DESTDIR}${bindir}
+	$(SHELL) ${top_srcdir}/mkinstalldirs ${DESTDIR}${mandir}/man1
 
 install:: dig@EXEEXT@ host@EXEEXT@ nslookup@EXEEXT@ installdirs
 	${LIBTOOL_MODE_INSTALL} ${INSTALL_PROGRAM} \
@@ -91,8 +97,14 @@ install:: dig@EXEEXT@ host@EXEEXT@ nslookup@EXEEXT@ installdirs
 		host@EXEEXT@ ${DESTDIR}${bindir}
 	${LIBTOOL_MODE_INSTALL} ${INSTALL_PROGRAM} \
 		nslookup@EXEEXT@ ${DESTDIR}${bindir}
+	for m in ${MANPAGES}; do \
+		${INSTALL_DATA} ${srcdir}/$$m ${DESTDIR}${mandir}/man1 || exit 1; \
+	done
 
 uninstall::
+	for m in ${MANPAGES}; do \
+		rm -f ${DESTDIR}${mandir}/man1/$$m || exit 1; \
+	done
 	${LIBTOOL_MODE_UNINSTALL} rm -f ${DESTDIR}${bindir}/nslookup@EXEEXT@
 	${LIBTOOL_MODE_UNINSTALL} rm -f ${DESTDIR}${bindir}/host@EXEEXT@
 	${LIBTOOL_MODE_UNINSTALL} rm -f ${DESTDIR}${bindir}/dig@EXEEXT@

bin/dig/dig.1

@@ -0,0 +1,853 @@
+.\" Copyright (C) 2000-2011, 2013-2020 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.\" 
+.\" This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
+.\" License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+.\" file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+.\"
+.hy 0
+.ad l
+'\" t
+.\"     Title: dig
+.\"    Author: 
+.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.78.1 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
+.\"      Date: 2014-02-19
+.\"    Manual: BIND9
+.\"    Source: ISC
+.\"  Language: English
+.\"
+.TH "DIG" "1" "2014\-02\-19" "ISC" "BIND9"
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" * Define some portability stuff
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+.\" http://bugs.debian.org/507673
+.\" http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/groff/2009-02/msg00013.html
+.\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq
+.el       .ds Aq '
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" * set default formatting
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" disable hyphenation
+.nh
+.\" disable justification (adjust text to left margin only)
+.ad l
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.SH "NAME"
+dig \- DNS lookup utility
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.HP \w'\fBdig\fR\ 'u
+\fBdig\fR [@server] [\fB\-b\ \fR\fB\fIaddress\fR\fR] [\fB\-c\ \fR\fB\fIclass\fR\fR] [\fB\-f\ \fR\fB\fIfilename\fR\fR] [\fB\-k\ \fR\fB\fIfilename\fR\fR] [\fB\-m\fR] [\fB\-p\ \fR\fB\fIport#\fR\fR] [\fB\-q\ \fR\fB\fIname\fR\fR] [\fB\-t\ \fR\fB\fItype\fR\fR] [\fB\-v\fR] [\fB\-x\ \fR\fB\fIaddr\fR\fR] [\fB\-y\ \fR\fB\fI[hmac:]\fR\fIname:key\fR\fR] [[\fB\-4\fR] | [\fB\-6\fR]] [name] [type] [class] [queryopt...]
+.HP \w'\fBdig\fR\ 'u
+\fBdig\fR [\fB\-h\fR]
+.HP \w'\fBdig\fR\ 'u
+\fBdig\fR [global\-queryopt...] [query...]
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBdig\fR
+is a flexible tool for interrogating DNS name servers\&. It performs DNS lookups and displays the answers that are returned from the name server(s) that were queried\&. Most DNS administrators use
+\fBdig\fR
+to troubleshoot DNS problems because of its flexibility, ease of use and clarity of output\&. Other lookup tools tend to have less functionality than
+\fBdig\fR\&.
+.PP
+Although
+\fBdig\fR
+is normally used with command\-line arguments, it also has a batch mode of operation for reading lookup requests from a file\&. A brief summary of its command\-line arguments and options is printed when the
+\fB\-h\fR
+option is given\&. Unlike earlier versions, the BIND 9 implementation of
+\fBdig\fR
+allows multiple lookups to be issued from the command line\&.
+.PP
+Unless it is told to query a specific name server,
+\fBdig\fR
+will try each of the servers listed in
+/etc/resolv\&.conf\&. If no usable server addresses are found,
+\fBdig\fR
+will send the query to the local host\&.
+.PP
+When no command line arguments or options are given,
+\fBdig\fR
+will perform an NS query for "\&." (the root)\&.
+.PP
+It is possible to set per\-user defaults for
+\fBdig\fR
+via
+${HOME}/\&.digrc\&. This file is read and any options in it are applied before the command line arguments\&. The
+\fB\-r\fR
+option disables this feature, for scripts that need predictable behaviour\&.
+.PP
+The IN and CH class names overlap with the IN and CH top level domain names\&. Either use the
+\fB\-t\fR
+and
+\fB\-c\fR
+options to specify the type and class, use the
+\fB\-q\fR
+the specify the domain name, or use "IN\&." and "CH\&." when looking up these top level domains\&.
+.SH "SIMPLE USAGE"
+.PP
+A typical invocation of
+\fBdig\fR
+looks like:
+.sp
+.if n \{\
+.RS 4
+.\}
+.nf
+ dig @server name type 
+.fi
+.if n \{\
+.RE
+.\}
+.sp
+where:
+.PP
+\fBserver\fR
+.RS 4
+is the name or IP address of the name server to query\&. This can be an IPv4 address in dotted\-decimal notation or an IPv6 address in colon\-delimited notation\&. When the supplied
+\fIserver\fR
+argument is a hostname,
+\fBdig\fR
+resolves that name before querying that name server\&.
+.sp
+If no
+\fIserver\fR
+argument is provided,
+\fBdig\fR
+consults
+/etc/resolv\&.conf; if an address is found there, it queries the name server at that address\&. If either of the
+\fB\-4\fR
+or
+\fB\-6\fR
+options are in use, then only addresses for the corresponding transport will be tried\&. If no usable addresses are found,
+\fBdig\fR
+will send the query to the local host\&. The reply from the name server that responds is displayed\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fBname\fR
+.RS 4
+is the name of the resource record that is to be looked up\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fBtype\fR
+.RS 4
+indicates what type of query is required \(em ANY, A, MX, SIG, etc\&.
+\fItype\fR
+can be any valid query type\&. If no
+\fItype\fR
+argument is supplied,
+\fBdig\fR
+will perform a lookup for an A record\&.
+.RE
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.PP
+\-4
+.RS 4
+Use IPv4 only\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-6
+.RS 4
+Use IPv6 only\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-b \fIaddress\fR\fI[#port]\fR
+.RS 4
+Set the source IP address of the query\&. The
+\fIaddress\fR
+must be a valid address on one of the host\*(Aqs network interfaces, or "0\&.0\&.0\&.0" or "::"\&. An optional port may be specified by appending "#<port>"
+.RE
+.PP
+\-c \fIclass\fR
+.RS 4
+Set the query class\&. The default
+\fIclass\fR
+is IN; other classes are HS for Hesiod records or CH for Chaosnet records\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-f \fIfile\fR
+.RS 4
+Batch mode:
+\fBdig\fR
+reads a list of lookup requests to process from the given
+\fIfile\fR\&. Each line in the file should be organized in the same way they would be presented as queries to
+\fBdig\fR
+using the command\-line interface\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-k \fIkeyfile\fR
+.RS 4
+Sign queries using TSIG using a key read from the given file\&. Key files can be generated using
+\fBtsig-keygen\fR(8)\&. When using TSIG authentication with
+\fBdig\fR, the name server that is queried needs to know the key and algorithm that is being used\&. In BIND, this is done by providing appropriate
+\fBkey\fR
+and
+\fBserver\fR
+statements in
+named\&.conf\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-m
+.RS 4
+Enable memory usage debugging\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-p \fIport\fR
+.RS 4
+Send the query to a non\-standard port on the server, instead of the default port 53\&. This option would be used to test a name server that has been configured to listen for queries on a non\-standard port number\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-q \fIname\fR
+.RS 4
+The domain name to query\&. This is useful to distinguish the
+\fIname\fR
+from other arguments\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-r
+.RS 4
+Do not read options from
+${HOME}/\&.digrc\&. This is useful for scripts that need predictable behaviour\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-t \fItype\fR
+.RS 4
+The resource record type to query\&. It can be any valid query type\&. If it is a resource record type supported in BIND 9, it can be given by the type mnemonic (such as "NS" or "AAAA")\&. The default query type is "A", unless the
+\fB\-x\fR
+option is supplied to indicate a reverse lookup\&. A zone transfer can be requested by specifying a type of AXFR\&. When an incremental zone transfer (IXFR) is required, set the
+\fItype\fR
+to
+ixfr=N\&. The incremental zone transfer will contain the changes made to the zone since the serial number in the zone\*(Aqs SOA record was
+\fIN\fR\&.
+.sp
+All resource record types can be expressed as "TYPEnn", where "nn" is the number of the type\&. If the resource record type is not supported in BIND 9, the result will be displayed as described in RFC 3597\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-u
+.RS 4
+Print query times in microseconds instead of milliseconds\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-v
+.RS 4
+Print the version number and exit\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-x \fIaddr\fR
+.RS 4
+Simplified reverse lookups, for mapping addresses to names\&. The
+\fIaddr\fR
+is an IPv4 address in dotted\-decimal notation, or a colon\-delimited IPv6 address\&. When the
+\fB\-x\fR
+is used, there is no need to provide the
+\fIname\fR,
+\fIclass\fR
+and
+\fItype\fR
+arguments\&.
+\fBdig\fR
+automatically performs a lookup for a name like
+94\&.2\&.0\&.192\&.in\-addr\&.arpa
+and sets the query type and class to PTR and IN respectively\&. IPv6 addresses are looked up using nibble format under the IP6\&.ARPA domain\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-y \fI[hmac:]\fR\fIkeyname:secret\fR
+.RS 4
+Sign queries using TSIG with the given authentication key\&.
+\fIkeyname\fR
+is the name of the key, and
+\fIsecret\fR
+is the base64 encoded shared secret\&.
+\fIhmac\fR
+is the name of the key algorithm; valid choices are
+hmac\-md5,
+hmac\-sha1,
+hmac\-sha224,
+hmac\-sha256,
+hmac\-sha384, or
+hmac\-sha512\&. If
+\fIhmac\fR
+is not specified, the default is
+hmac\-md5
+or if MD5 was disabled
+hmac\-sha256\&.
+.sp
+NOTE: You should use the
+\fB\-k\fR
+option and avoid the
+\fB\-y\fR
+option, because with
+\fB\-y\fR
+the shared secret is supplied as a command line argument in clear text\&. This may be visible in the output from
+\fBps\fR(1)
+or in a history file maintained by the user\*(Aqs shell\&.
+.RE
+.SH "QUERY OPTIONS"
+.PP
+\fBdig\fR
+provides a number of query options which affect the way in which lookups are made and the results displayed\&. Some of these set or reset flag bits in the query header, some determine which sections of the answer get printed, and others determine the timeout and retry strategies\&.
+.PP
+Each query option is identified by a keyword preceded by a plus sign (+)\&. Some keywords set or reset an option\&. These may be preceded by the string
+no
+to negate the meaning of that keyword\&. Other keywords assign values to options like the timeout interval\&. They have the form
+\fB+keyword=value\fR\&. Keywords may be abbreviated, provided the abbreviation is unambiguous; for example,
++cd
+is equivalent to
++cdflag\&. The query options are:
+.PP
+\fB+[no]aaflag\fR
+.RS 4
+A synonym for
+\fI+[no]aaonly\fR\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]aaonly\fR
+.RS 4
+Sets the "aa" flag in the query\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]additional\fR
+.RS 4
+Display [do not display] the additional section of a reply\&. The default is to display it\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]adflag\fR
+.RS 4
+Set [do not set] the AD (authentic data) bit in the query\&. This requests the server to return whether all of the answer and authority sections have all been validated as secure according to the security policy of the server\&. AD=1 indicates that all records have been validated as secure and the answer is not from a OPT\-OUT range\&. AD=0 indicate that some part of the answer was insecure or not validated\&. This bit is set by default\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]all\fR
+.RS 4
+Set or clear all display flags\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]answer\fR
+.RS 4
+Display [do not display] the answer section of a reply\&. The default is to display it\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]authority\fR
+.RS 4
+Display [do not display] the authority section of a reply\&. The default is to display it\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]badcookie\fR
+.RS 4
+Retry lookup with the new server cookie if a BADCOOKIE response is received\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]besteffort\fR
+.RS 4
+Attempt to display the contents of messages which are malformed\&. The default is to not display malformed answers\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+bufsize=B\fR
+.RS 4
+Set the UDP message buffer size advertised using EDNS0 to
+\fIB\fR
+bytes\&. The maximum and minimum sizes of this buffer are 65535 and 0 respectively\&. Values outside this range are rounded up or down appropriately\&. Values other than zero will cause a EDNS query to be sent\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]cdflag\fR
+.RS 4
+Set [do not set] the CD (checking disabled) bit in the query\&. This requests the server to not perform DNSSEC validation of responses\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]class\fR
+.RS 4
+Display [do not display] the CLASS when printing the record\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]cmd\fR
+.RS 4
+Toggles the printing of the initial comment in the output, identifying the version of
+\fBdig\fR
+and the query options that have been applied\&. This option always has global effect; it cannot be set globally and then overridden on a per\-lookup basis\&. The default is to print this comment\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]comments\fR
+.RS 4
+Toggles the display of some comment lines in the output, containing information about the packet header and OPT pseudosection, and the names of the response section\&. The default is to print these comments\&.
+.sp
+Other types of comments in the output are not affected by this option, but can be controlled using other command line switches\&. These include
+\fB+[no]cmd\fR,
+\fB+[no]question\fR,
+\fB+[no]stats\fR, and
+\fB+[no]rrcomments\fR\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]cookie\fR\fB[=####]\fR
+.RS 4
+Send a COOKIE EDNS option, with optional value\&. Replaying a COOKIE from a previous response will allow the server to identify a previous client\&. The default is
+\fB+cookie\fR\&.
+.sp
+\fB+cookie\fR
+is also set when +trace is set to better emulate the default queries from a nameserver\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]crypto\fR
+.RS 4
+Toggle the display of cryptographic fields in DNSSEC records\&. The contents of these field are unnecessary to debug most DNSSEC validation failures and removing them makes it easier to see the common failures\&. The default is to display the fields\&. When omitted they are replaced by the string "[omitted]" or in the DNSKEY case the key id is displayed as the replacement, e\&.g\&. "[ key id = value ]"\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]defname\fR
+.RS 4
+Deprecated, treated as a synonym for
+\fI+[no]search\fR
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]dnssec\fR
+.RS 4
+Requests DNSSEC records be sent by setting the DNSSEC OK bit (DO) in the OPT record in the additional section of the query\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+domain=somename\fR
+.RS 4
+Set the search list to contain the single domain
+\fIsomename\fR, as if specified in a
+\fBdomain\fR
+directive in
+/etc/resolv\&.conf, and enable search list processing as if the
+\fI+search\fR
+option were given\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+dscp=value\fR
+.RS 4
+Set the DSCP code point to be used when sending the query\&. Valid DSCP code points are in the range [0\&.\&.63]\&. By default no code point is explicitly set\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]edns[=#]\fR
+.RS 4
+Specify the EDNS version to query with\&. Valid values are 0 to 255\&. Setting the EDNS version will cause a EDNS query to be sent\&.
+\fB+noedns\fR
+clears the remembered EDNS version\&. EDNS is set to 0 by default\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]ednsflags[=#]\fR
+.RS 4
+Set the must\-be\-zero EDNS flags bits (Z bits) to the specified value\&. Decimal, hex and octal encodings are accepted\&. Setting a named flag (e\&.g\&. DO) will silently be ignored\&. By default, no Z bits are set\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]ednsnegotiation\fR
+.RS 4
+Enable / disable EDNS version negotiation\&. By default EDNS version negotiation is enabled\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]ednsopt[=code[:value]]\fR
+.RS 4
+Specify EDNS option with code point
+\fBcode\fR
+and optionally payload of
+\fBvalue\fR
+as a hexadecimal string\&.
+\fBcode\fR
+can be either an EDNS option name (for example,
+NSID
+or
+ECS), or an arbitrary numeric value\&.
+\fB+noednsopt\fR
+clears the EDNS options to be sent\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]expire\fR
+.RS 4
+Send an EDNS Expire option\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]expandaaaa\fR
+.RS 4
+When printing AAAA record print all zero nibbles rather than the default RFC 5952 preferred presentation format\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]fail\fR
+.RS 4
+Do not try the next server if you receive a SERVFAIL\&. The default is to not try the next server which is the reverse of normal stub resolver behavior\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]header\-only\fR
+.RS 4
+Send a query with a DNS header without a question section\&. The default is to add a question section\&. The query type and query name are ignored when this is set\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]identify\fR
+.RS 4
+Show [or do not show] the IP address and port number that supplied the answer when the
+\fI+short\fR
+option is enabled\&. If short form answers are requested, the default is not to show the source address and port number of the server that provided the answer\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]idnin\fR
+.RS 4
+Process [do not process] IDN domain names on input\&. This requires IDN SUPPORT to have been enabled at compile time\&.
+.sp
+The default is to process IDN input when standard output is a tty\&. The IDN processing on input is disabled when dig output is redirected to files, pipes, and other non\-tty file descriptors\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]idnout\fR
+.RS 4
+Convert [do not convert] puny code on output\&. This requires IDN SUPPORT to have been enabled at compile time\&.
+.sp
+The default is to process puny code on output when standard output is a tty\&. The puny code processing on output is disabled when dig output is redirected to files, pipes, and other non\-tty file descriptors\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]ignore\fR
+.RS 4
+Ignore truncation in UDP responses instead of retrying with TCP\&. By default, TCP retries are performed\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]keepalive\fR
+.RS 4
+Send [or do not send] an EDNS Keepalive option\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]keepopen\fR
+.RS 4
+Keep the TCP socket open between queries and reuse it rather than creating a new TCP socket for each lookup\&. The default is
+\fB+nokeepopen\fR\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]mapped\fR
+.RS 4
+Allow mapped IPv4 over IPv6 addresses to be used\&. The default is
+\fB+mapped\fR\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]multiline\fR
+.RS 4
+Print records like the SOA records in a verbose multi\-line format with human\-readable comments\&. The default is to print each record on a single line, to facilitate machine parsing of the
+\fBdig\fR
+output\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+ndots=D\fR
+.RS 4
+Set the number of dots that have to appear in
+\fIname\fR
+to
+\fID\fR
+for it to be considered absolute\&. The default value is that defined using the ndots statement in
+/etc/resolv\&.conf, or 1 if no ndots statement is present\&. Names with fewer dots are interpreted as relative names and will be searched for in the domains listed in the
+\fBsearch\fR
+or
+\fBdomain\fR
+directive in
+/etc/resolv\&.conf
+if
+\fB+search\fR
+is set\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]nsid\fR
+.RS 4
+Include an EDNS name server ID request when sending a query\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]nssearch\fR
+.RS 4
+When this option is set,
+\fBdig\fR
+attempts to find the authoritative name servers for the zone containing the name being looked up and display the SOA record that each name server has for the zone\&. Addresses of servers that that did not respond are also printed\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]onesoa\fR
+.RS 4
+Print only one (starting) SOA record when performing an AXFR\&. The default is to print both the starting and ending SOA records\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]opcode=value\fR
+.RS 4
+Set [restore] the DNS message opcode to the specified value\&. The default value is QUERY (0)\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+padding=value\fR
+.RS 4
+Pad the size of the query packet using the EDNS Padding option to blocks of
+\fIvalue\fR
+bytes\&. For example,
+\fB+padding=32\fR
+would cause a 48\-byte query to be padded to 64 bytes\&. The default block size is 0, which disables padding\&. The maximum is 512\&. Values are ordinarily expected to be powers of two, such as 128; however, this is not mandatory\&. Responses to padded queries may also be padded, but only if the query uses TCP or DNS COOKIE\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]qr\fR
+.RS 4
+Toggles the display of the query message as it is sent\&. By default, the query is not printed\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]question\fR
+.RS 4
+Toggles the display of the question section of a query when an answer is returned\&. The default is to print the question section as a comment\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]raflag\fR
+.RS 4
+Set [do not set] the RA (Recursion Available) bit in the query\&. The default is +noraflag\&. This bit should be ignored by the server for QUERY\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]rdflag\fR
+.RS 4
+A synonym for
+\fI+[no]recurse\fR\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]recurse\fR
+.RS 4
+Toggle the setting of the RD (recursion desired) bit in the query\&. This bit is set by default, which means
+\fBdig\fR
+normally sends recursive queries\&. Recursion is automatically disabled when using the
+\fI+nssearch\fR
+option, and when using
+\fI+trace\fR
+except for an initial recursive query to get the list of root servers\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+retry=T\fR
+.RS 4
+Sets the number of times to retry UDP queries to server to
+\fIT\fR
+instead of the default, 2\&. Unlike
+\fI+tries\fR, this does not include the initial query\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]rrcomments\fR
+.RS 4
+Toggle the display of per\-record comments in the output (for example, human\-readable key information about DNSKEY records)\&. The default is not to print record comments unless multiline mode is active\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]search\fR
+.RS 4
+Use [do not use] the search list defined by the searchlist or domain directive in
+resolv\&.conf
+(if any)\&. The search list is not used by default\&.
+.sp
+\*(Aqndots\*(Aq from
+resolv\&.conf
+(default 1) which may be overridden by
+\fI+ndots\fR
+determines if the name will be treated as relative or not and hence whether a search is eventually performed or not\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]short\fR
+.RS 4
+Provide a terse answer\&. The default is to print the answer in a verbose form\&. This option always has global effect; it cannot be set globally and then overridden on a per\-lookup basis\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]showsearch\fR
+.RS 4
+Perform [do not perform] a search showing intermediate results\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]sigchase\fR
+.RS 4
+This feature is now obsolete and has been removed; use
+\fBdelv\fR
+instead\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+split=W\fR
+.RS 4
+Split long hex\- or base64\-formatted fields in resource records into chunks of
+\fIW\fR
+characters (where
+\fIW\fR
+is rounded up to the nearest multiple of 4)\&.
+\fI+nosplit\fR
+or
+\fI+split=0\fR
+causes fields not to be split at all\&. The default is 56 characters, or 44 characters when multiline mode is active\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]stats\fR
+.RS 4
+Toggles the printing of statistics: when the query was made, the size of the reply and so on\&. The default behavior is to print the query statistics as a comment after each lookup\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]subnet=addr[/prefix\-length]\fR
+.RS 4
+Send (don\*(Aqt send) an EDNS Client Subnet option with the specified IP address or network prefix\&.
+.sp
+\fBdig +subnet=0\&.0\&.0\&.0/0\fR, or simply
+\fBdig +subnet=0\fR
+for short, sends an EDNS CLIENT\-SUBNET option with an empty address and a source prefix\-length of zero, which signals a resolver that the client\*(Aqs address information must
+\fInot\fR
+be used when resolving this query\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]tcflag\fR
+.RS 4
+Set [do not set] the TC (TrunCation) bit in the query\&. The default is +notcflag\&. This bit should be ignored by the server for QUERY\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]tcp\fR
+.RS 4
+Use [do not use] TCP when querying name servers\&. The default behavior is to use UDP unless a type
+any
+or
+ixfr=N
+query is requested, in which case the default is TCP\&. AXFR queries always use TCP\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+timeout=T\fR
+.RS 4
+Sets the timeout for a query to
+\fIT\fR
+seconds\&. The default timeout is 5 seconds\&. An attempt to set
+\fIT\fR
+to less than 1 will result in a query timeout of 1 second being applied\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]topdown\fR
+.RS 4
+This feature is related to
+\fBdig +sigchase\fR, which is obsolete and has been removed\&. Use
+\fBdelv\fR
+instead\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]trace\fR
+.RS 4
+Toggle tracing of the delegation path from the root name servers for the name being looked up\&. Tracing is disabled by default\&. When tracing is enabled,
+\fBdig\fR
+makes iterative queries to resolve the name being looked up\&. It will follow referrals from the root servers, showing the answer from each server that was used to resolve the lookup\&.
+.sp
+If @server is also specified, it affects only the initial query for the root zone name servers\&.
+.sp
+\fB+dnssec\fR
+is also set when +trace is set to better emulate the default queries from a nameserver\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+tries=T\fR
+.RS 4
+Sets the number of times to try UDP queries to server to
+\fIT\fR
+instead of the default, 3\&. If
+\fIT\fR
+is less than or equal to zero, the number of tries is silently rounded up to 1\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+trusted\-key=####\fR
+.RS 4
+Formerly specified trusted keys for use with
+\fBdig +sigchase\fR\&. This feature is now obsolete and has been removed; use
+\fBdelv\fR
+instead\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]ttlid\fR
+.RS 4
+Display [do not display] the TTL when printing the record\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]ttlunits\fR
+.RS 4
+Display [do not display] the TTL in friendly human\-readable time units of "s", "m", "h", "d", and "w", representing seconds, minutes, hours, days and weeks\&. Implies +ttlid\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]unexpected\fR
+.RS 4
+Accept [do not accept] answers from unexpected sources\&. By default,
+\fBdig\fR
+won\*(Aqt accept a reply from a source other than the one to which it sent the query\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]unknownformat\fR
+.RS 4
+Print all RDATA in unknown RR type presentation format (RFC 3597)\&. The default is to print RDATA for known types in the type\*(Aqs presentation format\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]vc\fR
+.RS 4
+Use [do not use] TCP when querying name servers\&. This alternate syntax to
+\fI+[no]tcp\fR
+is provided for backwards compatibility\&. The "vc" stands for "virtual circuit"\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]yaml\fR
+.RS 4
+Print the responses (and, if
+\fB+qr\fR
+is in use, also the outgoing queries) in a detailed YAML format\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB+[no]zflag\fR
+.RS 4
+Set [do not set] the last unassigned DNS header flag in a DNS query\&. This flag is off by default\&.
+.RE
+.SH "MULTIPLE QUERIES"
+.PP
+The BIND 9 implementation of
+\fBdig \fR
+supports specifying multiple queries on the command line (in addition to supporting the
+\fB\-f\fR
+batch file option)\&. Each of those queries can be supplied with its own set of flags, options and query options\&.
+.PP
+In this case, each
+\fIquery\fR
+argument represent an individual query in the command\-line syntax described above\&. Each consists of any of the standard options and flags, the name to be looked up, an optional query type and class and any query options that should be applied to that query\&.
+.PP
+A global set of query options, which should be applied to all queries, can also be supplied\&. These global query options must precede the first tuple of name, class, type, options, flags, and query options supplied on the command line\&. Any global query options (except
+\fB+[no]cmd\fR
+and
+\fB+[no]short\fR
+options) can be overridden by a query\-specific set of query options\&. For example:
+.sp
+.if n \{\
+.RS 4
+.\}
+.nf
+dig +qr www\&.isc\&.org any \-x 127\&.0\&.0\&.1 isc\&.org ns +noqr
+.fi
+.if n \{\
+.RE
+.\}
+.sp
+shows how
+\fBdig\fR
+could be used from the command line to make three lookups: an ANY query for
+www\&.isc\&.org, a reverse lookup of 127\&.0\&.0\&.1 and a query for the NS records of
+isc\&.org\&. A global query option of
+\fI+qr\fR
+is applied, so that
+\fBdig\fR
+shows the initial query it made for each lookup\&. The final query has a local query option of
+\fI+noqr\fR
+which means that
+\fBdig\fR
+will not print the initial query when it looks up the NS records for
+isc\&.org\&.
+.SH "IDN SUPPORT"
+.PP
+If
+\fBdig\fR
+has been built with IDN (internationalized domain name) support, it can accept and display non\-ASCII domain names\&.
+\fBdig\fR
+appropriately converts character encoding of domain name before sending a request to DNS server or displaying a reply from the server\&. If you\*(Aqd like to turn off the IDN support for some reason, use parameters
+\fI+noidnin\fR
+and
+\fI+noidnout\fR
+or define the
+\fBIDN_DISABLE\fR
+environment variable\&.
+.SH "FILES"
+.PP
+/etc/resolv\&.conf
+.PP
+${HOME}/\&.digrc
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBdelv\fR(1),
+\fBhost\fR(1),
+\fBnamed\fR(8),
+\fBdnssec-keygen\fR(8),
+RFC 1035\&.
+.SH "BUGS"
+.PP
+There are probably too many query options\&.
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+\fBInternet Systems Consortium, Inc\&.\fR
+.SH "COPYRIGHT"
+.br
+Copyright \(co 2000-2011, 2013-2020 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.br

bin/dig/dig.c

@@ -1,11 +1,9 @@
 /*
  * Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
  *
- * SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
- *
  * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
  * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
- * file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+ * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
  *
  * See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
  * information regarding copyright ownership.
@@ -48,7 +46,7 @@
 #define ADD_STRING(b, s)                                          \
 	{                                                         \
 		if (strlen(s) >= isc_buffer_availablelength(b)) { \
-			return (ISC_R_NOSPACE);                   \
+			return ((((ISC_R_NOSPACE))));             \
 		} else {                                          \
 			isc_buffer_putstr(b, s);                  \
 		}                                                 \
@@ -58,7 +56,7 @@
 
 dig_lookup_t *default_lookup = NULL;
 
-static atomic_uintptr_t batchname = 0;
+static atomic_uintptr_t batchname = ATOMIC_VAR_INIT(0);
 static FILE *batchfp = NULL;
 static char *argv0;
 static int addresscount = 0;
@@ -181,7 +179,7 @@ help(void) {
 	      "responses)\n"
 	      "                 +[no]besteffort     (Try to parse even illegal "
 	      "messages)\n"
-	      "                 +bufsize[=###]      (Set EDNS0 Max UDP packet "
+	      "                 +bufsize=###        (Set EDNS0 Max UDP packet "
 	      "size)\n"
 	      "                 +[no]cdflag         (Set checking disabled "
 	      "flag in query)\n"
@@ -668,25 +666,15 @@ printmessage(dig_query_t *query, const isc_buffer_t *msgbuf, dns_message_t *msg,
 
 		if (!isc_time_isepoch(&query->time_sent)) {
 			char tbuf[100];
-			if (query->lookup->use_usec) {
-				isc_time_formatISO8601us(&query->time_sent,
-							 tbuf, sizeof(tbuf));
-			} else {
-				isc_time_formatISO8601ms(&query->time_sent,
-							 tbuf, sizeof(tbuf));
-			}
+			isc_time_formatISO8601ms(&query->time_sent, tbuf,
+						 sizeof(tbuf));
 			printf("    query_time: !!timestamp %s\n", tbuf);
 		}
 
 		if (!isquery && !isc_time_isepoch(&query->time_recv)) {
 			char tbuf[100];
-			if (query->lookup->use_usec) {
-				isc_time_formatISO8601us(&query->time_recv,
-							 tbuf, sizeof(tbuf));
-			} else {
-				isc_time_formatISO8601ms(&query->time_recv,
-							 tbuf, sizeof(tbuf));
-			}
+			isc_time_formatISO8601ms(&query->time_recv, tbuf,
+						 sizeof(tbuf));
 			printf("    response_time: !!timestamp %s\n", tbuf);
 		}
 
@@ -712,7 +700,7 @@ printmessage(dig_query_t *query, const isc_buffer_t *msgbuf, dns_message_t *msg,
 				strlcat(sockstr, "0", sizeof(sockstr));
 			}
 
-			printf("    response_address: \"%s\"\n", sockstr);
+			printf("    response_address: %s\n", sockstr);
 			printf("    response_port: %u\n", sport);
 		}
 
@@ -730,7 +718,7 @@ printmessage(dig_query_t *query, const isc_buffer_t *msgbuf, dns_message_t *msg,
 				strlcat(sockstr, "0", sizeof(sockstr));
 			}
 
-			printf("    query_address: \"%s\"\n", sockstr);
+			printf("    query_address: %s\n", sockstr);
 			printf("    query_port: %u\n", sport);
 		}
 
@@ -1049,13 +1037,12 @@ plus_option(char *option, bool is_batchfile, dig_lookup_t *lookup) {
 			break;
 		case 'u': /* bufsize */
 			FULLCHECK("bufsize");
+			if (value == NULL) {
+				goto need_value;
+			}
 			if (!state) {
 				goto invalid_option;
 			}
-			if (value == NULL) {
-				lookup->udpsize = DEFAULT_EDNS_BUFSIZE;
-				break;
-			}
 			result = parse_uint(&num, value, COMMSIZE,
 					    "buffer size");
 			if (result != ISC_R_SUCCESS) {
@@ -1063,9 +1050,6 @@ plus_option(char *option, bool is_batchfile, dig_lookup_t *lookup) {
 				goto exit_or_usage;
 			}
 			lookup->udpsize = num;
-			if (lookup->udpsize == 0) {
-				lookup->edns = -1;
-			}
 			break;
 		default:
 			goto invalid_option;
@@ -1105,7 +1089,7 @@ plus_option(char *option, bool is_batchfile, dig_lookup_t *lookup) {
 			case 'o': /* cookie */
 				FULLCHECK("cookie");
 				if (state && lookup->edns == -1) {
-					lookup->edns = DEFAULT_EDNS_VERSION;
+					lookup->edns = 0;
 				}
 				lookup->sendcookie = state;
 				if (value != NULL) {
@@ -1144,7 +1128,7 @@ plus_option(char *option, bool is_batchfile, dig_lookup_t *lookup) {
 			FULLCHECK("dnssec");
 		dnssec:
 			if (state && lookup->edns == -1) {
-				lookup->edns = DEFAULT_EDNS_VERSION;
+				lookup->edns = 0;
 			}
 			lookup->dnssec = state;
 			break;
@@ -1196,8 +1180,7 @@ plus_option(char *option, bool is_batchfile, dig_lookup_t *lookup) {
 							break;
 						}
 						if (value == NULL) {
-							lookup->edns =
-								DEFAULT_EDNS_VERSION;
+							lookup->edns = 0;
 							break;
 						}
 						result = parse_uint(&num, value,
@@ -1412,7 +1395,7 @@ plus_option(char *option, bool is_batchfile, dig_lookup_t *lookup) {
 			case 'i': /* nsid */
 				FULLCHECK("nsid");
 				if (state && lookup->edns == -1) {
-					lookup->edns = DEFAULT_EDNS_VERSION;
+					lookup->edns = 0;
 				}
 				lookup->nsid = state;
 				break;
@@ -1482,7 +1465,7 @@ plus_option(char *option, bool is_batchfile, dig_lookup_t *lookup) {
 	case 'p':
 		FULLCHECK("padding");
 		if (state && lookup->edns == -1) {
-			lookup->edns = DEFAULT_EDNS_VERSION;
+			lookup->edns = 0;
 		}
 		if (value == NULL) {
 			goto need_value;
@@ -1650,7 +1633,7 @@ plus_option(char *option, bool is_batchfile, dig_lookup_t *lookup) {
 				break;
 			}
 			if (lookup->edns == -1) {
-				lookup->edns = DEFAULT_EDNS_VERSION;
+				lookup->edns = 0;
 			}
 			if (lookup->ecs_addr != NULL) {
 				isc_mem_free(mctx, lookup->ecs_addr);
@@ -1874,7 +1857,7 @@ dash_option(char *option, char *next, dig_lookup_t **lookup,
 				have_ipv6 = false;
 			} else {
 				fatal("can't find IPv4 networking");
-				UNREACHABLE();
+				/* NOTREACHED */
 				return (false);
 			}
 			break;
@@ -1884,7 +1867,7 @@ dash_option(char *option, char *next, dig_lookup_t **lookup,
 				have_ipv4 = false;
 			} else {
 				fatal("can't find IPv6 networking");
-				UNREACHABLE();
+				/* NOTREACHED */
 				return (false);
 			}
 			break;
@@ -2135,7 +2118,7 @@ dash_option(char *option, char *next, dig_lookup_t **lookup,
 		fprintf(stderr, "Invalid option: -%s\n", option);
 		usage();
 	}
-	UNREACHABLE();
+	/* NOTREACHED */
 	return (false);
 }
 
@@ -2199,20 +2182,16 @@ preparse_args(int argc, char **argv) {
 			continue;
 		}
 		/* Look for dash value option. */
-		if (strpbrk(option, dash_opts) != &option[0]) {
-			goto invalid_option;
-		}
-		if (strlen(option) > 1U) {
-			/* value in option. */
+		if (strpbrk(option, dash_opts) != &option[0] ||
+		    strlen(option) > 1U) {
+			/* Error or value in option. */
 			continue;
 		}
 		/* Dash value is next argument so we need to skip it. */
 		rc--, rv++;
 		/* Handle missing argument */
 		if (rc == 0) {
-		invalid_option:
-			fprintf(stderr, "Invalid option: -%s\n", option);
-			usage();
+			break;
 		}
 	}
 }
@@ -2269,7 +2248,7 @@ parse_args(bool is_batchfile, bool config_only, int argc, char **argv) {
 		debug("making new lookup");
 		default_lookup = make_empty_lookup();
 		default_lookup->adflag = true;
-		default_lookup->edns = DEFAULT_EDNS_VERSION;
+		default_lookup->edns = 0;
 		default_lookup->sendcookie = true;
 
 #ifndef NOPOSIX

bin/dig/dig.rst

@@ -1,643 +0,0 @@
-.. Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-..
-.. SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
-..
-.. This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
-.. License, v. 2.0.  If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
-.. file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
-..
-.. See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
-.. information regarding copyright ownership.
-
-.. highlight: console
-
-.. _man_dig:
-
-dig - DNS lookup utility
-------------------------
-
-Synopsis
-~~~~~~~~
-:program:`dig` [@server] [**-b** address] [**-c** class] [**-f** filename] [**-k** filename] [**-m**] [**-p** port#] [**-q** name] [**-t** type] [**-v**] [**-x** addr] [**-y** [hmac:]name:key] [ [**-4**] | [**-6**] ] [name] [type] [class] [queryopt...]
-
-:program:`dig` [**-h**]
-
-:program:`dig` [global-queryopt...] [query...]
-
-Description
-~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-``dig`` is a flexible tool for interrogating DNS name servers. It
-performs DNS lookups and displays the answers that are returned from the
-name server(s) that were queried. Most DNS administrators use ``dig`` to
-troubleshoot DNS problems because of its flexibility, ease of use, and
-clarity of output. Other lookup tools tend to have less functionality
-than ``dig``.
-
-Although ``dig`` is normally used with command-line arguments, it also
-has a batch mode of operation for reading lookup requests from a file. A
-brief summary of its command-line arguments and options is printed when
-the ``-h`` option is given. The BIND 9
-implementation of ``dig`` allows multiple lookups to be issued from the
-command line.
-
-Unless it is told to query a specific name server, ``dig`` tries each
-of the servers listed in ``/etc/resolv.conf``. If no usable server
-addresses are found, ``dig`` sends the query to the local host.
-
-When no command-line arguments or options are given, ``dig``
-performs an NS query for "." (the root).
-
-It is possible to set per-user defaults for ``dig`` via
-``${HOME}/.digrc``. This file is read and any options in it are applied
-before the command-line arguments. The ``-r`` option disables this
-feature, for scripts that need predictable behavior.
-
-The IN and CH class names overlap with the IN and CH top-level domain
-names. Either use the ``-t`` and ``-c`` options to specify the type and
-class, use the ``-q`` to specify the domain name, or use "IN." and
-"CH." when looking up these top-level domains.
-
-Simple Usage
-~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-A typical invocation of ``dig`` looks like:
-
-::
-
-    dig @server name type
-
-where:
-
-``server``
-   is the name or IP address of the name server to query. This can be an
-   IPv4 address in dotted-decimal notation or an IPv6 address in
-   colon-delimited notation. When the supplied ``server`` argument is a
-   hostname, ``dig`` resolves that name before querying that name
-   server.
-
-   If no ``server`` argument is provided, ``dig`` consults
-   ``/etc/resolv.conf``; if an address is found there, it queries the
-   name server at that address. If either of the ``-4`` or ``-6``
-   options are in use, then only addresses for the corresponding
-   transport are tried. If no usable addresses are found, ``dig``
-   sends the query to the local host. The reply from the name server
-   that responds is displayed.
-
-``name``
-   is the name of the resource record that is to be looked up.
-
-``type``
-   indicates what type of query is required - ANY, A, MX, SIG, etc.
-   ``type`` can be any valid query type. If no ``type`` argument is
-   supplied, ``dig`` performs a lookup for an A record.
-
-Options
-~~~~~~~
-
-``-4``
-   This option indicates that only IPv4 should be used.
-
-``-6``
-   This option indicates that only IPv6 should be used.
-
-``-b address[#port]``
-   This option sets the source IP address of the query. The ``address`` must be a
-   valid address on one of the host's network interfaces, or "0.0.0.0"
-   or "::". An optional port may be specified by appending ``#port``.
-
-``-c class``
-   This option sets the query class. The default ``class`` is IN; other classes are
-   HS for Hesiod records or CH for Chaosnet records.
-
-``-f file``
-   This option sets batch mode, in which ``dig`` reads a list of lookup requests to process from
-   the given ``file``. Each line in the file should be organized in the
-   same way it would be presented as a query to ``dig`` using the
-   command-line interface.
-
-``-k keyfile``
-   This option tells ``named`` to sign queries using TSIG using a key read from the given file. Key
-   files can be generated using ``tsig-keygen``. When using TSIG
-   authentication with ``dig``, the name server that is queried needs to
-   know the key and algorithm that is being used. In BIND, this is done
-   by providing appropriate ``key`` and ``server`` statements in
-   ``named.conf``.
-
-``-m``
-   This option enables memory usage debugging.
-
-``-p port``
-   This option sends the query to a non-standard port on the server, instead of the
-   default port 53. This option is used to test a name server that
-   has been configured to listen for queries on a non-standard port
-   number.
-
-``-q name``
-   This option specifies the domain name to query. This is useful to distinguish the ``name``
-   from other arguments.
-
-``-r``
-   This option indicates that options from ``${HOME}/.digrc`` should not be read. This is useful for
-   scripts that need predictable behavior.
-
-``-t type``
-   This option indicates the resource record type to query, which can be any valid query type. If
-   it is a resource record type supported in BIND 9, it can be given by
-   the type mnemonic (such as ``NS`` or ``AAAA``). The default query type is
-   ``A``, unless the ``-x`` option is supplied to indicate a reverse
-   lookup. A zone transfer can be requested by specifying a type of
-   AXFR. When an incremental zone transfer (IXFR) is required, set the
-   ``type`` to ``ixfr=N``. The incremental zone transfer contains
-   all changes made to the zone since the serial number in the zone's
-   SOA record was ``N``.
-
-   All resource record types can be expressed as ``TYPEnn``, where ``nn`` is
-   the number of the type. If the resource record type is not supported
-   in BIND 9, the result is displayed as described in :rfc:`3597`.
-
-``-u``
-   This option indicates that print query times should be provided in microseconds instead of milliseconds.
-
-``-v``
-   This option prints the version number and exits.
-
-``-x addr``
-   This option sets simplified reverse lookups, for mapping addresses to names. The
-   ``addr`` is an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal notation, or a
-   colon-delimited IPv6 address. When the ``-x`` option is used, there is no
-   need to provide the ``name``, ``class``, and ``type`` arguments.
-   ``dig`` automatically performs a lookup for a name like
-   ``94.2.0.192.in-addr.arpa`` and sets the query type and class to PTR
-   and IN respectively. IPv6 addresses are looked up using nibble format
-   under the IP6.ARPA domain.
-
-``-y [hmac:]keyname:secret``
-   This option signs queries using TSIG with the given authentication key.
-   ``keyname`` is the name of the key, and ``secret`` is the
-   base64-encoded shared secret. ``hmac`` is the name of the key algorithm;
-   valid choices are ``hmac-md5``, ``hmac-sha1``, ``hmac-sha224``,
-   ``hmac-sha256``, ``hmac-sha384``, or ``hmac-sha512``. If ``hmac`` is
-   not specified, the default is ``hmac-md5``; if MD5 was disabled, the default is
-   ``hmac-sha256``.
-
-.. note:: Only the ``-k`` option should be used, rather than the ``-y`` option,
-   because with ``-y`` the shared secret is supplied as a command-line
-   argument in clear text. This may be visible in the output from ``ps1`` or
-   in a history file maintained by the user's shell.
-
-Query Options
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-``dig`` provides a number of query options which affect the way in which
-lookups are made and the results displayed. Some of these set or reset
-flag bits in the query header, some determine which sections of the
-answer get printed, and others determine the timeout and retry
-strategies.
-
-Each query option is identified by a keyword preceded by a plus sign
-(``+``). Some keywords set or reset an option; these may be preceded by
-the string ``no`` to negate the meaning of that keyword. Other keywords
-assign values to options, like the timeout interval. They have the form
-``+keyword=value``. Keywords may be abbreviated, provided the
-abbreviation is unambiguous; for example, ``+cd`` is equivalent to
-``+cdflag``. The query options are:
-
-``+[no]aaflag``
-   This option is a synonym for ``+[no]aaonly``.
-
-``+[no]aaonly``
-   This option sets the ``aa`` flag in the query.
-
-``+[no]additional``
-   This option displays [or does not display] the additional section of a reply. The
-   default is to display it.
-
-``+[no]adflag``
-   This option sets [or does not set] the AD (authentic data) bit in the query. This
-   requests the server to return whether all of the answer and authority
-   sections have been validated as secure, according to the security
-   policy of the server. ``AD=1`` indicates that all records have been
-   validated as secure and the answer is not from a OPT-OUT range. ``AD=0``
-   indicates that some part of the answer was insecure or not validated.
-   This bit is set by default.
-
-``+[no]all``
-   This option sets or clears all display flags.
-
-``+[no]answer``
-   This option displays [or does not display] the answer section of a reply. The default
-   is to display it.
-
-``+[no]authority``
-   This option displays [or does not display] the authority section of a reply. The
-   default is to display it.
-
-``+[no]badcookie``
-   This option retries the lookup with a new server cookie if a BADCOOKIE response is
-   received.
-
-``+[no]besteffort``
-   This option attempts to display the contents of messages which are malformed. The
-   default is to not display malformed answers.
-
-``+bufsize[=B]``
-   This option sets the UDP message buffer size advertised using EDNS0
-   to ``B`` bytes.  The maximum and minimum sizes of this buffer are
-   65535 and 0, respectively.  ``+bufsize=0`` disables EDNS (use
-   ``+bufsize=0 +edns`` to send an EDNS message with an advertised size
-   of 0 bytes). ``+bufsize`` restores the default buffer size.
-
-``+[no]cdflag``
-   This option sets [or does not set] the CD (checking disabled) bit in the query. This
-   requests the server to not perform DNSSEC validation of responses.
-
-``+[no]class``
-   This option displays [or does not display] the CLASS when printing the record.
-
-``+[no]cmd``
-   This option toggles the printing of the initial comment in the output, identifying the
-   version of ``dig`` and the query options that have been applied. This option
-   always has a global effect; it cannot be set globally and then overridden on a
-   per-lookup basis. The default is to print this comment.
-
-``+[no]comments``
-   This option toggles the display of some comment lines in the output, with
-   information about the packet header and OPT pseudosection, and the names of
-   the response section. The default is to print these comments.
-
-   Other types of comments in the output are not affected by this option, but
-   can be controlled using other command-line switches. These include
-   ``+[no]cmd``, ``+[no]question``, ``+[no]stats``, and ``+[no]rrcomments``.
-
-``+[no]cookie=####``
-   This option sends [or does not send] a COOKIE EDNS option, with an optional value. Replaying a COOKIE
-   from a previous response allows the server to identify a previous
-   client. The default is ``+cookie``.
-
-   ``+cookie`` is also set when ``+trace`` is set to better emulate the
-   default queries from a nameserver.
-
-``+[no]crypto``
-   This option toggles the display of cryptographic fields in DNSSEC records. The
-   contents of these fields are unnecessary for debugging most DNSSEC
-   validation failures and removing them makes it easier to see the
-   common failures. The default is to display the fields. When omitted,
-   they are replaced by the string ``[omitted]`` or, in the DNSKEY case, the
-   key ID is displayed as the replacement, e.g. ``[ key id = value ]``.
-
-``+[no]defname``
-   This option, which is deprecated, is treated as a synonym for ``+[no]search``.
-
-``+[no]dnssec``
-   This option requests that DNSSEC records be sent by setting the DNSSEC OK (DO) bit in
-   the OPT record in the additional section of the query.
-
-``+domain=somename``
-   This option sets the search list to contain the single domain ``somename``, as if
-   specified in a ``domain`` directive in ``/etc/resolv.conf``, and
-   enables search list processing as if the ``+search`` option were
-   given.
-
-``+dscp=value``
-   This option sets the DSCP code point to be used when sending the query. Valid DSCP
-   code points are in the range [0...63]. By default no code point is
-   explicitly set.
-
-``+[no]edns[=#]``
-   This option specifies the EDNS version to query with. Valid values are 0 to 255.
-   Setting the EDNS version causes an EDNS query to be sent.
-   ``+noedns`` clears the remembered EDNS version. EDNS is set to 0 by
-   default.
-
-``+[no]ednsflags[=#]``
-   This option sets the must-be-zero EDNS flags bits (Z bits) to the specified value.
-   Decimal, hex, and octal encodings are accepted. Setting a named flag
-   (e.g., DO) is silently ignored. By default, no Z bits are set.
-
-``+[no]ednsnegotiation``
-   This option enables/disables EDNS version negotiation. By default, EDNS version
-   negotiation is enabled.
-
-``+[no]ednsopt[=code[:value]]``
-   This option specifies the EDNS option with code point ``code`` and an optional payload
-   of ``value`` as a hexadecimal string. ``code`` can be either an EDNS
-   option name (for example, ``NSID`` or ``ECS``) or an arbitrary
-   numeric value. ``+noednsopt`` clears the EDNS options to be sent.
-
-``+[no]expire``
-   This option sends an EDNS Expire option.
-
-``+[no]fail``
-   This option indicates that ``named`` should try [or not try] the next server if a SERVFAIL is received. The default is
-   to not try the next server, which is the reverse of normal stub
-   resolver behavior.
-
-``+[no]header-only``
-   This option sends a query with a DNS header without a question section. The
-   default is to add a question section. The query type and query name
-   are ignored when this is set.
-
-``+[no]identify``
-   This option shows [or does not show] the IP address and port number that supplied
-   the answer, when the ``+short`` option is enabled. If short form
-   answers are requested, the default is not to show the source address
-   and port number of the server that provided the answer.
-
-``+[no]idnin``
-   This option processes [or does not process] IDN domain names on input. This requires
-   ``IDN SUPPORT`` to have been enabled at compile time.
-
-   The default is to process IDN input when standard output is a tty.
-   The IDN processing on input is disabled when ``dig`` output is redirected
-   to files, pipes, and other non-tty file descriptors.
-
-``+[no]idnout``
-   This option converts [or does not convert] puny code on output. This requires
-   ``IDN SUPPORT`` to have been enabled at compile time.
-
-   The default is to process puny code on output when standard output is
-   a tty. The puny code processing on output is disabled when ``dig`` output
-   is redirected to files, pipes, and other non-tty file descriptors.
-
-``+[no]ignore``
-   This option ignores [or does not ignore] truncation in UDP responses instead of retrying with TCP. By
-   default, TCP retries are performed.
-
-``+[no]keepalive``
-   This option sends [or does not send] an EDNS Keepalive option.
-
-``+[no]keepopen``
-   This option keeps [or does not keep] the TCP socket open between queries, and reuses it rather than
-   creating a new TCP socket for each lookup. The default is
-   ``+nokeepopen``.
-
-``+[no]mapped``
-   This option allows [or does not allow] mapped IPv4-over-IPv6 addresses to be used. The default is
-   ``+mapped``.
-
-``+[no]multiline``
-   This option prints [or does not print] records, like the SOA records, in a verbose multi-line format
-   with human-readable comments. The default is to print each record on
-   a single line to facilitate machine parsing of the ``dig`` output.
-
-``+ndots=D``
-   This option sets the number of dots (``D``) that must appear in ``name`` for
-   it to be considered absolute. The default value is that defined using
-   the ``ndots`` statement in ``/etc/resolv.conf``, or 1 if no ``ndots``
-   statement is present. Names with fewer dots are interpreted as
-   relative names, and are searched for in the domains listed in the
-   ``search`` or ``domain`` directive in ``/etc/resolv.conf`` if
-   ``+search`` is set.
-
-``+[no]nsid``
-   When enabled, this option includes an EDNS name server ID request when sending a query.
-
-``+[no]nssearch``
-   When this option is set, ``dig`` attempts to find the authoritative
-   name servers for the zone containing the name being looked up, and
-   display the SOA record that each name server has for the zone.
-   Addresses of servers that did not respond are also printed.
-
-``+[no]onesoa``
-   When enabled, this option prints only one (starting) SOA record when performing an AXFR. The
-   default is to print both the starting and ending SOA records.
-
-``+[no]opcode=value``
-   When enabled, this option sets (restores) the DNS message opcode to the specified value. The
-   default value is QUERY (0).
-
-``+padding=value``
-   This option pads the size of the query packet using the EDNS Padding option to
-   blocks of ``value`` bytes. For example, ``+padding=32`` causes a
-   48-byte query to be padded to 64 bytes. The default block size is 0,
-   which disables padding; the maximum is 512. Values are ordinarily
-   expected to be powers of two, such as 128; however, this is not
-   mandatory. Responses to padded queries may also be padded, but only
-   if the query uses TCP or DNS COOKIE.
-
-``+[no]qr``
-   This option toggles the display of the query message as it is sent. By default, the query
-   is not printed.
-
-``+[no]question``
-   This option toggles the display of the question section of a query when an answer is
-   returned. The default is to print the question section as a comment.
-
-``+[no]raflag``
-   This option sets [or does not set] the RA (Recursion Available) bit in the query. The
-   default is ``+noraflag``. This bit is ignored by the server for
-   QUERY.
-
-``+[no]rdflag``
-   This option is a synonym for ``+[no]recurse``.
-
-``+[no]recurse``
-   This option toggles the setting of the RD (recursion desired) bit in the query.
-   This bit is set by default, which means ``dig`` normally sends
-   recursive queries. Recursion is automatically disabled when the
-   ``+nssearch`` or ``+trace`` query option is used.
-
-``+retry=T``
-   This option sets the number of times to retry UDP and TCP queries to server to ``T``
-   instead of the default, 2.  Unlike ``+tries``, this does not include
-   the initial query.
-
-``+[no]rrcomments``
-   This option toggles the display of per-record comments in the output (for example,
-   human-readable key information about DNSKEY records). The default is
-   not to print record comments unless multiline mode is active.
-
-``+[no]search``
-   This option uses [or does not use] the search list defined by the searchlist or domain
-   directive in ``resolv.conf``, if any. The search list is not used by
-   default.
-
-   ``ndots`` from ``resolv.conf`` (default 1), which may be overridden by
-   ``+ndots``, determines whether the name is treated as relative
-   and hence whether a search is eventually performed.
-
-``+[no]short``
-   This option toggles whether a terse answer is provided. The default is to print the answer in a verbose
-   form. This option always has a global effect; it cannot be set globally and
-   then overridden on a per-lookup basis.
-
-``+[no]showsearch``
-   This option performs [or does not perform] a search showing intermediate results.
-
-``+[no]sigchase``
-   This feature is now obsolete and has been removed; use ``delv``
-   instead.
-
-``+split=W``
-   This option splits long hex- or base64-formatted fields in resource records into
-   chunks of ``W`` characters (where ``W`` is rounded up to the nearest
-   multiple of 4). ``+nosplit`` or ``+split=0`` causes fields not to be
-   split at all. The default is 56 characters, or 44 characters when
-   multiline mode is active.
-
-``+[no]stats``
-   This option toggles the printing of statistics: when the query was made, the size of the
-   reply, etc. The default behavior is to print the query statistics as a
-   comment after each lookup.
-
-``+[no]subnet=addr[/prefix-length]``
-   This option sends [or does not send] an EDNS CLIENT-SUBNET option with the specified IP
-   address or network prefix.
-
-   ``dig +subnet=0.0.0.0/0``, or simply ``dig +subnet=0`` for short,
-   sends an EDNS CLIENT-SUBNET option with an empty address and a source
-   prefix-length of zero, which signals a resolver that the client's
-   address information must *not* be used when resolving this query.
-
-``+[no]tcflag``
-   This option sets [or does not set] the TC (TrunCation) bit in the query. The default is
-   ``+notcflag``. This bit is ignored by the server for QUERY.
-
-``+[no]tcp``
-   This option uses [or does not use] TCP when querying name servers. The default behavior
-   is to use UDP unless a type ``any`` or ``ixfr=N`` query is requested,
-   in which case the default is TCP. AXFR queries always use TCP.
-
-``+timeout=T``
-   This option sets the timeout for a query to ``T`` seconds. The default timeout is
-   5 seconds. An attempt to set ``T`` to less than 1 is silently set to 1.
-
-``+[no]topdown``
-   This feature is related to ``dig +sigchase``, which is obsolete and
-   has been removed. Use ``delv`` instead.
-
-``+[no]trace``
-   This option toggles tracing of the delegation path from the root name servers for
-   the name being looked up. Tracing is disabled by default. When
-   tracing is enabled, ``dig`` makes iterative queries to resolve the
-   name being looked up. It follows referrals from the root servers,
-   showing the answer from each server that was used to resolve the
-   lookup.
-
-   If ``@server`` is also specified, it affects only the initial query for
-   the root zone name servers.
-
-   ``+dnssec`` is also set when ``+trace`` is set, to better emulate the
-   default queries from a name server.
-
-``+tries=T``
-   This option sets the number of times to try UDP and TCP queries to server to ``T``
-   instead of the default, 3. If ``T`` is less than or equal to zero,
-   the number of tries is silently rounded up to 1.
-
-``+trusted-key=####``
-   This option formerly specified trusted keys for use with ``dig +sigchase``. This
-   feature is now obsolete and has been removed; use ``delv`` instead.
-
-``+[no]ttlid``
-   This option displays [or does not display] the TTL when printing the record.
-
-``+[no]ttlunits``
-   This option displays [or does not display] the TTL in friendly human-readable time
-   units of ``s``, ``m``, ``h``, ``d``, and ``w``, representing seconds, minutes,
-   hours, days, and weeks. This implies ``+ttlid``.
-
-``+[no]unexpected``
-   This option accepts [or does not accept] answers from unexpected sources.  By default, ``dig``
-   will not accept a reply from a source other than the one to which it sent the
-   query.
-
-``+[no]unknownformat``
-   This option prints all RDATA in unknown RR type presentation format (:rfc:`3597`).
-   The default is to print RDATA for known types in the type's
-   presentation format.
-
-``+[no]vc``
-   This option uses [or does not use] TCP when querying name servers. This alternate
-   syntax to ``+[no]tcp`` is provided for backwards compatibility. The
-   ``vc`` stands for "virtual circuit."
-
-``+[no]yaml``
-   When enabled, this option prints the responses (and, if ``+qr`` is in use, also the
-   outgoing queries) in a detailed YAML format.
-
-``+[no]zflag``
-   This option sets [or does not set] the last unassigned DNS header flag in a DNS query.
-   This flag is off by default.
-
-Multiple Queries
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-The BIND 9 implementation of ``dig`` supports specifying multiple
-queries on the command line (in addition to supporting the ``-f`` batch
-file option). Each of those queries can be supplied with its own set of
-flags, options, and query options.
-
-In this case, each ``query`` argument represents an individual query in
-the command-line syntax described above. Each consists of any of the
-standard options and flags, the name to be looked up, an optional query
-type and class, and any query options that should be applied to that
-query.
-
-A global set of query options, which should be applied to all queries,
-can also be supplied. These global query options must precede the first
-tuple of name, class, type, options, flags, and query options supplied
-on the command line. Any global query options (except ``+[no]cmd`` and
-``+[no]short`` options) can be overridden by a query-specific set of
-query options. For example:
-
-::
-
-   dig +qr www.isc.org any -x 127.0.0.1 isc.org ns +noqr
-
-shows how ``dig`` can be used from the command line to make three
-lookups: an ANY query for ``www.isc.org``, a reverse lookup of 127.0.0.1,
-and a query for the NS records of ``isc.org``. A global query option of
-``+qr`` is applied, so that ``dig`` shows the initial query it made for
-each lookup. The final query has a local query option of ``+noqr`` which
-means that ``dig`` does not print the initial query when it looks up the
-NS records for ``isc.org``.
-
-IDN Support
-~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-If ``dig`` has been built with IDN (internationalized domain name)
-support, it can accept and display non-ASCII domain names. ``dig``
-appropriately converts character encoding of a domain name before sending
-a request to a DNS server or displaying a reply from the server.
-To turn off IDN support, use the parameters
-``+noidnin`` and ``+noidnout``, or define the ``IDN_DISABLE`` environment
-variable.
-
-Return Codes
-~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-``dig`` return codes are:
-
-``0``
-   DNS response received, including NXDOMAIN status
-
-``1``
-   Usage error
-
-``8``
-   Couldn't open batch file
-
-``9``
-   No reply from server
-
-``10``
-   Internal error
-
-Files
-~~~~~
-
-``/etc/resolv.conf``
-
-``${HOME}/.digrc``
-
-See Also
-~~~~~~~~
-
-:manpage:`delv(1)`, :manpage:`host(1)`, :manpage:`named(8)`, :manpage:`dnssec-keygen(8)`, :rfc:`1035`.
-
-Bugs
-~~~~
-
-There are probably too many query options.

bin/dig/dighost.c

@@ -1,11 +1,9 @@
 /*
  * Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
  *
- * SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
- *
  * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
  * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
- * file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+ * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
  *
  * See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
  * information regarding copyright ownership.
@@ -43,7 +41,6 @@
 #include <isc/hex.h>
 #include <isc/lang.h>
 #include <isc/log.h>
-#include <isc/managers.h>
 #include <isc/netaddr.h>
 #include <isc/netdb.h>
 #include <isc/nonce.h>
@@ -101,14 +98,6 @@
 #define NS_IN6ADDRSZ 16
 #endif /* if !defined(NS_IN6ADDRSZ) */
 
-#if HAVE_SETLOCALE
-#define systemlocale(l) (void)setlocale(l, "")
-#define resetlocale(l)	(void)setlocale(l, "C")
-#else
-#define systemlocale(l)
-#define resetlocale(l)
-#endif /* HAVE_SETLOCALE */
-
 dig_lookuplist_t lookup_list;
 dig_serverlist_t server_list;
 dig_searchlistlist_t search_list;
@@ -122,7 +111,6 @@ unsigned int timeout = 0;
 unsigned int extrabytes;
 isc_mem_t *mctx = NULL;
 isc_log_t *lctx = NULL;
-isc_nm_t *netmgr = NULL;
 isc_taskmgr_t *taskmgr = NULL;
 isc_task_t *global_task = NULL;
 isc_timermgr_t *timermgr = NULL;
@@ -172,6 +160,7 @@ unsigned int digestbits = 0;
 isc_buffer_t *namebuf = NULL;
 dns_tsigkey_t *tsigkey = NULL;
 bool validated = true;
+isc_mempool_t *commctx = NULL;
 bool debugging = false;
 bool debugtiming = false;
 bool memdebugging = false;
@@ -678,7 +667,7 @@ make_empty_lookup(void) {
 	looknew->idnin = false;
 	looknew->idnout = false;
 #endif /* HAVE_LIBIDN2 */
-	looknew->udpsize = -1;
+	looknew->udpsize = 0;
 	looknew->edns = -1;
 	looknew->recurse = true;
 	looknew->aaonly = false;
@@ -765,7 +754,7 @@ dig_lookup_t *
 clone_lookup(dig_lookup_t *lookold, bool servers) {
 	dig_lookup_t *looknew;
 
-	debug("clone_lookup(%p)", lookold);
+	debug("clone_lookup()");
 
 	INSIST(!free_now);
 
@@ -877,7 +866,7 @@ dig_lookup_t *
 requeue_lookup(dig_lookup_t *lookold, bool servers) {
 	dig_lookup_t *looknew;
 
-	debug("requeue_lookup(%p)", lookold);
+	debug("requeue_lookup()");
 
 	lookup_counter++;
 	if (lookup_counter > LOOKUP_LIMIT) {
@@ -1348,6 +1337,11 @@ setup_system(bool ipv4only, bool ipv6only) {
 
 	irs_resconf_destroy(&resconf);
 
+#ifdef HAVE_SETLOCALE
+	/* Set locale */
+	(void)setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
+#endif /* ifdef HAVE_SETLOCALE */
+
 	if (keyfile[0] != 0) {
 		setup_file_key();
 	} else if (keysecret[0] != 0) {
@@ -1410,8 +1404,8 @@ setup_libs(void) {
 
 	isc_log_setdebuglevel(lctx, 0);
 
-	result = isc_managers_create(mctx, 1, 0, &netmgr, &taskmgr);
-	check_result(result, "isc_managers_create");
+	result = isc_taskmgr_create(mctx, 1, 0, NULL, &taskmgr);
+	check_result(result, "isc_taskmgr_create");
 
 	result = isc_task_create(taskmgr, 0, &global_task);
 	check_result(result, "isc_task_create");
@@ -1427,6 +1421,15 @@ setup_libs(void) {
 	check_result(result, "dst_lib_init");
 	is_dst_up = true;
 
+	isc_mempool_create(mctx, COMMSIZE, &commctx);
+	isc_mempool_setname(commctx, "COMMPOOL");
+	/*
+	 * 6 and 2 set as reasonable parameters for 3 or 4 nameserver
+	 * systems.
+	 */
+	isc_mempool_setfreemax(commctx, 6);
+	isc_mempool_setfillcount(commctx, 2);
+
 	isc_mutex_init(&lookup_lock);
 }
 
@@ -1449,7 +1452,6 @@ dig_ednsoptname_t optnames[] = {
 	{ 12, "PAD" },	       /* shorthand */
 	{ 13, "CHAIN" },       /* RFC 7901 */
 	{ 14, "KEY-TAG" },     /* RFC 8145 */
-	{ 15, "EDE" },	       /* ietf-dnsop-extended-error-16 */
 	{ 16, "CLIENT-TAG" },  /* draft-bellis-dnsop-edns-tags */
 	{ 17, "SERVER-TAG" },  /* draft-bellis-dnsop-edns-tags */
 	{ 26946, "DEVICEID" }, /* Brian Hartvigsen */
@@ -1591,7 +1593,6 @@ clear_query(dig_query_t *query) {
 	}
 
 	if (ISC_LINK_LINKED(query, link)) {
-		query->saved_next = ISC_LIST_NEXT(query, link);
 		ISC_LIST_UNLINK(lookup->q, query, link);
 	}
 	if (ISC_LINK_LINKED(query, clink)) {
@@ -1604,13 +1605,12 @@ clear_query(dig_query_t *query) {
 		sockcount--;
 		debug("sockcount=%d", sockcount);
 	}
-	isc_mem_put(mctx, query->recvspace, COMMSIZE);
-	isc_mem_put(mctx, query->tmpsendspace, COMMSIZE);
+	isc_mempool_put(commctx, query->recvspace);
+	isc_mempool_put(commctx, query->tmpsendspace);
 	isc_buffer_invalidate(&query->recvbuf);
 	isc_buffer_invalidate(&query->lengthbuf);
 
 	if (query->waiting_senddone) {
-		debug("waiting senddone, delay freeing query");
 		query->pending_free = true;
 	} else {
 		query->magic = 0;
@@ -1675,14 +1675,14 @@ destroy_lookup(dig_lookup_t *lookup) {
 		isc_mem_free(mctx, ptr);
 	}
 	if (lookup->sendmsg != NULL) {
-		dns_message_detach(&lookup->sendmsg);
+		dns_message_destroy(&lookup->sendmsg);
 	}
 	if (lookup->querysig != NULL) {
 		debug("freeing buffer %p", lookup->querysig);
 		isc_buffer_free(&lookup->querysig);
 	}
 	if (lookup->sendspace != NULL) {
-		isc_mem_put(mctx, lookup->sendspace, COMMSIZE);
+		isc_mempool_put(commctx, lookup->sendspace);
 	}
 
 	if (lookup->tsigctx != NULL) {
@@ -1953,7 +1953,7 @@ next_origin(dig_lookup_t *oldlookup) {
 
 	INSIST(!free_now);
 
-	debug("next_origin(%p)", oldlookup);
+	debug("next_origin()");
 	debug("following up %s", oldlookup->textname);
 
 	if (!usesearch) {
@@ -2011,7 +2011,7 @@ insert_soa(dig_lookup_t *lookup) {
 	dns_rdataset_t *rdataset = NULL;
 	dns_name_t *soaname = NULL;
 
-	debug("insert_soa(%p)", lookup);
+	debug("insert_soa()");
 	soa.mctx = mctx;
 	soa.serial = lookup->ixfr_serial;
 	soa.refresh = 0;
@@ -2052,6 +2052,7 @@ insert_soa(dig_lookup_t *lookup) {
 
 	result = dns_message_gettempname(lookup->sendmsg, &soaname);
 	check_result(result, "dns_message_gettempname");
+	dns_name_init(soaname, NULL);
 	dns_name_clone(lookup->name, soaname);
 	ISC_LIST_INIT(soaname->list);
 	ISC_LIST_APPEND(soaname->list, rdataset, link);
@@ -2099,7 +2100,9 @@ setup_lookup(dig_lookup_t *lookup) {
 
 	debug("setup_lookup(%p)", lookup);
 
-	dns_message_create(mctx, DNS_MESSAGE_INTENTRENDER, &lookup->sendmsg);
+	result = dns_message_create(mctx, DNS_MESSAGE_INTENTRENDER,
+				    &lookup->sendmsg);
+	check_result(result, "dns_message_create");
 
 	if (lookup->new_search) {
 		debug("resetting lookup counter.");
@@ -2112,6 +2115,7 @@ setup_lookup(dig_lookup_t *lookup) {
 	}
 	result = dns_message_gettempname(lookup->sendmsg, &lookup->name);
 	check_result(result, "dns_message_gettempname");
+	dns_name_init(lookup->name, NULL);
 
 	isc_buffer_init(&lookup->namebuf, lookup->name_space,
 			sizeof(lookup->name_space));
@@ -2155,6 +2159,7 @@ setup_lookup(dig_lookup_t *lookup) {
 		result = dns_message_gettempname(lookup->sendmsg,
 						 &lookup->oname);
 		check_result(result, "dns_message_gettempname");
+		dns_name_init(lookup->oname, NULL);
 		/* XXX Helper funct to conv char* to name? */
 		origin = lookup->origin->origin;
 #ifdef HAVE_LIBIDN2
@@ -2333,7 +2338,10 @@ setup_lookup(dig_lookup_t *lookup) {
 		check_result(result, "dns_message_settsigkey");
 	}
 
-	lookup->sendspace = isc_mem_get(mctx, COMMSIZE);
+	lookup->sendspace = isc_mempool_get(commctx);
+	if (lookup->sendspace == NULL) {
+		fatal("memory allocation failure");
+	}
 
 	result = dns_compress_init(&cctx, -1, mctx);
 	check_result(result, "dns_compress_init");
@@ -2357,11 +2365,11 @@ setup_lookup(dig_lookup_t *lookup) {
 		 * and DNS_EDNSOPTIONS set by other arguments
 		 * (+nsid, +cookie, etc).
 		 */
-		if (lookup->udpsize < 0) {
-			lookup->udpsize = DEFAULT_EDNS_BUFSIZE;
+		if (lookup->udpsize == 0) {
+			lookup->udpsize = 4096;
 		}
 		if (lookup->edns < 0) {
-			lookup->edns = DEFAULT_EDNS_VERSION;
+			lookup->edns = 0;
 		}
 
 		if (lookup->nsid) {
@@ -2430,7 +2438,8 @@ setup_lookup(dig_lookup_t *lookup) {
 				memmove(addr, &sin6->sin6_addr, addrl);
 				break;
 			default:
-				UNREACHABLE();
+				INSIST(0);
+				ISC_UNREACHABLE();
 			}
 
 			isc_buffer_init(&b, ecsbuf, sizeof(ecsbuf));
@@ -2568,8 +2577,8 @@ setup_lookup(dig_lookup_t *lookup) {
 		query->byte_count = 0;
 		query->ixfr_axfr = false;
 		query->sock = NULL;
-		query->recvspace = isc_mem_get(mctx, COMMSIZE);
-		query->tmpsendspace = isc_mem_get(mctx, COMMSIZE);
+		query->recvspace = isc_mempool_get(commctx);
+		query->tmpsendspace = isc_mempool_get(commctx);
 		if (query->recvspace == NULL) {
 			fatal("memory allocation failure");
 		}
@@ -2585,7 +2594,6 @@ setup_lookup(dig_lookup_t *lookup) {
 
 		ISC_LINK_INIT(query, clink);
 		ISC_LINK_INIT(query, link);
-		query->saved_next = NULL;
 
 		query->magic = DIG_QUERY_MAGIC;
 
@@ -2610,7 +2618,7 @@ send_done(isc_task_t *_task, isc_event_t *event) {
 
 	LOCK_LOOKUP;
 
-	debug("send_done(%p)", event->ev_arg);
+	debug("send_done()");
 	sendcount--;
 	debug("sendcount=%d", sendcount);
 	INSIST(sendcount >= 0);
@@ -2620,11 +2628,10 @@ send_done(isc_task_t *_task, isc_event_t *event) {
 	query->waiting_senddone = false;
 	l = query->lookup;
 
-	if (l == current_lookup && l->ns_search_only && !l->trace_root &&
+	if (!query->pending_free && l->ns_search_only && !l->trace_root &&
 	    !l->tcp_mode) {
 		debug("sending next, since searching");
-		next = query->pending_free ? query->saved_next
-					   : ISC_LIST_NEXT(query, link);
+		next = ISC_LIST_NEXT(query, link);
 		if (next != NULL) {
 			send_udp(next);
 		}
@@ -2650,7 +2657,7 @@ static void
 cancel_lookup(dig_lookup_t *lookup) {
 	dig_query_t *query, *next;
 
-	debug("cancel_lookup(%p)", lookup);
+	debug("cancel_lookup()");
 	query = ISC_LIST_HEAD(lookup->q);
 	while (query != NULL) {
 		REQUIRE(DIG_VALID_QUERY(query));
@@ -2675,7 +2682,7 @@ bringup_timer(dig_query_t *query, unsigned int default_timeout) {
 	isc_result_t result;
 	REQUIRE(DIG_VALID_QUERY(query));
 
-	debug("bringup_timer(%p)", query);
+	debug("bringup_timer()");
 	/*
 	 * If the timer already exists, that means we're calling this
 	 * a second time (for a retry).  Don't need to recreate it,
@@ -2707,7 +2714,7 @@ static void
 force_timeout(dig_query_t *query) {
 	isc_event_t *event;
 
-	debug("force_timeout(%p)", query);
+	debug("force_timeout ()");
 	event = isc_event_allocate(mctx, query, ISC_TIMEREVENT_IDLE,
 				   connect_timeout, query, sizeof(isc_event_t));
 	isc_task_send(global_task, &event);
@@ -2929,11 +2936,7 @@ send_udp(dig_query_t *query) {
 	}
 	isc_buffer_usedregion(&query->sendbuf, &r);
 	debug("sending a request");
-	if (query->lookup->use_usec) {
-		TIME_NOW_HIRES(&query->time_sent);
-	} else {
-		TIME_NOW(&query->time_sent);
-	}
+	TIME_NOW(&query->time_sent);
 	INSIST(query->sock != NULL);
 	query->waiting_senddone = true;
 	sevent = isc_socket_socketevent(
@@ -2999,7 +3002,7 @@ connect_timeout(isc_task_t *task, isc_event_t *event) {
 	UNUSED(task);
 	REQUIRE(event->ev_type == ISC_TIMEREVENT_IDLE);
 
-	debug("connect_timeout(%p)", event->ev_arg);
+	debug("connect_timeout()");
 
 	LOCK_LOOKUP;
 	query = event->ev_arg;
@@ -3073,8 +3076,7 @@ connect_timeout(isc_task_t *task, isc_event_t *event) {
  */
 static void
 requeue_or_update_exitcode(dig_lookup_t *lookup) {
-	if (lookup->eoferr == 0U && lookup->retries > 1) {
-		--lookup->retries;
+	if (lookup->eoferr == 0U) {
 		/*
 		 * Peer closed the connection prematurely for the first time
 		 * for this lookup.  Try again, keeping track of this failure.
@@ -3109,7 +3111,7 @@ tcp_length_done(isc_task_t *task, isc_event_t *event) {
 
 	UNUSED(task);
 
-	debug("tcp_length_done(%p)", event->ev_arg);
+	debug("tcp_length_done()");
 
 	LOCK_LOOKUP;
 	sevent = (isc_socketevent_t *)event;
@@ -3192,7 +3194,7 @@ launch_next_query(dig_query_t *query, bool include_question) {
 
 	INSIST(!free_now);
 
-	debug("launch_next_query(%p)", query);
+	debug("launch_next_query()");
 
 	if (!query->lookup->pending) {
 		debug("ignoring launch_next_query because !pending");
@@ -3216,11 +3218,7 @@ launch_next_query(dig_query_t *query, bool include_question) {
 	debug("recvcount=%d", recvcount);
 	if (!query->first_soa_rcvd) {
 		debug("sending a request in launch_next_query");
-		if (query->lookup->use_usec) {
-			TIME_NOW_HIRES(&query->time_sent);
-		} else {
-			TIME_NOW(&query->time_sent);
-		}
+		TIME_NOW(&query->time_sent);
 		query->waiting_senddone = true;
 		isc_buffer_clear(&query->tmpsendbuf);
 		isc_buffer_putuint16(&query->tmpsendbuf,
@@ -3271,7 +3269,7 @@ connect_done(isc_task_t *task, isc_event_t *event) {
 	REQUIRE(event->ev_type == ISC_SOCKEVENT_CONNECT);
 	INSIST(!free_now);
 
-	debug("connect_done(%p)", event->ev_arg);
+	debug("connect_done()");
 
 	LOCK_LOOKUP;
 	sevent = (isc_socketevent_t *)event;
@@ -3376,7 +3374,7 @@ check_for_more_data(dig_query_t *query, dns_message_t *msg,
 		axfr = query->ixfr_axfr;
 	}
 
-	debug("check_for_more_data(%p)", query);
+	debug("check_for_more_data()");
 
 	/*
 	 * By the time we're in this routine, we know we're doing
@@ -3618,7 +3616,7 @@ recv_done(isc_task_t *task, isc_event_t *event) {
 	UNUSED(task);
 	INSIST(!free_now);
 
-	debug("recv_done(%p)", event->ev_arg);
+	debug("recv_done()");
 
 	LOCK_LOOKUP;
 	recvcount--;
@@ -3626,11 +3624,7 @@ recv_done(isc_task_t *task, isc_event_t *event) {
 	INSIST(recvcount >= 0);
 
 	query = event->ev_arg;
-	if (query->lookup->use_usec) {
-		TIME_NOW_HIRES(&query->time_recv);
-	} else {
-		TIME_NOW(&query->time_recv);
-	}
+	TIME_NOW(&query->time_recv);
 
 	l = query->lookup;
 
@@ -3771,7 +3765,8 @@ recv_done(isc_task_t *task, isc_event_t *event) {
 		goto udp_mismatch;
 	}
 
-	dns_message_create(mctx, DNS_MESSAGE_INTENTPARSE, &msg);
+	result = dns_message_create(mctx, DNS_MESSAGE_INTENTPARSE, &msg);
+	check_result(result, "dns_message_create");
 
 	if (tsigkey != NULL) {
 		if (l->querysig == NULL) {
@@ -3811,7 +3806,7 @@ recv_done(isc_task_t *task, isc_event_t *event) {
 			hex_dump(&b);
 		}
 		query->waiting_connect = false;
-		dns_message_detach(&msg);
+		dns_message_destroy(&msg);
 		isc_event_free(&event);
 		clear_query(query);
 		cancel_lookup(l);
@@ -3833,7 +3828,7 @@ recv_done(isc_task_t *task, isc_event_t *event) {
 		dighost_warning("Warning: Opcode mismatch: expected %s, got %s",
 				expect, got);
 
-		dns_message_detach(&msg);
+		dns_message_destroy(&msg);
 		if (l->tcp_mode) {
 			isc_event_free(&event);
 			clear_query(query);
@@ -3885,7 +3880,7 @@ recv_done(isc_task_t *task, isc_event_t *event) {
 			}
 		}
 		if (!match) {
-			dns_message_detach(&msg);
+			dns_message_destroy(&msg);
 			if (l->tcp_mode) {
 				isc_event_free(&event);
 				clear_query(query);
@@ -3911,7 +3906,7 @@ recv_done(isc_task_t *task, isc_event_t *event) {
 		if (l->trace && l->trace_root) {
 			n->rdtype = l->qrdtype;
 		}
-		dns_message_detach(&msg);
+		dns_message_destroy(&msg);
 		isc_event_free(&event);
 		clear_query(query);
 		cancel_lookup(l);
@@ -3930,7 +3925,7 @@ recv_done(isc_task_t *task, isc_event_t *event) {
 		if (l->trace && l->trace_root) {
 			n->rdtype = l->qrdtype;
 		}
-		dns_message_detach(&msg);
+		dns_message_destroy(&msg);
 		isc_event_free(&event);
 		clear_query(query);
 		cancel_lookup(l);
@@ -3954,7 +3949,7 @@ recv_done(isc_task_t *task, isc_event_t *event) {
 			if (l->trace && l->trace_root) {
 				n->rdtype = l->qrdtype;
 			}
-			dns_message_detach(&msg);
+			dns_message_destroy(&msg);
 			isc_event_free(&event);
 			clear_query(query);
 			cancel_lookup(l);
@@ -3995,7 +3990,7 @@ recv_done(isc_task_t *task, isc_event_t *event) {
 					 query->servname);
 			clear_query(query);
 			check_next_lookup(l);
-			dns_message_detach(&msg);
+			dns_message_destroy(&msg);
 			isc_event_free(&event);
 			UNLOCK_LOOKUP;
 			return;
@@ -4128,7 +4123,7 @@ recv_done(isc_task_t *task, isc_event_t *event) {
 	}
 	if (l->doing_xfr) {
 		if (query != l->xfr_q) {
-			dns_message_detach(&msg);
+			dns_message_destroy(&msg);
 			isc_event_free(&event);
 			query->waiting_connect = false;
 			UNLOCK_LOOKUP;
@@ -4138,7 +4133,7 @@ recv_done(isc_task_t *task, isc_event_t *event) {
 			docancel = check_for_more_data(query, msg, sevent);
 		}
 		if (docancel) {
-			dns_message_detach(&msg);
+			dns_message_destroy(&msg);
 			clear_query(query);
 			cancel_lookup(l);
 			check_next_lookup(l);
@@ -4154,14 +4149,14 @@ recv_done(isc_task_t *task, isc_event_t *event) {
 		}
 		if (!query->lookup->ns_search_only ||
 		    query->lookup->trace_root || docancel) {
-			dns_message_detach(&msg);
+			dns_message_destroy(&msg);
 			cancel_lookup(l);
 		}
 		clear_query(query);
 		check_next_lookup(l);
 	}
 	if (msg != NULL) {
-		dns_message_detach(&msg);
+		dns_message_destroy(&msg);
 	}
 	isc_event_free(&event);
 	UNLOCK_LOOKUP;
@@ -4249,7 +4244,7 @@ do_lookup(dig_lookup_t *lookup) {
 
 	REQUIRE(lookup != NULL);
 
-	debug("do_lookup(%p)", lookup);
+	debug("do_lookup()");
 	lookup->pending = true;
 	query = ISC_LIST_HEAD(lookup->q);
 	if (query != NULL) {
@@ -4345,10 +4340,13 @@ destroy_libs(void) {
 		debug("freeing task");
 		isc_task_detach(&global_task);
 	}
-
+	/*
+	 * The taskmgr_destroy() call blocks until all events are cleared
+	 * from the task.
+	 */
 	if (taskmgr != NULL) {
 		debug("freeing taskmgr");
-		isc_managers_destroy(&netmgr, &taskmgr);
+		isc_taskmgr_destroy(&taskmgr);
 	}
 	LOCK_LOOKUP;
 	REQUIRE(sockcount == 0);
@@ -4370,6 +4368,10 @@ destroy_libs(void) {
 	check_result(result, "dns_name_settotextfilter");
 #endif /* HAVE_LIBIDN2 */
 
+	if (commctx != NULL) {
+		debug("freeing commctx");
+		isc_mempool_destroy(&commctx);
+	}
 	if (socketmgr != NULL) {
 		debug("freeing socketmgr");
 		isc_socketmgr_destroy(&socketmgr);
@@ -4409,9 +4411,8 @@ destroy_libs(void) {
 #ifdef HAVE_LIBIDN2
 static isc_result_t
 idn_output_filter(isc_buffer_t *buffer, unsigned int used_org) {
-	char src[MXNAME], *dst = NULL;
+	char src[MXNAME], *dst;
 	size_t srclen, dstlen;
-	isc_result_t result = ISC_R_SUCCESS;
 
 	/*
 	 * Copy name from 'buffer' to 'src' and terminate it with NULL.
@@ -4419,27 +4420,23 @@ idn_output_filter(isc_buffer_t *buffer, unsigned int used_org) {
 	srclen = isc_buffer_usedlength(buffer) - used_org;
 	if (srclen >= sizeof(src)) {
 		warn("Input name too long to perform IDN conversion");
-		goto cleanup;
+		return (ISC_R_SUCCESS);
 	}
 	memmove(src, (char *)isc_buffer_base(buffer) + used_org, srclen);
 	src[srclen] = '\0';
 
-	systemlocale(LC_ALL);
-
 	/*
 	 * Convert 'src' to the current locale's character encoding.
 	 */
 	idn_ace_to_locale(src, &dst);
 
-	resetlocale(LC_ALL);
-
 	/*
 	 * Check whether the converted name will fit back into 'buffer'.
 	 */
 	dstlen = strlen(dst);
 	if (isc_buffer_length(buffer) < used_org + dstlen) {
-		result = ISC_R_NOSPACE;
-		goto cleanup;
+		idn2_free(dst);
+		return (ISC_R_NOSPACE);
 	}
 
 	/*
@@ -4452,12 +4449,9 @@ idn_output_filter(isc_buffer_t *buffer, unsigned int used_org) {
 	/*
 	 * Clean up.
 	 */
-cleanup:
-	if (dst != NULL) {
-		idn2_free(dst);
-	}
+	idn2_free(dst);
 
-	return (result);
+	return (ISC_R_SUCCESS);
 }
 
 /*%
@@ -4473,16 +4467,11 @@ idn_locale_to_ace(const char *src, char *dst, size_t dstlen) {
 	char *ascii_src;
 	int res;
 
-	systemlocale(LC_ALL);
-
 	/*
 	 * We trust libidn2 to return an error if 'src' is too large to be a
 	 * valid domain name.
 	 */
 	res = idn2_to_ascii_lz(src, &ascii_src, IDN2_NONTRANSITIONAL);
-	if (res == IDN2_DISALLOWED) {
-		res = idn2_to_ascii_lz(src, &ascii_src, IDN2_TRANSITIONAL);
-	}
 	if (res != IDN2_OK) {
 		fatal("'%s' is not a legal IDNA2008 name (%s), use +noidnin",
 		      src, idn2_strerror(res));
@@ -4498,8 +4487,6 @@ idn_locale_to_ace(const char *src, char *dst, size_t dstlen) {
 	(void)strlcpy(dst, final_src, dstlen);
 
 	idn2_free(ascii_src);
-
-	resetlocale(LC_ALL);
 }
 
 /*%
@@ -4514,8 +4501,6 @@ idn_ace_to_locale(const char *src, char **dst) {
 	char *local_src, *utf8_src;
 	int res;
 
-	systemlocale(LC_ALL);
-
 	/*
 	 * We need to:
 	 *
@@ -4544,13 +4529,9 @@ idn_ace_to_locale(const char *src, char **dst) {
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Then, check whether decoded 'src' is a valid IDNA2008 name
-	 * and if disallowed character is found, fallback to IDNA2003.
+	 * Then, check whether decoded 'src' is a valid IDNA2008 name.
 	 */
 	res = idn2_to_ascii_8z(utf8_src, NULL, IDN2_NONTRANSITIONAL);
-	if (res == IDN2_DISALLOWED) {
-		res = idn2_to_ascii_8z(utf8_src, NULL, IDN2_TRANSITIONAL);
-	}
 	if (res != IDN2_OK) {
 		fatal("'%s' is not a legal IDNA2008 name (%s), use +noidnout",
 		      src, idn2_strerror(res));
@@ -4585,7 +4566,5 @@ idn_ace_to_locale(const char *src, char **dst) {
 	idn2_free(utf8_src);
 
 	*dst = local_src;
-
-	resetlocale(LC_ALL);
 }
 #endif /* HAVE_LIBIDN2 */

bin/dig/host.1

@@ -0,0 +1,273 @@
+.\" Copyright (C) 2000-2002, 2004, 2005, 2007-2009, 2014-2020 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.\" 
+.\" This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
+.\" License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+.\" file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+.\"
+.hy 0
+.ad l
+'\" t
+.\"     Title: host
+.\"    Author: 
+.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.78.1 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
+.\"      Date: 2009-01-20
+.\"    Manual: BIND9
+.\"    Source: ISC
+.\"  Language: English
+.\"
+.TH "HOST" "1" "2009\-01\-20" "ISC" "BIND9"
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" * Define some portability stuff
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+.\" http://bugs.debian.org/507673
+.\" http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/groff/2009-02/msg00013.html
+.\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq
+.el       .ds Aq '
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" * set default formatting
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" disable hyphenation
+.nh
+.\" disable justification (adjust text to left margin only)
+.ad l
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.SH "NAME"
+host \- DNS lookup utility
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.HP \w'\fBhost\fR\ 'u
+\fBhost\fR [\fB\-aACdlnrsTUwv\fR] [\fB\-c\ \fR\fB\fIclass\fR\fR] [\fB\-N\ \fR\fB\fIndots\fR\fR] [\fB\-R\ \fR\fB\fInumber\fR\fR] [\fB\-t\ \fR\fB\fItype\fR\fR] [\fB\-W\ \fR\fB\fIwait\fR\fR] [\fB\-m\ \fR\fB\fIflag\fR\fR] [[\fB\-4\fR] | [\fB\-6\fR]] [\fB\-v\fR] [\fB\-V\fR] {name} [server]
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBhost\fR
+is a simple utility for performing DNS lookups\&. It is normally used to convert names to IP addresses and vice versa\&. When no arguments or options are given,
+\fBhost\fR
+prints a short summary of its command line arguments and options\&.
+.PP
+\fIname\fR
+is the domain name that is to be looked up\&. It can also be a dotted\-decimal IPv4 address or a colon\-delimited IPv6 address, in which case
+\fBhost\fR
+will by default perform a reverse lookup for that address\&.
+\fIserver\fR
+is an optional argument which is either the name or IP address of the name server that
+\fBhost\fR
+should query instead of the server or servers listed in
+/etc/resolv\&.conf\&.
+.SH "OPTIONS"
+.PP
+\-4
+.RS 4
+Use IPv4 only for query transport\&. See also the
+\fB\-6\fR
+option\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-6
+.RS 4
+Use IPv6 only for query transport\&. See also the
+\fB\-4\fR
+option\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-a
+.RS 4
+"All"\&. The
+\fB\-a\fR
+option is normally equivalent to
+\fB\-v \-t \fR\fBANY\fR\&. It also affects the behaviour of the
+\fB\-l\fR
+list zone option\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-A
+.RS 4
+"Almost all"\&. The
+\fB\-A\fR
+option is equivalent to
+\fB\-a\fR
+except RRSIG, NSEC, and NSEC3 records are omitted from the output\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-c \fIclass\fR
+.RS 4
+Query class: This can be used to lookup HS (Hesiod) or CH (Chaosnet) class resource records\&. The default class is IN (Internet)\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-C
+.RS 4
+Check consistency:
+\fBhost\fR
+will query the SOA records for zone
+\fIname\fR
+from all the listed authoritative name servers for that zone\&. The list of name servers is defined by the NS records that are found for the zone\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-d
+.RS 4
+Print debugging traces\&. Equivalent to the
+\fB\-v\fR
+verbose option\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-l
+.RS 4
+List zone: The
+\fBhost\fR
+command performs a zone transfer of zone
+\fIname\fR
+and prints out the NS, PTR and address records (A/AAAA)\&.
+.sp
+Together, the
+\fB\-l \-a\fR
+options print all records in the zone\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-N \fIndots\fR
+.RS 4
+The number of dots that have to be in
+\fIname\fR
+for it to be considered absolute\&. The default value is that defined using the ndots statement in
+/etc/resolv\&.conf, or 1 if no ndots statement is present\&. Names with fewer dots are interpreted as relative names and will be searched for in the domains listed in the
+\fBsearch\fR
+or
+\fBdomain\fR
+directive in
+/etc/resolv\&.conf\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-r
+.RS 4
+Non\-recursive query: Setting this option clears the RD (recursion desired) bit in the query\&. This should mean that the name server receiving the query will not attempt to resolve
+\fIname\fR\&. The
+\fB\-r\fR
+option enables
+\fBhost\fR
+to mimic the behavior of a name server by making non\-recursive queries and expecting to receive answers to those queries that can be referrals to other name servers\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-R \fInumber\fR
+.RS 4
+Number of retries for UDP queries: If
+\fInumber\fR
+is negative or zero, the number of retries will default to 1\&. The default value is 1, or the value of the
+\fIattempts\fR
+option in
+/etc/resolv\&.conf, if set\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-s
+.RS 4
+Do
+\fInot\fR
+send the query to the next nameserver if any server responds with a SERVFAIL response, which is the reverse of normal stub resolver behavior\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-t \fItype\fR
+.RS 4
+Query type: The
+\fItype\fR
+argument can be any recognized query type: CNAME, NS, SOA, TXT, DNSKEY, AXFR, etc\&.
+.sp
+When no query type is specified,
+\fBhost\fR
+automatically selects an appropriate query type\&. By default, it looks for A, AAAA, and MX records\&. If the
+\fB\-C\fR
+option is given, queries will be made for SOA records\&. If
+\fIname\fR
+is a dotted\-decimal IPv4 address or colon\-delimited IPv6 address,
+\fBhost\fR
+will query for PTR records\&.
+.sp
+If a query type of IXFR is chosen the starting serial number can be specified by appending an equal followed by the starting serial number (like
+\fB\-t \fR\fBIXFR=12345678\fR)\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-T, \-U
+.RS 4
+TCP/UDP: By default,
+\fBhost\fR
+uses UDP when making queries\&. The
+\fB\-T\fR
+option makes it use a TCP connection when querying the name server\&. TCP will be automatically selected for queries that require it, such as zone transfer (AXFR) requests\&. Type ANY queries default to TCP but can be forced to UDP initially using
+\fB\-U\fR\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-m \fIflag\fR
+.RS 4
+Memory usage debugging: the flag can be
+\fIrecord\fR,
+\fIusage\fR, or
+\fItrace\fR\&. You can specify the
+\fB\-m\fR
+option more than once to set multiple flags\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-v
+.RS 4
+Verbose output\&. Equivalent to the
+\fB\-d\fR
+debug option\&. Verbose output can also be enabled by setting the
+\fIdebug\fR
+option in
+/etc/resolv\&.conf\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-V
+.RS 4
+Print the version number and exit\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-w
+.RS 4
+Wait forever: The query timeout is set to the maximum possible\&. See also the
+\fB\-W\fR
+option\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\-W \fIwait\fR
+.RS 4
+Timeout: Wait for up to
+\fIwait\fR
+seconds for a reply\&. If
+\fIwait\fR
+is less than one, the wait interval is set to one second\&.
+.sp
+By default,
+\fBhost\fR
+will wait for 5 seconds for UDP responses and 10 seconds for TCP connections\&. These defaults can be overridden by the
+\fItimeout\fR
+option in
+/etc/resolv\&.conf\&.
+.sp
+See also the
+\fB\-w\fR
+option\&.
+.RE
+.SH "IDN SUPPORT"
+.PP
+If
+\fBhost\fR
+has been built with IDN (internationalized domain name) support, it can accept and display non\-ASCII domain names\&.
+\fBhost\fR
+appropriately converts character encoding of domain name before sending a request to DNS server or displaying a reply from the server\&. If you\*(Aqd like to turn off the IDN support for some reason, define the
+\fBIDN_DISABLE\fR
+environment variable\&. The IDN support is disabled if the variable is set when
+\fBhost\fR
+runs\&.
+.SH "FILES"
+.PP
+/etc/resolv\&.conf
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBdig\fR(1),
+\fBnamed\fR(8)\&.
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+\fBInternet Systems Consortium, Inc\&.\fR
+.SH "COPYRIGHT"
+.br
+Copyright \(co 2000-2002, 2004, 2005, 2007-2009, 2014-2020 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.br

bin/dig/host.c

@@ -1,11 +1,9 @@
 /*
  * Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
  *
- * SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
- *
  * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
  * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
- * file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+ * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
  *
  * See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
  * information regarding copyright ownership.
@@ -15,10 +13,13 @@
 
 #include <inttypes.h>
 #include <limits.h>
-#include <locale.h>
 #include <stdbool.h>
 #include <stdlib.h>
 
+#ifdef HAVE_LOCALE_H
+#include <locale.h>
+#endif /* ifdef HAVE_LOCALE_H */
+
 #include <isc/app.h>
 #include <isc/commandline.h>
 #include <isc/netaddr.h>
@@ -147,11 +148,7 @@ received(unsigned int bytes, isc_sockaddr_t *from, dig_query_t *query) {
 	if (!short_form) {
 		char fromtext[ISC_SOCKADDR_FORMATSIZE];
 		isc_sockaddr_format(from, fromtext, sizeof(fromtext));
-		if (query->lookup->use_usec) {
-			TIME_NOW_HIRES(&now);
-		} else {
-			TIME_NOW(&now);
-		}
+		TIME_NOW(&now);
 		diff = (int)isc_time_microdiff(&now, &query->time_sent);
 		printf("Received %u bytes from %s in %d ms\n", bytes, fromtext,
 		       diff / 1000);
@@ -208,9 +205,15 @@ printsection(dns_message_t *msg, dns_section_t sectionid,
 	isc_result_t result, loopresult;
 	isc_region_t r;
 	dns_name_t empty_name;
-	char tbuf[4096] = { 0 };
+	char tbuf[4096];
 	bool first;
-	bool no_rdata = (sectionid == DNS_SECTION_QUESTION);
+	bool no_rdata;
+
+	if (sectionid == DNS_SECTION_QUESTION) {
+		no_rdata = true;
+	} else {
+		no_rdata = false;
+	}
 
 	if (headers) {
 		printf(";; %s SECTION:\n", section_name);
@@ -767,7 +770,7 @@ parse_args(bool is_batchfile, int argc, char **argv) {
 			break;
 		case 'A':
 			list_almost_all = true;
-			FALLTHROUGH;
+		/* FALL THROUGH */
 		case 'a':
 			if (!lookup->rdtypeset ||
 			    lookup->rdtype != dns_rdatatype_axfr) {

bin/dig/host.docbook

@@ -0,0 +1,416 @@
+<!DOCTYPE book [
+<!ENTITY mdash "&#8212;">]>
+<!--
+ - Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ -
+ - This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
+ - License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+ - file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+ -
+ - See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
+ - information regarding copyright ownership.
+-->
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<refentry xmlns:db="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="man.host">
+  <info>
+    <date>2009-01-20</date>
+  </info>
+  <refentryinfo>
+    <corpname>ISC</corpname>
+    <corpauthor>Internet Systems Consortium, Inc.</corpauthor>
+  </refentryinfo>
+
+  <refmeta>
+    <refentrytitle>host</refentrytitle>
+    <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
+    <refmiscinfo>BIND9</refmiscinfo>
+  </refmeta>
+
+  <refnamediv>
+    <refname>host</refname>
+    <refpurpose>DNS lookup utility</refpurpose>
+  </refnamediv>
+
+  <docinfo>
+    <copyright>
+      <year>2000</year>
+      <year>2001</year>
+      <year>2002</year>
+      <year>2004</year>
+      <year>2005</year>
+      <year>2007</year>
+      <year>2008</year>
+      <year>2009</year>
+      <year>2014</year>
+      <year>2015</year>
+      <year>2016</year>
+      <year>2017</year>
+      <year>2018</year>
+      <year>2019</year>
+      <year>2020</year>
+      <holder>Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")</holder>
+    </copyright>
+  </docinfo>
+
+  <refsynopsisdiv>
+    <cmdsynopsis sepchar=" ">
+      <command>host</command>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-aACdlnrsTUwv</option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-c <replaceable class="parameter">class</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-N <replaceable class="parameter">ndots</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-p <replaceable class="port">port</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-R <replaceable class="parameter">number</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-t <replaceable class="parameter">type</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-W <replaceable class="parameter">wait</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-m <replaceable class="parameter">flag</replaceable></option></arg>
+      <group choice="opt" rep="norepeat">
+	<arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-4</option></arg>
+	<arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-6</option></arg>
+      </group>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-v</option></arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat"><option>-V</option></arg>
+      <arg choice="req" rep="norepeat">name</arg>
+      <arg choice="opt" rep="norepeat">server</arg>
+    </cmdsynopsis>
+  </refsynopsisdiv>
+
+  <refsection><info><title>DESCRIPTION</title></info>
+
+
+    <para><command>host</command>
+      is a simple utility for performing DNS lookups.
+      It is normally used to convert names to IP addresses and vice versa.
+      When no arguments or options are given,
+      <command>host</command>
+      prints a short summary of its command line arguments and options.
+    </para>
+
+    <para><parameter>name</parameter> is the domain name that is to be
+      looked
+      up.  It can also be a dotted-decimal IPv4 address or a colon-delimited
+      IPv6 address, in which case <command>host</command> will by
+      default
+      perform a reverse lookup for that address.
+      <parameter>server</parameter> is an optional argument which
+      is either
+      the name or IP address of the name server that <command>host</command>
+      should query instead of the server or servers listed in
+      <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>.
+    </para>
+
+  </refsection>
+
+  <refsection><info><title>OPTIONS</title></info>
+
+    <variablelist>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-4</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Use IPv4 only for query transport.
+	    See also the <option>-6</option> option.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-6</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Use IPv6 only for query transport.
+	    See also the <option>-4</option> option.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-a</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    "All". The <option>-a</option> option is normally equivalent
+	    to <option>-v -t <literal>ANY</literal></option>.
+	    It also affects the behaviour of the <option>-l</option>
+	    list zone option.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-A</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    "Almost all". The <option>-A</option> option is equivalent
+	    to <option>-a</option> except RRSIG, NSEC, and NSEC3
+	    records are omitted from the output.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-c <replaceable class="parameter">class</replaceable></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Query class: This can be used to lookup HS (Hesiod) or CH
+	    (Chaosnet) class resource records. The default class is IN
+	    (Internet).
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-C</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Check consistency: <command>host</command> will query the
+	    SOA records for zone <parameter>name</parameter> from all
+	    the listed authoritative name servers for that zone. The
+	    list of name servers is defined by the NS records that are
+	    found for the zone.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-d</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Print debugging traces.
+	    Equivalent to the <option>-v</option> verbose option.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-l</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    List zone:
+	    The <command>host</command> command performs a zone transfer of
+	    zone <parameter>name</parameter> and prints out the NS,
+	    PTR and address records (A/AAAA).
+	  </para>
+	  <para>
+	    Together, the <option>-l -a</option>
+	    options print all records in the zone.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-N <replaceable class="parameter">ndots</replaceable></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    The number of dots that have to be
+	    in <parameter>name</parameter> for it to be considered
+	    absolute. The default value is that defined using the
+	    ndots statement in <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>,
+	    or 1 if no ndots statement is present. Names with fewer
+	    dots are interpreted as relative names and will be
+	    searched for in the domains listed in
+	    the <type>search</type> or <type>domain</type> directive
+	    in <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-p <replaceable class="parameter">port</replaceable></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Specify the port on the server to query.  The default is 53.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-r</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Non-recursive query:
+	    Setting this option clears the RD (recursion desired) bit
+	    in the query. This should mean that the name server
+	    receiving the query will not attempt to
+	    resolve <parameter>name</parameter>.
+	    The <option>-r</option> option
+	    enables <command>host</command> to mimic the behavior of a
+	    name server by making non-recursive queries and expecting
+	    to receive answers to those queries that can be
+	    referrals to other name servers.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-R <replaceable class="parameter">number</replaceable></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Number of retries for UDP queries:
+	    If <parameter>number</parameter> is negative or zero, the
+	    number of retries will default to 1. The default value is
+	    1, or the value of the <parameter>attempts</parameter>
+	    option in <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>, if set.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-s</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Do <emphasis>not</emphasis> send the query to the next
+	    nameserver if any server responds with a SERVFAIL
+	    response, which is the reverse of normal stub resolver
+	    behavior.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-t <replaceable class="parameter">type</replaceable></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Query type:
+	    The <parameter>type</parameter> argument can be any
+	    recognized query type: CNAME, NS, SOA, TXT, DNSKEY, AXFR, etc.
+	  </para>
+	  <para>
+	    When no query type is specified, <command>host</command>
+	    automatically selects an appropriate query type. By default, it
+	    looks for A, AAAA, and MX records.
+	    If the <option>-C</option> option is given, queries will
+	    be made for SOA records.
+	    If <parameter>name</parameter> is a dotted-decimal IPv4
+	    address or colon-delimited IPv6
+	    address, <command>host</command> will query for PTR
+	    records.
+	  </para>
+	  <para>
+	    If a query type of IXFR is chosen the starting serial
+	    number can be specified by appending an equal followed by
+	    the starting serial number
+	    (like <option>-t <literal>IXFR=12345678</literal></option>).
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-T</term>
+	<term>-U</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    TCP/UDP:
+	    By default, <command>host</command> uses UDP when making
+	    queries. The <option>-T</option> option makes it use a TCP
+	    connection when querying the name server. TCP will be
+	    automatically selected for queries that require it, such
+	    as zone transfer (AXFR) requests.  Type ANY queries default
+	    to TCP but can be forced to UDP initially using <option>-U</option>.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-m <replaceable class="parameter">flag</replaceable></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Memory usage debugging: the flag can
+	    be <parameter>record</parameter>, <parameter>usage</parameter>,
+	    or <parameter>trace</parameter>. You can specify
+	    the <option>-m</option> option more than once to set
+	    multiple flags.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-v</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Verbose output.
+	    Equivalent to the <option>-d</option> debug option.
+	    Verbose output can also be enabled by setting
+	    the <parameter>debug</parameter> option
+	    in <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-V</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Print the version number and exit.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-w</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Wait forever: The query timeout is set to the maximum possible.
+	    See also the <option>-W</option> option.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>-W <replaceable class="parameter">wait</replaceable></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Timeout: Wait for up to <parameter>wait</parameter>
+	    seconds for a reply. If <parameter>wait</parameter> is
+	    less than one, the wait interval is set to one second.
+	  </para>
+	  <para>
+	    By default, <command>host</command> will wait for 5
+	    seconds for UDP responses and 10 seconds for TCP
+	    connections. These defaults can be overridden by
+	    the <parameter>timeout</parameter> option
+	    in <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>.
+	  </para>
+	  <para>
+	    See also the <option>-w</option> option.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+    </variablelist>
+
+  </refsection>
+
+  <refsection><info><title>IDN SUPPORT</title></info>
+
+    <para>
+      If <command>host</command> has been built with IDN (internationalized
+      domain name) support, it can accept and display non-ASCII domain names.
+      <command>host</command> appropriately converts character encoding of
+      domain name before sending a request to DNS server or displaying a
+      reply from the server.
+      If you'd like to turn off the IDN support for some reason, define
+      the <envar>IDN_DISABLE</envar> environment variable.
+      The IDN support is disabled if the variable is set when
+      <command>host</command> runs.
+    </para>
+  </refsection>
+
+  <refsection><info><title>FILES</title></info>
+
+    <para><filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>
+    </para>
+  </refsection>
+
+  <refsection><info><title>SEE ALSO</title></info>
+
+    <para><citerefentry>
+        <refentrytitle>dig</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
+      </citerefentry>,
+      <citerefentry>
+        <refentrytitle>named</refentrytitle><manvolnum>8</manvolnum>
+      </citerefentry>.
+    </para>
+  </refsection>
+
+</refentry>

bin/dig/host.html

@@ -0,0 +1,332 @@
+<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/loose.dtd">
+<!--
+ - Copyright (C) 2000-2002, 2004, 2005, 2007-2009, 2014-2020 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ - 
+ - This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
+ - License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+ - file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+-->
+<html lang="en">
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1">
+<title>host</title>
+<meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.78.1">
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry">
+<a name="man.host"></a><div class="titlepage"></div>
+  
+  
+
+  
+
+  <div class="refnamediv">
+<h2>Name</h2>
+<p>
+    host
+     &#8212; DNS lookup utility
+  </p>
+</div>
+
+  
+
+  <div class="refsynopsisdiv">
+<h2>Synopsis</h2>
+    <div class="cmdsynopsis"><p>
+      <code class="command">host</code> 
+       [<code class="option">-aACdlnrsTUwv</code>]
+       [<code class="option">-c <em class="replaceable"><code>class</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-N <em class="replaceable"><code>ndots</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-R <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-t <em class="replaceable"><code>type</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-W <em class="replaceable"><code>wait</code></em></code>]
+       [<code class="option">-m <em class="replaceable"><code>flag</code></em></code>]
+       [
+	[<code class="option">-4</code>]
+	 |  [<code class="option">-6</code>]
+      ]
+       [<code class="option">-v</code>]
+       [<code class="option">-V</code>]
+       {name}
+       [server]
+    </p></div>
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="refsection">
+<a name="id-1.7"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2>
+
+
+    <p><span class="command"><strong>host</strong></span>
+      is a simple utility for performing DNS lookups.
+      It is normally used to convert names to IP addresses and vice versa.
+      When no arguments or options are given,
+      <span class="command"><strong>host</strong></span>
+      prints a short summary of its command line arguments and options.
+    </p>
+
+    <p><em class="parameter"><code>name</code></em> is the domain name that is to be
+      looked
+      up.  It can also be a dotted-decimal IPv4 address or a colon-delimited
+      IPv6 address, in which case <span class="command"><strong>host</strong></span> will by
+      default
+      perform a reverse lookup for that address.
+      <em class="parameter"><code>server</code></em> is an optional argument which
+      is either
+      the name or IP address of the name server that <span class="command"><strong>host</strong></span>
+      should query instead of the server or servers listed in
+      <code class="filename">/etc/resolv.conf</code>.
+    </p>
+
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="refsection">
+<a name="id-1.8"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2>
+
+    <div class="variablelist"><dl class="variablelist">
+<dt><span class="term">-4</span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Use IPv4 only for query transport.
+	    See also the <code class="option">-6</code> option.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-6</span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Use IPv6 only for query transport.
+	    See also the <code class="option">-4</code> option.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-a</span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    "All". The <code class="option">-a</code> option is normally equivalent
+	    to <code class="option">-v -t <code class="literal">ANY</code></code>.
+	    It also affects the behaviour of the <code class="option">-l</code>
+	    list zone option.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-A</span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    "Almost all". The <code class="option">-A</code> option is equivalent
+	    to <code class="option">-a</code> except RRSIG, NSEC, and NSEC3
+	    records are omitted from the output.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-c <em class="replaceable"><code>class</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Query class: This can be used to lookup HS (Hesiod) or CH
+	    (Chaosnet) class resource records. The default class is IN
+	    (Internet).
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-C</span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Check consistency: <span class="command"><strong>host</strong></span> will query the
+	    SOA records for zone <em class="parameter"><code>name</code></em> from all
+	    the listed authoritative name servers for that zone. The
+	    list of name servers is defined by the NS records that are
+	    found for the zone.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-d</span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Print debugging traces.
+	    Equivalent to the <code class="option">-v</code> verbose option.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-l</span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    List zone:
+	    The <span class="command"><strong>host</strong></span> command performs a zone transfer of
+	    zone <em class="parameter"><code>name</code></em> and prints out the NS,
+	    PTR and address records (A/AAAA).
+	  </p>
+	  <p>
+	    Together, the <code class="option">-l -a</code>
+	    options print all records in the zone.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-N <em class="replaceable"><code>ndots</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    The number of dots that have to be
+	    in <em class="parameter"><code>name</code></em> for it to be considered
+	    absolute. The default value is that defined using the
+	    ndots statement in <code class="filename">/etc/resolv.conf</code>,
+	    or 1 if no ndots statement is present. Names with fewer
+	    dots are interpreted as relative names and will be
+	    searched for in the domains listed in
+	    the <span class="type">search</span> or <span class="type">domain</span> directive
+	    in <code class="filename">/etc/resolv.conf</code>.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-r</span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Non-recursive query:
+	    Setting this option clears the RD (recursion desired) bit
+	    in the query. This should mean that the name server
+	    receiving the query will not attempt to
+	    resolve <em class="parameter"><code>name</code></em>.
+	    The <code class="option">-r</code> option
+	    enables <span class="command"><strong>host</strong></span> to mimic the behavior of a
+	    name server by making non-recursive queries and expecting
+	    to receive answers to those queries that can be
+	    referrals to other name servers.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-R <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Number of retries for UDP queries:
+	    If <em class="parameter"><code>number</code></em> is negative or zero, the
+	    number of retries will default to 1. The default value is
+	    1, or the value of the <em class="parameter"><code>attempts</code></em>
+	    option in <code class="filename">/etc/resolv.conf</code>, if set.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-s</span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Do <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span> send the query to the next
+	    nameserver if any server responds with a SERVFAIL
+	    response, which is the reverse of normal stub resolver
+	    behavior.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-t <em class="replaceable"><code>type</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Query type:
+	    The <em class="parameter"><code>type</code></em> argument can be any
+	    recognized query type: CNAME, NS, SOA, TXT, DNSKEY, AXFR, etc.
+	  </p>
+	  <p>
+	    When no query type is specified, <span class="command"><strong>host</strong></span>
+	    automatically selects an appropriate query type. By default, it
+	    looks for A, AAAA, and MX records.
+	    If the <code class="option">-C</code> option is given, queries will
+	    be made for SOA records.
+	    If <em class="parameter"><code>name</code></em> is a dotted-decimal IPv4
+	    address or colon-delimited IPv6
+	    address, <span class="command"><strong>host</strong></span> will query for PTR
+	    records.
+	  </p>
+	  <p>
+	    If a query type of IXFR is chosen the starting serial
+	    number can be specified by appending an equal followed by
+	    the starting serial number
+	    (like <code class="option">-t <code class="literal">IXFR=12345678</code></code>).
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term">-T, </span><span class="term">-U</span>
+</dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    TCP/UDP:
+	    By default, <span class="command"><strong>host</strong></span> uses UDP when making
+	    queries. The <code class="option">-T</code> option makes it use a TCP
+	    connection when querying the name server. TCP will be
+	    automatically selected for queries that require it, such
+	    as zone transfer (AXFR) requests.  Type ANY queries default
+	    to TCP but can be forced to UDP initially using <code class="option">-U</code>.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-m <em class="replaceable"><code>flag</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Memory usage debugging: the flag can
+	    be <em class="parameter"><code>record</code></em>, <em class="parameter"><code>usage</code></em>,
+	    or <em class="parameter"><code>trace</code></em>. You can specify
+	    the <code class="option">-m</code> option more than once to set
+	    multiple flags.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-v</span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Verbose output.
+	    Equivalent to the <code class="option">-d</code> debug option.
+	    Verbose output can also be enabled by setting
+	    the <em class="parameter"><code>debug</code></em> option
+	    in <code class="filename">/etc/resolv.conf</code>.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-V</span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Print the version number and exit.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-w</span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Wait forever: The query timeout is set to the maximum possible.
+	    See also the <code class="option">-W</code> option.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-W <em class="replaceable"><code>wait</code></em></span></dt>
+<dd>
+	  <p>
+	    Timeout: Wait for up to <em class="parameter"><code>wait</code></em>
+	    seconds for a reply. If <em class="parameter"><code>wait</code></em> is
+	    less than one, the wait interval is set to one second.
+	  </p>
+	  <p>
+	    By default, <span class="command"><strong>host</strong></span> will wait for 5
+	    seconds for UDP responses and 10 seconds for TCP
+	    connections. These defaults can be overridden by
+	    the <em class="parameter"><code>timeout</code></em> option
+	    in <code class="filename">/etc/resolv.conf</code>.
+	  </p>
+	  <p>
+	    See also the <code class="option">-w</code> option.
+	  </p>
+	</dd>
+</dl></div>
+
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="refsection">
+<a name="id-1.9"></a><h2>IDN SUPPORT</h2>
+
+    <p>
+      If <span class="command"><strong>host</strong></span> has been built with IDN (internationalized
+      domain name) support, it can accept and display non-ASCII domain names.
+      <span class="command"><strong>host</strong></span> appropriately converts character encoding of
+      domain name before sending a request to DNS server or displaying a
+      reply from the server.
+      If you'd like to turn off the IDN support for some reason, define
+      the <code class="envar">IDN_DISABLE</code> environment variable.
+      The IDN support is disabled if the variable is set when
+      <span class="command"><strong>host</strong></span> runs.
+    </p>
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="refsection">
+<a name="id-1.10"></a><h2>FILES</h2>
+
+    <p><code class="filename">/etc/resolv.conf</code>
+    </p>
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="refsection">
+<a name="id-1.11"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2>
+
+    <p><span class="citerefentry">
+        <span class="refentrytitle">dig</span>(1)
+      </span>,
+      <span class="citerefentry">
+        <span class="refentrytitle">named</span>(8)
+      </span>.
+    </p>
+  </div>
+
+</div></body>
+</html>

bin/dig/host.rst

@@ -1,171 +0,0 @@
-.. Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-..
-.. SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
-..
-.. This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
-.. License, v. 2.0.  If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
-.. file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
-..
-.. See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
-.. information regarding copyright ownership.
-
-.. highlight: console
-
-.. _man_host:
-
-host - DNS lookup utility
--------------------------
-
-Synopsis
-~~~~~~~~
-
-:program:`host` [**-aACdlnrsTUwv**] [**-c** class] [**-N** ndots] [**-p** port] [**-R** number] [**-t** type] [**-W** wait] [**-m** flag] [ [**-4**] | [**-6**] ] [**-v**] [**-V**] {name} [server]
-
-Description
-~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-``host`` is a simple utility for performing DNS lookups. It is normally
-used to convert names to IP addresses and vice versa. When no arguments
-or options are given, ``host`` prints a short summary of its
-command-line arguments and options.
-
-``name`` is the domain name that is to be looked up. It can also be a
-dotted-decimal IPv4 address or a colon-delimited IPv6 address, in which
-case ``host`` by default performs a reverse lookup for that address.
-``server`` is an optional argument which is either the name or IP
-address of the name server that ``host`` should query instead of the
-server or servers listed in ``/etc/resolv.conf``.
-
-Options
-~~~~~~~
-
-``-4``
-   This option specifies that only IPv4 should be used for query transport. See also the ``-6`` option.
-
-``-6``
-   This option specifies that only IPv6 should be used for query transport. See also the ``-4`` option.
-
-``-a``
-   The ``-a`` ("all") option is normally equivalent to ``-v -t ANY``. It
-   also affects the behavior of the ``-l`` list zone option.
-
-``-A``
-   The ``-A`` ("almost all") option is equivalent to ``-a``, except that RRSIG,
-   NSEC, and NSEC3 records are omitted from the output.
-
-``-c class``
-   This option specifies the query class, which can be used to lookup HS (Hesiod) or CH (Chaosnet)
-   class resource records. The default class is IN (Internet).
-
-``-C``
-   This option indicates that ``named`` should check consistency, meaning that ``host`` queries the SOA records for zone
-   ``name`` from all the listed authoritative name servers for that
-   zone. The list of name servers is defined by the NS records that are
-   found for the zone.
-
-``-d``
-   This option prints debugging traces, and is equivalent to the ``-v`` verbose option.
-
-``-l``
-   This option tells ``named`` to list the zone, meaning the ``host`` command performs a zone transfer of zone
-   ``name`` and prints out the NS, PTR, and address records (A/AAAA).
-
-   Together, the ``-l -a`` options print all records in the zone.
-
-``-N ndots``
-   This option specifies the number of dots (``ndots``) that have to be in ``name`` for it to be
-   considered absolute. The default value is that defined using the
-   ``ndots`` statement in ``/etc/resolv.conf``, or 1 if no ``ndots`` statement
-   is present. Names with fewer dots are interpreted as relative names,
-   and are searched for in the domains listed in the ``search`` or
-   ``domain`` directive in ``/etc/resolv.conf``.
-
-``-p port``
-   This option specifies the port to query on the server. The default is 53.
-
-``-r``
-   This option specifies a non-recursive query; setting this option clears the RD (recursion
-   desired) bit in the query. This means that the name server
-   receiving the query does not attempt to resolve ``name``. The ``-r``
-   option enables ``host`` to mimic the behavior of a name server by
-   making non-recursive queries, and expecting to receive answers to
-   those queries that can be referrals to other name servers.
-
-``-R number``
-   This option specifies the number of retries for UDP queries. If ``number`` is negative or zero,
-   the number of retries is silently set to 1. The default value is 1, or
-   the value of the ``attempts`` option in ``/etc/resolv.conf``, if set.
-
-``-s``
-   This option tells ``named`` *not* to send the query to the next nameserver if any server responds
-   with a SERVFAIL response, which is the reverse of normal stub
-   resolver behavior.
-
-``-t type``
-   This option specifies the query type. The ``type`` argument can be any recognized query type:
-   CNAME, NS, SOA, TXT, DNSKEY, AXFR, etc.
-
-   When no query type is specified, ``host`` automatically selects an
-   appropriate query type. By default, it looks for A, AAAA, and MX
-   records. If the ``-C`` option is given, queries are made for SOA
-   records. If ``name`` is a dotted-decimal IPv4 address or
-   colon-delimited IPv6 address, ``host`` queries for PTR records.
-
-   If a query type of IXFR is chosen, the starting serial number can be
-   specified by appending an equals sign (=), followed by the starting serial
-   number, e.g., ``-t IXFR=12345678``.
-
-``-T``; ``-U``
-   This option specifies TCP or UDP. By default, ``host`` uses UDP when making queries; the
-   ``-T`` option makes it use a TCP connection when querying the name
-   server. TCP is automatically selected for queries that require
-   it, such as zone transfer (AXFR) requests. Type ``ANY`` queries default
-   to TCP, but can be forced to use UDP initially via ``-U``.
-
-``-m flag``
-   This option sets memory usage debugging: the flag can be ``record``, ``usage``, or
-   ``trace``. The ``-m`` option can be specified more than once to set
-   multiple flags.
-
-``-v``
-   This option sets verbose output, and is equivalent to the ``-d`` debug option. Verbose output
-   can also be enabled by setting the ``debug`` option in
-   ``/etc/resolv.conf``.
-
-``-V``
-   This option prints the version number and exits.
-
-``-w``
-   This option sets "wait forever": the query timeout is set to the maximum possible. See
-   also the ``-W`` option.
-
-``-W wait``
-   This options sets the length of the wait timeout, indicating that ``named`` should wait for up to ``wait`` seconds for a reply. If ``wait`` is
-   less than 1, the wait interval is set to 1 second.
-
-   By default, ``host`` waits for 5 seconds for UDP responses and 10
-   seconds for TCP connections. These defaults can be overridden by the
-   ``timeout`` option in ``/etc/resolv.conf``.
-
-   See also the ``-w`` option.
-
-IDN Support
-~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-If ``host`` has been built with IDN (internationalized domain name)
-support, it can accept and display non-ASCII domain names. ``host``
-appropriately converts character encoding of a domain name before sending
-a request to a DNS server or displaying a reply from the server.
-To turn off IDN support, define the ``IDN_DISABLE``
-environment variable. IDN support is disabled if the variable is set
-when ``host`` runs.
-
-Files
-~~~~~
-
-``/etc/resolv.conf``
-
-See Also
-~~~~~~~~
-
-:manpage:`dig(1)`, :manpage:`named(8)`.

bin/dig/include/dig/dig.h

@@ -1,11 +1,9 @@
 /*
  * Copyright (C) Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
  *
- * SPDX-License-Identifier: MPL-2.0
- *
  * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
  * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
- * file, you can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+ * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
  *
  * See the COPYRIGHT file distributed with this work for additional
  * information regarding copyright ownership.
@@ -70,10 +68,6 @@
 #define SERVER_TIMEOUT 1
 
 #define LOOKUP_LIMIT 64
-
-#define DEFAULT_EDNS_VERSION 0
-#define DEFAULT_EDNS_BUFSIZE 4096
-
 /*%
  * Lookup_limit is just a limiter, keeping too many lookups from being
  * created.  It's job is mainly to prevent the program from running away
@@ -129,33 +123,33 @@ struct dig_lookup {
 	isc_buffer_t	 namebuf;
 	isc_buffer_t	 onamebuf;
 	isc_buffer_t	 renderbuf;
-	char		*sendspace;
-	dns_name_t	*name;
+	char *		 sendspace;
+	dns_name_t *	 name;
 	isc_interval_t	 interval;
-	dns_message_t	*sendmsg;
-	dns_name_t	*oname;
+	dns_message_t *	 sendmsg;
+	dns_name_t *	 oname;
 	ISC_LINK(dig_lookup_t) link;
 	ISC_LIST(dig_query_t) q;
 	ISC_LIST(dig_query_t) connecting;
-	dig_query_t	 *current_query;
+	dig_query_t *	  current_query;
 	dig_serverlist_t  my_server_list;
 	dig_searchlist_t *origin;
-	dig_query_t	 *xfr_q;
+	dig_query_t *	  xfr_q;
 	uint32_t	  retries;
 	int		  nsfound;
-	int16_t		  udpsize;
+	uint16_t	  udpsize;
 	int16_t		  edns;
 	int16_t		  padding;
 	uint32_t	  ixfr_serial;
 	isc_buffer_t	  rdatabuf;
 	char		  rdatastore[MXNAME];
-	dst_context_t	 *tsigctx;
-	isc_buffer_t	 *querysig;
+	dst_context_t *	  tsigctx;
+	isc_buffer_t *	  querysig;
 	uint32_t	  msgcounter;
 	dns_fixedname_t	  fdomain;
-	isc_sockaddr_t	 *ecs_addr;
-	char		 *cookie;
-	dns_ednsopt_t	 *ednsopts;
+	isc_sockaddr_t *  ecs_addr;
+	char *		  cookie;
+	dns_ednsopt_t *	  ednsopts;
 	unsigned int	  ednsoptscnt;
 	isc_dscp_t	  dscp;
 	unsigned int	  ednsflags;
@@ -176,19 +170,18 @@ struct dig_query {
 	uint32_t      msg_count;
 	uint32_t      rr_count;
 	bool	      ixfr_axfr;
-	char	     *servname;
-	char	     *userarg;
+	char *	      servname;
+	char *	      userarg;
 	isc_buffer_t  recvbuf, lengthbuf, tmpsendbuf, sendbuf;
-	char	     *recvspace, *tmpsendspace, lengthspace[4];
+	char *	      recvspace, *tmpsendspace, lengthspace[4];
 	isc_socket_t *sock;
 	ISC_LINK(dig_query_t) link;
 	ISC_LINK(dig_query_t) clink;
-	dig_query_t   *saved_next;
 	isc_sockaddr_t sockaddr;
 	isc_time_t     time_sent;
 	isc_time_t     time_recv;
 	uint64_t       byte_count;
-	isc_timer_t   *timer;
+	isc_timer_t *  timer;
 };
 
 struct dig_server {
@@ -218,7 +211,7 @@ extern bool check_ra, have_ipv4, have_ipv6, specified_source, usesearch,
 	showsearch, yaml;
 extern in_port_t	 port;
 extern unsigned int	 timeout;
-extern isc_mem_t	*mctx;
+extern isc_mem_t *	 mctx;
 extern int		 sendcount;
 extern int		 ndots;
 extern int		 lookup_counter;
@@ -229,10 +222,10 @@ extern char		 keyfile[MXNAME];
 extern char		 keysecret[MXNAME];
 extern const dns_name_t *hmacname;
 extern unsigned int	 digestbits;
-extern dns_tsigkey_t	*tsigkey;
+extern dns_tsigkey_t *	 tsigkey;
 extern bool		 validated;
-extern isc_taskmgr_t	*taskmgr;
-extern isc_task_t	*global_task;
+extern isc_taskmgr_t *	 taskmgr;
+extern isc_task_t *	 global_task;
 extern bool		 free_now;
 extern bool		 debugging, debugtiming, memdebugging;
 extern bool		 keep_open;
@@ -340,7 +333,7 @@ set_search_domain(char *domain);
  * Routines to be defined in dig.c, host.c, and nslookup.c. and
  * then assigned to the appropriate function pointer
  */
-extern isc_result_t (*dighost_printmessage)(dig_query_t	       *query,
+extern isc_result_t (*dighost_printmessage)(dig_query_t *	query,
 					    const isc_buffer_t *msgbuf,
 					    dns_message_t *msg, bool headers);
 

bin/dig/nslookup.1

@@ -0,0 +1,308 @@
+.\" Copyright (C) 2004-2007, 2010, 2013-2020 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.\" 
+.\" This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
+.\" License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
+.\" file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
+.\"
+.hy 0
+.ad l
+'\" t
+.\"     Title: nslookup
+.\"    Author: 
+.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.78.1 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
+.\"      Date: 2014-01-24
+.\"    Manual: BIND9
+.\"    Source: ISC
+.\"  Language: English
+.\"
+.TH "NSLOOKUP" "1" "2014\-01\-24" "ISC" "BIND9"
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" * Define some portability stuff
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+.\" http://bugs.debian.org/507673
+.\" http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/groff/2009-02/msg00013.html
+.\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq
+.el       .ds Aq '
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" * set default formatting
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" disable hyphenation
+.nh
+.\" disable justification (adjust text to left margin only)
+.ad l
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
+.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
+.SH "NAME"
+nslookup \- query Internet name servers interactively
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.HP \w'\fBnslookup\fR\ 'u
+\fBnslookup\fR [\fB\-option\fR] [name\ |\ \-] [server]
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+\fBNslookup\fR
+is a program to query Internet domain name servers\&.
+\fBNslookup\fR
+has two modes: interactive and non\-interactive\&. Interactive mode allows the user to query name servers for information about various hosts and domains or to print a list of hosts in a domain\&. Non\-interactive mode is used to print just the name and requested information for a host or domain\&.
+.SH "ARGUMENTS"
+.PP
+Interactive mode is entered in the following cases:
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.ie n \{\
+\h'-04' 1.\h'+01'\c
+.\}
+.el \{\
+.sp -1
+.IP "  1." 4.2
+.\}
+when no arguments are given (the default name server will be used)
+.RE
+.sp
+.RS 4
+.ie n \{\
+\h'-04' 2.\h'+01'\c
+.\}
+.el \{\
+.sp -1
+.IP "  2." 4.2
+.\}
+when the first argument is a hyphen (\-) and the second argument is the host name or Internet address of a name server\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+Non\-interactive mode is used when the name or Internet address of the host to be looked up is given as the first argument\&. The optional second argument specifies the host name or address of a name server\&.
+.PP
+Options can also be specified on the command line if they precede the arguments and are prefixed with a hyphen\&. For example, to change the default query type to host information, and the initial timeout to 10 seconds, type:
+.sp
+.if n \{\
+.RS 4
+.\}
+.nf
+nslookup \-query=hinfo  \-timeout=10
+.fi
+.if n \{\
+.RE
+.\}
+.PP
+The
+\fB\-version\fR
+option causes
+\fBnslookup\fR
+to print the version number and immediately exits\&.
+.SH "INTERACTIVE COMMANDS"
+.PP
+\fBhost\fR [server]
+.RS 4
+Look up information for host using the current default server or using server, if specified\&. If host is an Internet address and the query type is A or PTR, the name of the host is returned\&. If host is a name and does not have a trailing period, the search list is used to qualify the name\&.
+.sp
+To look up a host not in the current domain, append a period to the name\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fBserver\fR \fIdomain\fR
+.RS 4
+.RE
+.PP
+\fBlserver\fR \fIdomain\fR
+.RS 4
+Change the default server to
+\fIdomain\fR;
+\fBlserver\fR
+uses the initial server to look up information about
+\fIdomain\fR, while
+\fBserver\fR
+uses the current default server\&. If an authoritative answer can\*(Aqt be found, the names of servers that might have the answer are returned\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fBroot\fR
+.RS 4
+not implemented
+.RE
+.PP
+\fBfinger\fR
+.RS 4
+not implemented
+.RE
+.PP
+\fBls\fR
+.RS 4
+not implemented
+.RE
+.PP
+\fBview\fR
+.RS 4
+not implemented
+.RE
+.PP
+\fBhelp\fR
+.RS 4
+not implemented
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB?\fR
+.RS 4
+not implemented
+.RE
+.PP
+\fBexit\fR
+.RS 4
+Exits the program\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fBset\fR \fIkeyword\fR\fI[=value]\fR
+.RS 4
+This command is used to change state information that affects the lookups\&. Valid keywords are:
+.PP
+\fBall\fR
+.RS 4
+Prints the current values of the frequently used options to
+\fBset\fR\&. Information about the current default server and host is also printed\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fBclass=\fR\fIvalue\fR
+.RS 4
+Change the query class to one of:
+.PP
+\fBIN\fR
+.RS 4
+the Internet class
+.RE
+.PP
+\fBCH\fR
+.RS 4
+the Chaos class
+.RE
+.PP
+\fBHS\fR
+.RS 4
+the Hesiod class
+.RE
+.PP
+\fBANY\fR
+.RS 4
+wildcard
+.RE
+.sp
+The class specifies the protocol group of the information\&.
+.sp
+(Default = IN; abbreviation = cl)
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB\fI[no]\fR\fR\fBdebug\fR
+.RS 4
+Turn on or off the display of the full response packet and any intermediate response packets when searching\&.
+.sp
+(Default = nodebug; abbreviation =
+[no]deb)
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB\fI[no]\fR\fR\fBd2\fR
+.RS 4
+Turn debugging mode on or off\&. This displays more about what nslookup is doing\&.
+.sp
+(Default = nod2)
+.RE
+.PP
+\fBdomain=\fR\fIname\fR
+.RS 4
+Sets the search list to
+\fIname\fR\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB\fI[no]\fR\fR\fBsearch\fR
+.RS 4
+If the lookup request contains at least one period but doesn\*(Aqt end with a trailing period, append the domain names in the domain search list to the request until an answer is received\&.
+.sp
+(Default = search)
+.RE
+.PP
+\fBport=\fR\fIvalue\fR
+.RS 4
+Change the default TCP/UDP name server port to
+\fIvalue\fR\&.
+.sp
+(Default = 53; abbreviation = po)
+.RE
+.PP
+\fBquerytype=\fR\fIvalue\fR
+.RS 4
+.RE
+.PP
+\fBtype=\fR\fIvalue\fR
+.RS 4
+Change the type of the information query\&.
+.sp
+(Default = A and then AAAA; abbreviations = q, ty)
+.sp
+\fBNote:\fR
+It is only possible to specify one query type, only the default behavior looks up both when an alternative is not specified\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB\fI[no]\fR\fR\fBrecurse\fR
+.RS 4
+Tell the name server to query other servers if it does not have the information\&.
+.sp
+(Default = recurse; abbreviation = [no]rec)
+.RE
+.PP
+\fBndots=\fR\fInumber\fR
+.RS 4
+Set the number of dots (label separators) in a domain that will disable searching\&. Absolute names always stop searching\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fBretry=\fR\fInumber\fR
+.RS 4
+Set the number of retries to number\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fBtimeout=\fR\fInumber\fR
+.RS 4
+Change the initial timeout interval for waiting for a reply to number seconds\&.
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB\fI[no]\fR\fR\fBvc\fR
+.RS 4
+Always use a virtual circuit when sending requests to the server\&.
+.sp
+(Default = novc)
+.RE
+.PP
+\fB\fI[no]\fR\fR\fBfail\fR
+.RS 4
+Try the next nameserver if a nameserver responds with SERVFAIL or a referral (nofail) or terminate query (fail) on such a response\&.
+.sp
+(Default = nofail)
+.RE
+.sp
+.RE
+.SH "RETURN VALUES"
+.PP
+\fBnslookup\fR
+returns with an exit status of 1 if any query failed, and 0 otherwise\&.
+.SH "IDN SUPPORT"
+.PP
+If
+\fBnslookup\fR
+has been built with IDN (internationalized domain name) support, it can accept and display non\-ASCII domain names\&.
+\fBnslookup\fR
+appropriately converts character encoding of domain name before sending a request to DNS server or displaying a reply from the server\&. If you\*(Aqd like to turn off the IDN support for some reason, define the
+\fBIDN_DISABLE\fR
+environment variable\&. The IDN support is disabled if the variable is set when
+\fBnslookup\fR
+runs or when the standard output is not a tty\&.
+.SH "FILES"
+.PP
+/etc/resolv\&.conf
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PP
+\fBdig\fR(1),
+\fBhost\fR(1),
+\fBnamed\fR(8)\&.
+.SH "AUTHOR"
+.PP
+\fBInternet Systems Consortium, Inc\&.\fR
+.SH "COPYRIGHT"
+.br
+Copyright \(co 2004-2007, 2010, 2013-2020 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.br